INDEX

S.NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

TOPIC
CBS An Overview
Familiarisation to Finacle & Internet Explorer Setting
Customer ID Creation
Opening of SB/CA Accounts
Transaction Maintenance
Transactions in Sundry / Suspense A/Cs
Account Freezing
Lien Maintenance
Inventory Movement
Cheque Book Maintenance/Stop Payment
Demand Drafts/Pay Orders
Term Deposits
Clearing
Cash Credit/Overdrafts Accounts
Security Register Maintenance
Limit Node Maintenance
Opening of Loan Account
Standing Instructions
Inland Bills
Viewing, Printing, Downloading of Report
DBA Activities
Memo Pad Inquiry & Maintenance
Signature Capturing
Branch implementation cycle under CBS
Networking
Premigration Audit & Implementation Sign Off
Premigration Audit Certificate
Post Migration Check List
Migration Day
CBS Implementation Signoff Certificate
IMPORTANT INQUIRY & REPORT OPTIONS IN FINACLE
List of Scheme Codes with their Product codes
Exercises

Page 1 of 294

PAGE NO.
2
5
18
39
61
84
92
94
99
107
120
128
163
185
207
215
219
224
228
241
247
258
263
269
271
274
275
276
277
278
280
284
288

CENTRALISED BANKING SOLUTION - AN OVERVIEW

BACKGROUND
The face of Banking Industry is changing continuously. What Banking is today is quite different
from what it was in the years gone by. Some of the present trends in banking industry are as
under

Focus on Customer Relationship

Introduction of many Value Added Services
Connectivity of branches
Multiplicity of Delivery Channels
Focus on MIS & Risk Management
Focus on Reduction of Transaction Cost

The present trends are indicative of the times to come. The future scenario in the industry can be
visualized. Going by the happenings all around us, we get an indication of what lies in store for the
industry in the future. Expected trends in the industry are as under.

Increase in THE EXPECTATIONS of Customers

Increase in Healthy Competition
A greater variety of Products and Delivery Channels in the market
Centralised Customer Management
Information Technology to act as an integrator between demands on the industry and
services rendered
Internet Portals to bring the Customer Closer

The biggest challenge before the Banking Industry today is that posed by the customers. The
customer today is more informed and aware than before. Also his level of expectation is much
higher than it was earlier. Some of the challenges thrown before the Banking Industry on account
of Customer Expectations are as under

Convenience Anywhere, Anytime banking

Need for Diverse products and facilities
Need for Value addition & Reduced cost
Instant access to information and facilities- customer is well informed about various
products and options available.

It is in this backdrop that the bank has decided to go in for the centralized banking solution (cbs).
Pnb is the first nationalized bank to go in for the centralized banking solution from Infosys and is
implementing its flagship banking product Finacle.
WHAT IS CENTRALIZED BANKING SOLUTION
Under the Centralized Banking Solution the data of all the branches will be stored at a Data
Centre. This effectively means that all operations at the connected branches will happen through
Servers at Data Centre and Branch will be spared of any botheration regarding safe-keeping of its
data or Day-End and Day-Begin operations, in its current sense. Branches will be having only
Windows Based PCs which are capable of running Internet Explorer. Other Delivery Channels like
ATMs etc. will also be connected to Data Centre through ATM Switch.

Page 2 of 294

From customers perspective, he will become a customer of the Bank, not a single branch. This
will facilitate Any-where, Anytime Banking. Although internally logical identity of the branches
(Referred as SOL-Service Outlets in CBS) will be maintained.
From Banks perspective, centralized control over the application and processes will be ensured,
apart from availability of effective MIS on real-time basis. All periodical returns may be generated
centrally.
CENTRALISED BANKING WITH FINACLE

Finacle is an integrated, on-line, enterprise banking system designed to provide the "eplatform, developed by M/s Infosys, Bangalore and being used internationally and also by
major private & foreign banks operating in India.
It is functionally rich and addresses the retail and corporate banking requirements.
Finacle is open architecture allows easy integration with other business applications and
multiple delivery channels
High level of security control and audit capabilities
Designed for optimum Usage Of Network Bandwidth
Provides a browser based GUI interface to Finacle
Transaction space integrated with web based applications such as e-mail, chat etc.

CONNECTIVITY
The Branches will be connected to the Data Centre through a variety of connectivity options, like
Leased Line, ISDN, Radio Link, Optical Fibre, VSATs etc. It is planned to provide 3-level
redundancy to branches to ensure uninterrupted connectivity.

MAIN FEATURES
1. There are two Functional Modulesa. Retail and Corporate Module-encompassing Saving Accounts, Current Accounts, Term
Deposits, Cash Credit Accounts, Overdraft Accounts, Term Loans, Demand Loans.
b. Trade Finance Module-encompassing Inland & Foreign Bills, Forward Contracts, Inland &
Foreign Documentary Credits, Inland & Foreign Bank Guarantees, Inland & Foreign
Remittances and Preshipment Credits
2. Branches to start operations after Data Centre BOD Operations
3. Data Centre to initiate EOD operations, only after all connected branches have signed-off for
the day.
4. Periodic Jobs & Reports - Definition and Execution either at Data Center or Branch level.
Other tools & services are1. Extensive on-line help
2. Complete Management of security forms
3. Clearing Operations
4. Interest Calculation & Service Charges
5. Letter Generator, Report writer
6. Extensive Audit Trail
7. On-line Signature Display in GUI
8. Application & User level security
9. Absolute Maker-Checker Concept
10. Controlled Error handling through well defined exceptions
11. Interest Rates, Conversion Rates, User Workclasses & their access levels/ passing powers
& Service Charges to be centrally maintained by Data Centre.

Page 3 of 294

Beyond the basic application, the package has been fully customized and parameterized as per
existing Bank Guidelines, by our own core team, trained by Infosys. Future maintenance of
application and parameters is planned to be handled by data center, thereby reducing Banks
dependence on vendors.Wherever required, change in Banks systems & procedures are being
and shall be considered & approved by a Business Reengineering committee constituted at Top
Management level.
ADVANTAGES

Anywhere,Anytime Banking
Customers having 24X7X365 access
Platform for diversifying the business
Optimum utilization of human resources
MIS, Data Warehousing and Data Mining
Secured Control
Connectivity to Centralised delivery channels like ATM, Telebanking, Remote Access and
gateway to Internet Banking
Customer Relationship Mgmt.

ROLLOVER OF BRANCHES
Members of the Implementation Team constituted at the Zonal Level shall do the roll over/
implementation. The implementation team shall be responsible for Data Migration at the branches,
end user training, hand holding support during the implementation; troubleshooting and Zonal help
desk support to branches.

Page 4 of 294

Prepared by Makarand B Kedare

Sr.Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
FINACLE FAMILIARIZATION & NAVIGATION
Before working on Finacle, a user should get familiarized with
-

Internet Explorer & setting properties of Internet Explorer to make it enable for Finacle
Login first time in Finacle & changing password.
Finacle environment & use of various function keys on Keyboard

A. INTERNET EXPLORER
An icon Internet Explorer is available on the desktop of the users computer. Bring the mouse
pointer on the icon and double click (left button of mouse in a quick succession). If the user is not
familiar with clicking mouse in quick succession, he/she may click left button of mouse once and
press Enter key available on the keyboard.

Double Click left button of mouse

in quick succession

Single Click left button of mouse

Screen 1
You shall get the login screen of finacle on desktop. But before we discuss about logining into
finacle, we should know how to change setup of Internet Explorer to make it enable for Finacle.
B. INTERNET EXPLORER SETTINGS FOR FINACLE
Double click on 'Internet Explorer' shortcut, which is on the desktop.
Go to Menu 'Tools ->Internet Options'

Page 5 of 294

Screen 2
In the 'General' page, change the address to the homepage of Finacle, allotted to you by the Data
Centre, e.g. http://10.192.2.17:81/finacle/finacle.html

Click mouse in
Address field and
enter server
address

Screen 3
Click on 'Security' page. Click on 'Trusted Sites'. Click on 'Sites' button, as shown in Screen 4.

Page 6 of 294

Step 1 Click on Security

Step 2 Click on Trusted Sites

Step 3 Click on Sites

Screen 4
Uncheck 'Required server verification (https) for all sites in this zone'. Type the server address
allotted to you by the Data Centre e.g. 10.192.2.17 and click on 'Add' button. Click on 'OK' button.
In the same page i.e. 'Security', click on 'Custom Level' button as shown in Screen 5.

Step 1 Enter Server IP address

Step 2 Click on Add button

Step 4 Click on OK button

Step 3 Click here to

remove Correct sign

Step 5 Click on Custom level button

Screen 5
Scroll down to 'Microsoft VM ->Java Permissions' and click on 'Custom' radio button. Click on
'Java Custom Setting' button.

Page 7 of 294

Step 2 Click on custom which is

under Microsoft VM

Step 1 Click on scroll down button

and come to Microsoft VM option as
shown in step 2
Step 3 Click Java Custom Settings
button

Screen 6
Click on 'Edit Permissions' page. Under 'Unsigned Content->Run Unsigned Content', click on
'Enable' radio button.

Step 1 Click on Edit Permissions

Step 2 Click on Enable

Screen 7
-

Scroll down to 'Signed Content->Run Signed Content' and click on 'Enable' radio button. Click
on 'OK' button. Click on 'OK' button as shown in Screen 8.

Page 8 of 294

Step 2 Click on Enable

Step 1 Click on Scroll

down button to come to
Signed contents
Step 3 Click on OK
button

Screen 8
Click on 'Connections' page. Click on 'LAN Settings' button.

Step 1 Click on
Connections

Step 2 Click on LAN

Settings

Screen 9
Check (i.e. correct sign) 'Automatically Detect Setting'. Click on 'OK' button. In the Main setting
window, click on 'OK' button as shown in Screen 10.

Page 9 of 294

Step 1 Click on Automatically detect

settings so that Correct sign appears

Step 2 Click on OK button

Step 3 Click on OK button

Screen 10
Click on 'Refresh' icon or goto menu 'View' and click on 'Refresh' menu option. Click on view
menu again and uncheck status bar, if checked as shown in Screen 11.

Screen 11
Under Tool Bars - Uncheck Standard Buttons, if checked. Check Address bar, if unchecked
(Optional) as shown in Screen 12. Rest should be unchecked.

Page 10 of 294

Screen 12
C. LOGGING INTO FINACLE (1ST TIME)
A user is authorized to log into Finacle in a CBS branch by providing him a user_id and password
by Data Centre.
1. User Name Ensure that the cursor is blinking in the User Name field; if it is not blinking in
this field, bring the mouse in this field and click left button of mouse once. Enter user_id
provided by the Data Centre. Press Enter or Tab key. The cursor shall blink in password
field as shown in Screen 13.
2. Password Enter password as provided to you by the Data Centre. Press Enter key
twice or click left button of mouse on Login button. System will display a message box on
the desktop stating You are a New user hence please change your password as shown in
screen 13.

Screen 13
3. The message displayed on the screen has OK button. Click left button of mouse on OK or
press enter. System shall display the login screen with two more fields (screen 14).

Page 11 of 294

Screen 14
4. Bring the mouse pointer in New Password field and click left button of mouse.
5. New Password User need to enter minimum six characters password of his/her choice.
User may enter password containing alphabets and numerals. Press Enter Key.
6. Confirm New Password User must enter exactly the same password as entered in
previous field. System checks whether the user is sure of his/her password.
7. Press Enter key twice or click left button of mouse on Login button. If both the passwords
i.e. the passwords entered in New Password and Confirm New Passwords fields tally, then
only system will allow the user to log into Finacle.
Note Wherever click or click mouse is mentioned, it means click left button of the mouse.
D. FINACLE USER MENU
Once the user successfully logs into Finacle, he/she shall get list of menus as per the type of
user, e.g. if the user logs into finacle as DBA, he/she may get different list of menus than a
general user. Screen 15 shows list of menu options available to General User.

Page 12 of 294

User defined
Favorites
Main Menu
Sub Menu
Progress
Indicator

Menu
Option
Message
Area/Help Bar

Type name of
Menu Option &
press Enter Key

Screen 15
Action button

Latest Instructions
from Data Centre
(Scrolling
Message/Text)

Left hand side window consists of list of menu options. Menu options are grouped as per their
use/purpose. E.g. menu options required for remittances are grouped under Remittances
Menu. User can click left button of mouse on + sign appearing on left hand side of menu to
expand it further. User shall get list of menu options as shown in screen 15. E.g. If user click on
+ sign of Customer Accounts Menu, he/she may get a list of sub menus (having + sign on left
hand side, e.g. Authorization Menu, Accounts Maintenance Menu etc.) and also list of actual
menu options (having short name of menu option in square brackets e.g. Interest Table
Maintenance [INTTM] etc).

User can click on + sign appearing on left side of sub menu to further expand it.
Or user can double click on actual menu option (indicated with name of menu option in
square bracket) to open it.

USER DEFINED FAVORITES

User can group frequently used menu (by him) options on right hand side window called as
favorites. Steps to create favorites
E.g. Steps to create favorite for Interest Table Maintenance [INTTM]

Click mouse on menu option Interest Table Maintenance [INTTM].

Press Control+C
Click mouse on Favorites (right hand side window)
Press Control+V

Page 13 of 294

Steps to remove menu/menu options from favorites

Click mouse on menu/menu option which is to be removed

Press Control+X

E. HOW TO EXECUTE MENU OPTION?

There are two ways to get into a menu option.
1. In the list of menu options or from favorites, find out the menu option to be executed and
double click on it.
2. Or write the short name of the menu option in the field provided at left-bottom side of
the screen with the heading Menu option and press Enter Key.
F. PROGRESS INDICATOR
Progress indicator uses three different colors to indicate status of operation.

Green System is ready i.e. control is currently with the browser. User can operate the
system.
Yellow Browser is performing internal processing like assembling/painting screen as
per requirement. User should not operate the system.
Red Browser is communicating with the server. i.e. browser is sending/receiving data
from server. User should not operate the system.

G. ACTION BUTTONS
Every action button has a specific purpose. E.g. If user clicks mouse on WhoAmI button,
system will display user_id of the user who is currently logged in & other information like date,
name of SOL in a rectangular box. Use of these action buttons shall be discussed later in this
chapter.
H. MESSAGE AREA/HELP BAR
In finacle, if user needs any help in entering data in a field, he shall bring the cursor in that field
and press F1 key, the system may display purpose of that field on this message/help bar. As
also, at various stages system may display messages like Operation Successful, Record
Verified etc on this message bar as and when required.
I. SCROLLING MESSAGE
As and when Data Centre wishes to give instructions or guidelines to all the SOLs, it may
communicate the same through this area. The message will keep scrolling from right to left.
There are three buttons provided on right side of this bar

Left button Click on this button to Fast Forward the message.

Middle button Click on this to stop message from scrolling.
Right button Click on this button to Fast Rewind the message.

Page 14 of 294

J. FUNCTION KEYS AND NAVIGATION IN FINACLE

PHYSICAL KEY
F1
F2
(List button on action Bar)
F3
(Back button)
F4
(Accept button)
F5
(Background button)
F6
(NextBlk button)
F9
F10
(Commit button)
F11
(Transmit button)
F12
(PrevBlk button)
TAB
ENTER
DOWN Arrow
(NextRec button)
UP Arrow
(PrecRec button)
CTRL+D
CTRL+ E (Explode)
CTRL+F
CTRL+U
CTRL+X
SHIFT+F4
SHIFT+TAB

DESCRIPTION
Field Level Help (In a field, if user presses F1 key, system
may display necessary help about the field)
In some of the fields like City, State, Intt. Rate Code, Mode
of Operation etc, system provides list of valid codes. User
may press F2 in such fields for list of valid codes
Quit. In a menu option which is activated, user may press
this key to quit from the menu option without saving the
details.
Accept. In a menu option, user may press this key to accept
the data entered at various stages.
Back Ground menu (In a menu option, user may press this
key to activate background menu)
Next Block (next page) (In a menu option, user may press
this key to go to next page/block, as and when its
applicable)
View Signatures (Alt+F4 to Close) (In a/c no field, after
entering valid a/c no, user may press this key to view
signature/list of signatures attached to the account.)
Commit (In a menu option, user may press this key to
save/commit data entered.)
Next Field/Next Page on same Screen
Previous Block (previous page) (In a menu option, user may
press this key to go to previous page/block as and when its
applicable)
Go to the Next field
Go to the Next Field
Next Record (In a list or result of a query)
Previous Record (In a list or result of a query)
Page Down on a List (In a list or result of a query)
Explode
Clear Field
Page up on a List (In a list or result of a query)
Put BOD (todays) date
Select the current item from the list
Go to the Previous Field

K. BACKGROUND MENU
Background menu is provided in finacle to perform operations like a/c ledger inquiry, cheque
book inquiry, interest table inquiry, change of password etc. Background menu plays a very
important role in day to day functioning.

Page 15 of 294

Screen 16
e.g. If the user is in menu option for passing transactions and wishes to see account ledger,
instead of coming out of menu option, user can press F5 key or Background button available
on action bar to invoke background menu. Steps to execute background menu

Press F5 key or click on Background button.

Use Up/Down arrow key to scroll through list of options
As the user scrolls through the list in background menu, number applicable for current
option appears in Make your Choice field.
Go to the required option and press F11 key or click on Transmit button on action bar.
The selected option gets activated. Perform the operation as required.
After completing the operation, user may press F3 to quit from selected background
operation and return to the menu option in which he/she was working before pressing
F5 key.

L. LOGGING OUT OF FINACLE

User may type Exit in menu option field as shown in Screen 17 below and press Enter key;
alternatively, user can click on Logout button as shown in Screen 17. System will display a
message in a rectangle box stating Logout from Finacle? User may click on Yes button to quit
from Finacle.

Page 16 of 294

Step 2 - Click mouse

on Yes to exit

Step 1 - Click mouse on

Logout button

Step 1 - Type EXIT &

press Enter key

Screen 17
DOs
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Never disclose password to others.

Avoid entering password in presence of other persons.
Change own password on regular interval; menu option to change password is PWMNT.
Exit/logout from finacle while leaving seat.
Read instructions/messages appearing in Scrolling Text/Message area.

DONTs
1. Never click on Back button of Internet Explorer while working in Finacle; otherwise system
may abnormally terminate the current session and may not allow to login again using the
same user_id. In such case, contact branchs DBA/System Administrator for further action.
2. Never close Internet Explorer window using X button (available at right-top side) while
working in Finacle; otherwise system may abnormally terminate the current session and
may not allow to login again using the same user_id. In such case, contact branchs
DBA/System Administrator for further action.

Page 17 of 294

Prepared By : Anil Aggarwal

Sr.Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
CUSTOMER ID CREATION
To open any type of Account, as Principal A/c Holder in Finacle, Customer_id is required. The
menu option for Customer ID Creation is CUMM i.e. Customer Master Maintenance. With one
Cust_id, any number/or type of accounts of a customer can be opened in Finacle, from any CBS
branch. Customer creation requires filling in the basic information pertaining to a customer as
follows:
Code
<G>
<E >
<M>
<N>
<T >
<U>
<P>

Description
General Customer Detail
Customer Currency Detail
Customer Minor Detail
Non Resident Customer Detail
Trade Finance Detail
Buyer or Seller Limit Detail
Persons Detail

<G> General Details and <E> Currency Details are compulsorily to be fed in the system at the
time of customer creations. The other details e.g. Minor details, Non Resident Details, Trade
Finance Details etc. are required to be fed only when the customer id is created for such type of
customers and these become co-mandatory at that time.
How to create Customer_ID?
To create Customer_id, we have to choose menu option CUMM.
Type CUMM in the Menu Option field available at left-bottom side of finacle, and press ENTER
key. This menu can also be selected from the main menu by double clicking of mouse on :
Customer Accounts Menu Accounts Maintenance Menu Customer Maintenance Menu
in the sequence.
System shall display screen for Customer Master Maintenance. You can press F1 for help, the
help will be displayed at status bar. The functions available are A-ADD, C-COPY, D-SUSPEND, IINQUIRE, L-LIST, M-MODIFY, U-UNSUSPEND, V-VERIFY & X-CANCEL.
For creation of Customer_id we have to select A for ADD.
Page 1.

Page 18 of 294

1. Function: A for ADD and press F4.

System shall take you over to the next block against the field Customer Name.
2. Title Code (Mandatory): The first Field is for the title i.e. Mr., Mrs. etc. Press F2 for the
list and go to the respective title by pressing down arrow key. Select the title by pressing
Shift+F4; or if you know the title, type the same in field provided as defined in the list. Press
Tab to go to the next field i.e. customer name.
3. Customer Name (Mandatory): Write down the full name (Mandatory) of the customer of
whom the customer_id is being created. Press Tab to go on to next field.
4. Short Name: (Mandatory field) Enter Short name of the customer of maximum 10
characters. This short name shall be used anywhere in the package at the field provided
for short name for making inquiry in respect of accounts. Press Tab to go on to next field.
5. Type (Mandatory) Press F2 for list and go to the respective type by pressing down arrow
key. Whether a customer is a Trader or Other Individual can be selected by pressing
Shift+F4. Press Tab to go on to next field.
6. Primary Sol (Mandatory) shall appear by default. This is your Service Outlet Id. Press
Tab to go on to next field.
7. Status (Mandatory) by default it will appear as 999 i.e. Others. If the customer is Blind,
Parda-Nashin woman etc, same can be selected from the list available by pressing F2.
Press Tab to go on to next field.
8. Status as on (Mandatory) by default system shall display BOD date (Begin of Day i.e. the
date in which system is working), but can be changed to back date if required. Press Tab
to go on to next field.
9. Group to be left blank, as it is not required. Press Tab.
10. Occupation of a customer (Mandatory field). It can be selected from the list available or
its code can be entered manually. Press Tab.
11. Gender valid values are M for Male, F for Female and O for others. Press Tab.
12. Constitution (Mandatory) of a customer whether he is Individual, Joint, Trust etc.; can be
selected from the list or its code can be entered and Press Tab.
13. Staff, the field may be Y if the customer_id is created for a staff member and N for non staff
member.
14. Staff No. (Mandatory field if Staff flag is Y) this is to be filled in case the staff flag as
described above is Y. But, in case staff is from any of the CBS branches then his
employee id is to be given. Else, enter STAFF. For ex-staff members, enter STAFF in this
field.
15. Minor, fill Y in case the customer is a minor, else enter N. Further, in case the minor flag is
set as Y then it becomes mandatory to fill in the customer minors details by selecting M
option (discussed later in this document).
16. Bank Code, this need not to be filled in. However, 024 is our bank code can be given.
17. Non Resident, enter Y if the customer is non resident and also capture the non resident
details by selecting option N for Non Resident Customer Detail (discussed later in this
document).
Page 19 of 294

18. Nat. id card no.: enter national id card no. if any, this is required for verification of address,
in case the customer wants to give this. Otherwise, this can be left blank.
19. Date of birth (Mandatory field if Minor Flag is Y): this is applicable in case the customer
is minor. However, this can also be filled in if the customer-id is being created for Senior
Citizen.
20. Marital status: is to be given Y if married or N if not married.
21. Introducers details (Mandatory): Customer_id: the Customer_id of existing customer,
who is introducing this customer, is to be given. If the cust_id is entered, system will
automatically pick up the name of the introducer. Customer id need not to be entered in
case the introducer is not an existing customer in any of the CBS branches.
22. Name: applicable in case the customer_id is not to be given and introducer is not a
customer in the CBS branches.
23. Introd. Status: to be selected from the list by pressing F2 and then Shift+F4, is to know as
to who is introducer.
24. Frequency for Statement: may not be necessary to be filled in as this is required to be
filled in at Account Level. This is applicable in case of generating combined statement of all
the accounts of the customer. If the Combined Statement field is set to Y (3rd page), then
the frequency for statement need to be filled in. Press F6, the system shall display next
screen or next page on which the details of addresses of customer is to be filled in.
Page 2.

25. Address Type: Valid values are C, P & E (Mandatory field). Enter C for Communication
Address (which is by default appearing), P for Permanent Address and E for Employers
Address. Depending on the type of address selected in this field, system will print the
address on the communications to be sent to the customer or on his/her pass book.

Page 20 of 294

Communication Address (Mandatory if Address Type is C) : Within this City, State,

Postal Code, Country (Mandatory fields), Phone No., Telex No., Email_id, Swift code
and if the Swift Code of a customer or of Bank may also be filled in. Press F6. System
shall display next page.
Permanent Address (Mandatory if Address Type is P) : Within this City, State, Postal
Code, Country (Mandatory fields), Phone No., Telex No., Email_id may be filled. Press
F6. System shall display next page.
Page 3

26. Employer Address (Mandatory if Address Type is E) : as stated above, similar details of
the customer can be filled in here in addition to Mobile no.
27. Combined Statement (Mandatory field): By default value in this field is N. Enter Y if
customer is to be enabled for combined statement of accounts of this customer. If this field
is made Y, then statement of frequency (1st page) must be entered.
28. Language Detail: Lang Code: may be left blank or select from the list by pressing F2 and
select by pressing Shift+F4. In fact this is the language code in which the Finacle shall
work.
29. Nat Lang Name: may be left blank. Press F6. System shall display next page.

Page 21 of 294

Page 4.

30. Customer Classification: Community: this can be selected from the list by pressing F2
and then Shift+F4, as to which community the customer belongs.
31. Caste: valid code can be entered from the list.
32. Health code: though now a days this is not valid, yet can be filled in from the list available.
33. Customer Rating: customers rating, as it is assigned at the time of making an advance to
a customer whether his rating is AA, A+, A or B, can be entered.
34. As on: is the field on which the rating is assigned.
35. Cr. Card Holder: valid values are Y or N, can be entered here.
36. Card Details (Mandatory if Cr. Card Holder is set to Y): this is a free text field, the details of
Cr. Card can be entered here.
37. Customer Preferential till Date: May be left blank. Enter the date till which the customer is
entitled to Customer Preferential Rate. But in our bank we generally give Account
Preferential Rate and not the Customer Preferential rate.
38. Customer Tax Details: TDS Exempt end date: Enter date up to which the customer is
exempted from the tax; if no date is fed in, then the customer will always be eligible for TDS
as per rules. Further, this detail is applicable in case of TDS exemption in Term Deposits
when a customer submits 15H form.
39. Tax Slab: this is by default TDSGE (TDS general category), however, the other slab can
also be selected from the list available, which can be seen by pressing F2.

Page 22 of 294

40. TDS Cust_id: this is applicable in case there is joint account and the Customer_id is to be
given here from which the TDS is to be deducted.
41. TDS Exempt submission Date: this is the date on which the TDS exemption certificate is
submitted to the Bank.
42. TDS Exempt Ref. No.: enter the reference number of TDS exemption certificate.
43. TDS Remarks: any remarks related to TDS can be entered here.
44. PAN/GIR No.: enter the PAN/GIR number of Customer. Press F6, the system will display
the next page of Customers Financial Details.
Page 5.

45. Customer Financial Details as on: enter the date on which the customer assets were
evaluated.
46. Financial Yr. End month: enter the financial year and month for the customer.
47. Currency Code: enter the currency code.
48. Business Assets: enter the business assets of the customer.
49. Property Assets: enter the value of assets held in the form of property/ies.
50. Investments: enter the value of assets held in the form of investments.
51. Net worth: enter the net worth of the customer.
52. Deposits: enter the deposits of the customer in other bank.

Page 23 of 294

53. Limits with other banks/institutions: enter customer credit limits with other banks or
institutions.
54. As on: enter as on date for credit limits.
55. Fund Based: enter the total fund based limits of the customer.
56. Non-Fund Based: enter the total non-fund based limits of the customer.
57. Offline cum Debit Limits: enter maximum allowed offline debit transactions limit in home
currency.
58. Managers Opinion: enter the managers opinion about the customer. Press F6, the
system will display the next page of Customers Charge Details.
Page 6

59. Charge Turnover Required: the default value has been set as N, however, it can be set
as Y if customer wise charges report is required.
60. Charge Code: this can be selected from the list.
61. Acct Level Charges Account: account number of the customer from which the charges
are to be recovered may be entered.
62. Sol_id: enter the sol id of the branch where the above account is maintained.
63. Cust Level Charges Account: enter account number for debiting customer level charges
e.g. charges for combined statement which is defined in the customer master.

Page 24 of 294

64. Passport No (Mandatory field, if Non Resident flag is set to Y on the 1st page of General
Details): enter Passport Number of the customer.
65. Issue Date: enter date of issue of passport.
66. Passport Details (Mandatory field, if Non Resident flag is set to Y on the 1st page of
General Details): enter other details of passport.
67. Expiry Date: enter passport expiry date.
68. Purge Allowed? By default it is given N. As at present no purging is allowed, therefore,
this flag is not required to be changed.
69. Purge Remarks: this is the text field any remarks can be entered here. But as no purging
is being done, it can be left blank.
70. Allow Sweeps? : By default value of this field is N, however, if sweeps is to be allowed
between the accounts of a customer then it may be set as Y.
71. DSA id: May be left blank.
Press F6, the system will display the next page of Free Text Fields. D
Page 7.

72. There are 15 free text fields provided: enter any information relating to customer which
could not be captured in the previous 6 pages and press F6. The system will take you over
to the very first page of the customer master maintenance.
Press F4; the cursor will be placed at Enter Option Block.
Page 25 of 294

Currency Details:
Press F2, the system shall display the list of various options available and select E (Customer
Currency Details) by pressing Shift+F4. Press F4. The system shall display the following screen:

As it is displayed in the message bar above press Explode to go to the details screen,
please press Ctrl+E to explode this screen. The system shall display the following type of
screen:

Page 26 of 294

Following four fields are displayed:

1) Withholding Tax % (by default it is 0.0000)
2) Floor Limit for With Holding Tax (this is also 0.00 by default)
3) Customer Preferential % (Cr.)
4) Customer Preferential % (Dr.)
Fields 1 & 2 may be filled with 0 (zero). Fields 3 & 4 may be left blank.
Field 1 and 2 are not to be changed and shall remain as it is. In case of 3 & 4 provided for
Customer Preferential % Credit and Debit any +/- rate of interest can be given which will provide
extra or less interest in case of Cr. and charge extra or less interest in case of Dr. in all his
accounts opened in this customer_id. However, these fields are also not required to be filled in
and shall remain unchanged.
Press F4 and system shall come back on the previous screen of E details.
If the customer wants to open his account in some other currency then another currency can be
added to his customer master. For adding another currency Press Down Arrow Key, the star (*)
appearing just before the Currency already entered, will come down and second currency can be
entered in the currency column or can be selected from the list, which appears by pressing F2,
and selecting it by pressing Shift+F4 key. The following type of screen will appear:

Explode it by pressing Ctrl+E key, again the following 4 fields shall appear:
1) Withholding Tax % (by default it is 0.0000)
2) Floor Limit for With Holding Tax (this is also 0.00 by default)
3) Customer Preferential % (Cr.)
4) Customer Preferential % (Dr.)
Repeat the process as described above.
Press F4; the cursor will be placed at Enter Option Block.
If no more information is required to be captured then press F10.
Page 27 of 294

The system shall save the Customer creation details and generate Customer_id Number prefixing
by D alphabet and suffixing 8 numerals e.g. D12345678.
Note :
A. If the Minor flag on the 1st page is set to Y, then Customer Minor Details must be
filled in.
B. If the Non Resident flag on the 1st page is set to Y, then Non Resident Customer
Details must be filled in.
C. If the Trade Finance flag on the 1st page is set to Y, then Trade Finance Details must
be filled in.
If the customer is a Minor, then make a minor flag as Y and the system shall automatically take
you over to the Minor Customer Detail page as displayed below:

Date of Birth shall be displayed by the system itself picking up from the 1st page of General Detail
and accordingly shall calculate date of Majority and display the same as shown in the above
screen.
Guardian Code (Mandatory field) shall be selected from the list as to who shall be the guardian.
Guardian Name (Mandatory field) is the text field and the name of guardian can be entered here.
Address (Mandatory field), here the address of Guardian can be entered.
City (Mandatory field) can be selected from the list available.
State (Mandatory field) can be selected from the list available.
Postal Code (Mandatory field) i.e. Pin Code of the place of guardian can be entered here.

Page 28 of 294

Countrys name (Mandatory field) can be selected from the list. However, generally it will be IN
i.e. India. Press F4, the system shall again take you back on the page of general details.
In case the customer is a Non Resident, then on the first page of General Details, Non Resident
Flag is to be made Y. The system shall take you over to the page No. 6 as displayed above. The
necessary details are to be captured pertaining to the non resident customer.
Also in the Enter Option field, select Non Resident Customer Detail by entering option as N in the
option block and press F4, the following screen shall be displayed:

Nationality (Mandatory field): press F2 for list; select the country by pressing Shift+F4.
Date of becoming Non-Resident: enter the date on which the customer became Non Resident.
Country Code: press F2 for list; select the country by pressing Shift+F4.
Country Type: valid values are B for Bilateral and E for External.
Relation Code: code of relation with the person, residing locally is to be given here. Select the
code from the list available by pressing F2 and then by pressing Shiftf4.
Relative Name: enter the name of relative. This is a text field.
Local Address, City, State, Postal Code, Phone No. enter respective details in these fields.
State, Country can be selected from the list available, which can be seen by pressing F2.
Telex No. enter telex no. if any and
Non Resident Becoming Resident, enter date on which the non resident customer became
resident. Normally this date shall remain blank till the customers status is non resident.
If a customer is a Trade Finance Customer, enter Trade Finance Customers flag Y and in the
option block enter T for Trade Finance Customer Detail in Enter Option field and press F4.
The system shall display the following screen:

Page 29 of 294

Name, Address, City, State, Country will appear by default. Enter Telephone No., FAX and
Telex, if any.
Code given by Central Bank: enter Exporter/Importers code assigned by RBI.
Code given by Trade Authority: enter the code allotted by the Trade Authority.
Exp/Imp? Enter valid values, E-Exporter, I-Importer, B-Both, P-Exporter eligible for RPC, A- Exp
and Imp eligible for RPC, O-Others.
Native: enter Y if the customer is a native of the country, else N.
Review Date: enter Importer/Exporter latest review date, if any.
SSI? Enter Y if Small Scale Industry, else N.
100% EOU? Enter Y if a 100% Export Oriented Unit.
Status: Valid values are E, I & B. Enter E, for Export Caution, I for Import Caution & B for Both
Import and Export Caution, else left blank if no caution is to be marked.
Party Const: Enter the constitution of the customer as to whether he is an Individual, Company
etc. The same can be selected from the list (Press F2 for List) & (Shift F4 for selection of a code
from the list)
Special Party? Enter Y, if the customer is a special party, else N.
Party Type: Select from the list available as to whether the party is an Importer, Exporter or
Other. The other code is also available.
Production Cycle: Enter the number of days required to process and ship the goods for export.
After the above fields have been captured the screen will look like as follows:

Page 30 of 294

Press F6 to go to the next page as under:

Forward Contract Limit: enter forward contract limit, if any, specified for the party.
DC Sanctioning Authority: who has sanctioned the documentary credit limit, its valid code from
the list available, is to be entered here.
FC Sanctioning Authority: enter the code of sanctioning authority of Forward Contract as per the
list available.
Authorised Signatory 1, 2 & 3, enter the name of authorised signatory in the columns provided.
DC Margin Percentage: enter margin prescribed for Documentary Credit.
DC Sanction Expiry Date: enter the date on which the DC Sanctioned limit is to expire.
Page 31 of 294

DC Next Number Code: enter code for generation of DC number as per the list available or select
from the list by pressing F2 and then ShiftF4.
Inland Trade Allowed (Mandatory field): enter Y if inland trade allowed, else N.
Remarks: enter remarks if any. Press F4, the system shall take you over to the enter option field.
Enter U for capturing detail of Buyer or Seller Limit Detail and Press F4. System shall display
the following screen:

Here the details of Buyers and Sellers of the customers can be captured.
Drawee Code: enter the drawee code of the customer, (this code can be captured through the
menu option FPCM Foreign Party Code Maintenance). Enter the party code in the first column, go
on to the next field by pressing Tab and enter whether applicable U for Usance Bills and S for
Sight Bills. Here U and S do not have any validations. Go to the next field. This field is applicable
to delete flag, which need not to be filled in. This is applicable in case the detail of any party is to
be deleted. Press Tab for next field.
Enter/Select Currency Code from the list (press F2).
Press Tab, enter limit upto which limit import from this party is fixed.
Press Tab, enter Utilised Import Limit so far.
Press Tab, enter similar details for Inland Bills in the next two columns. Similarly capture the
details of Export Limit for export to a particular party. Press F4, system shall take you over to the
option block again.
Persons Details:
In this option detail of persons associated with the company like Director, Guarantor etc. can be
entered.
Enter P at the Option Block and Press F4; the system shall display the following screen:

Page 32 of 294

Enter the customer id of the related person and press F11, the system shall display the name of
the person whose customer id is given here. Press Tab, enter the relation code of the person
from the list available with F2. Press F4, the cursor shall appear on to the Option Block. The
necessary information relating to a customer creation is complete.
Press F10 to COMMIT. System shall generate a Customer_Id.
CUSTOMER ID VERIFICATION:
The verification of a customer creation can be done by the different user through the menu option
CUMM. The procedure is given hereunder:
Menu Option CUMM: Press Enter: Function: V (verify), press Tab or Enter Key, enter
Customer_id generated by the system or Press F2 the system shall display list of all the
customer_id created/modified pending for verification, select the customer_id (which is to be
verified) by pressing Shift+F4. Press F4, the system shall display the particulars of the customer
entered in General Details. Press F6, the system shall display the next page. Visit all the 7 pages
of General Details by pressing F6 (six times) and check the details entered by the user. When
F6 is pressed for 7th time the system shall display the first page of General Details. Press F4, the
cursor shall blink at the option block.
Visit Currency Details by entering E at the option block and then by pressing F4. Explode the
currency screen by pressing Ctrl+E. Press F4 twice, the cursor shall blink at the option block
again.
If no other details are entered, press F10 to commit. The system shall display the message
Record Verified, which effectively means that the cust_id is verified.
Note :
Following options need to be visited, during verification, for the Minor, NRE, and Trade Finance
Customers.
a) In case of Minor, capture G, E and M details before verification.
Page 33 of 294

b) In case of Non Resident Customer, capture G, E and N details before verification.

c) In case of Trade Finance Customer, capture G, E, T, U (if applicable) details before
verification.
d) P (Persons Details) can be captured wherever required.
The Customer Creation and Verification is thus complete.
MODIFICATION OF A CUSTOMER_ID
System allows modifications of customer_id details, through the menu option CUMM.
Menu option CUMM. In function field, type M (Modify), enter Cust_id in the Customer id field and
Press F4. The system shall display General Details of the customer. Modify the details wherever
necessary. Follow the steps as explained in creation of cust_id.
In case of a modification is done in customer_id, the same is required to be verified by the other
user. The verification procedure is the same as described above through the same menu i.e.
CUMM.
In case, if any modification in the record of Customer_id has been erroneously done, the same
may not be verified. Only the user who has modified the details can cancel the same. The system
shall cancel all the modifications effected last which are not verified and restore its previous status.
To cancel the modifications, in function field of CUMM, enter X (Cencel), enter the cust_id in
customer id field, Press F4 twice and Press F10 for commit.
SUSPENDING A CUSTOMER_ID
A customer_id can be suspended in Finacle. The suspended customers existing accounts will
continue to be operated upon but new account using the same customer_id can not be opened
during the currency of his customer_id Suspension. However, the suspended customer_id can be
unsuspended again.
The suspension of a customer and its verification can take place through menu option CUMM.
A customer can be suspended by entering D in the Function Block and Customer_id, which is to
be suspended, followed by pressing of F4 twice and then F10 for Commit; the same is required to
be verified by the other user. The verification can be done through menu option CUMM, by
entering V in the function block and after entering Customer_id, which has been marked as
suspended, by pressing F4 twice and then F10, for Commit, the verification of a suspended
customer is complete.
To unsuspend a customer the procedure is exactly the same (as described above) except entering
U (for unsuspend) in place of D above in the Function field of CUMM menu option. The rest of
the procedure is the same. This also requires verification.
INQUIRY OF A CUSTOMER
Inquiry of a customer can be made through menu option CUMM or CUMI. Invoke menu option
CUMM, Enter I (inquiry) in the Function field, enter Customer Id of a person whose Customer
details is required to be inquired into. By pressing F4 system shall display the details of a
customer. Various details pertaining of a customer can be inquired into by entering required
option in the option block and then by pressing F4. The next page/screen can be visited by
pressing F6 as described above. Similarly, inquiry through CUMI can also be made because the
system displays the same screen as it displays in CUMM menu option.
Page 34 of 294

CUSTOMER SELECTION
Customer Selection, I.e. selection of customer id/s or customer/s or inquiry of a customer, can be
made through the menu option CUS filling in various parameters available therein. This is a menu
option through which we can select a particular type of customer/s by opting criteria as seen in the
following screen:

We can enter Name or Short Name & Press F4; system will display all the customer ids, created
starting with the said name of all the SOLs. If the said selection is to be made only of a particular
SOL, then SOL id can be given, the system will display the records as per selected criteria by
reducing its information to the said SOL only. Similarly, selection of customers can be made by
giving any criteria as available in the above screen. The selected records can be further exploded
by pressing Ctrl+E keys, to see more details.
For the convenience of User, we have shown a selection, which has been made on the basis of
Community. This can be selected (by pressing ShiftF4) from the list available (PressF2) then
after selection & acceptance, the screen which will appear is shown on next page. A user may
select any record and explode the same by pressing Ctrl+E. The system shall display the details
of the customer, same as CUMM/CUMI, function I.

Page 35 of 294

CHANGE CUSTOMER_ID
If a customer_id is to be changed of an account, as it is required in case of migrated accounts,
where a customer is having more than one account and during migration each account is assigned
a different customer_id, then by using menu option CCA, Customer_id of an Account can be
changed. Change of Customer_id can be done even after the account is verified.
HOW TO CHANGE CUSTOMER_ID ?
Menu option CCA (Change Customer Id of Account)
Screen 8 shows various fields in this menu option.
Invoke menu option CCA.
1. Function M (Modify)
2. A/c No., enter Account number of which cust_id needs to be changed and Press F4.
System will display the cust_id of the Account No. entered. The cursor will blink on
Customer Id field displaying the existing Customer Id of the account as shown below:

3. Customer id, change the Customer id and Press F10 to commit.

Change in Customer_id needs to be verified by another user through same menu option i.e.
CCA.
PROCEDURE FOR VERIFICATION:
Invoke menu option CCA, enter V (verify) in Function field, fill in Account Number (or
select Account No. from the list by pressing F2 and then Shift F4) and Press F4. System
shall display the changed Customer_id. Press F10. The Customer_id will stand changed.
Summary
1. Customer_id is created through menu option CUMM.
Page 36 of 294

2. G: General Details & E Currency Details are mandatorily to be filled for each type
of customer creation.
3. Customer creation for Staff: Enter the Staff Flag as Y in General Details and enter his
PF Number in Staff No. Field, if he is a staff of a CBS implemented branch. If the staff
member is not from the CBS implemented branch or Ex Staff member then enter
STAFF.
4. Customer_id creation for Minor: Enter the Minor Flag as Y in General Details and in
addition to the G & E details i.e. Currency Details also enter the minor details through
sub option M (Customer Minor Details).
5. Customer_id creation for Non Resident: Enter the Non Resident Flag as Y in General
Details. Also enter the Non Resident Customer Details through sub option N, in
addition to G & E details.
6. Customer_id creation for Trade Finance customer: Make the Trade Finance Customer
Flag as Y in General Details. Also enter the Trade Finance Details through sub option
T in addition to G & E details.
7. Fill other details if required.
8. Verify Customer Creation
CUSTOMER MASTER PRINT:
For printing the customer master, use menu option CUMP. Through this menu option printing of
customer master can be done by giving a customer_id or range of customer_id. This report can
also be generated on the basis of selecting various other criteria like Customer Group,
Occupation, Constitution, Sector, Subsector, Health Code, Rating, Community, Suspended, Staff
only, Minor only, Non Res. Only, Authorised, Purge Flg etc. Invoke menu option CUMP, enter
users name in the Report to Field and fill in the other criteria, on the basis of which the report is
to be generated, & Press F4. A small window on the screen will appear. Enter the values as
follows:
Fore/Background?
Print Required?

F
N

BG Queue (leave Blank)

Press F10 to commit. Press F3 to go back to the main menu. Invoke menu option PR (Print
Report). To view this report make sure that (greater than sign) > is appearing before the name of
the report you want to view. Enter T in the field in which the cursor is blinking & Press F10. The
system will display the report. Press F4 to scroll up the report and Press F4 to scroll down the
report. For printing the report, please position > sign before the report you want to print and Press
Ctrl E. Fill No. of Copies field as displayed in the screen on next page and Press F4 to come
back on to the previous screen. Enter P in the column in which the cursor is blinking and Press
F10. The report will start printing. In this regard please make sure that before printing the report
Ilinkweb and Printer must be on.

Page 37 of 294

Page 38 of 294

Prepared by: Makarand B Kedare

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
OPENING OF SB/CA ACCOUNTS & MAINTENANCE
To open any customer account in Finacle, customer has to have a cust ID (menu option CUMM).
All types of accounts can be opened through the one menu option i.e. OAAC. Opening of new
account needs verification, which can be done through OAACAU.
Mandatory options in OAAC G (General Details) & S (Scheme Details)
Optional options in OAAC N (Nomination Details), A (Related Party Details) for joint A/c
holders details etc.
A. How to open SB/CA account ?
Menu option OAAC

Screen 1
1. Function O (Open).
2. Customer ID Enter cust id. If the short name of customer is known, type it and press F2.
Select customer from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
3. Currency Default INR (Indian Repees) is displayed. The system will allow to open an
account in currency which have been added in customer ID (option E-Customer Currency
Details).
4. Scheme Code type SB and press F2. In the list, first all scheme codes under
Inoperative GL subhead will be listed. Press Control+D (page down) and select scheme
code under Saving Fund GL subhead, by pressing Shift+F4.
5. GL Subhead system displays the GL subhead automatically.
6. Permanent A/c No. Nothing to be entered.
7. Copy A/c No. Nothing to be entered.

Page 39 of 294

Press F4. Account Opening form will be displayed.

1st Page

Screen 2
8. Acct Name System will automatically display the name of the customer entered in Cust-ID
record. System allows changing the name, but system will raise related exception after
committing the verification of account. If the user who is verifying the account has sufficient
work class, he can override the exception by pressing F4 and verify the account.
9. Acct Short Name This will be automatically displayed from Cust-ID. User can change the
short name.
10. A/c open Date BOD date is displayed. User can change the date.
11. Special Charge Code This field is used to give preferential charges. Press F2 to see the
list. Press Shift+F4 to select respective charge code.
12. Mode of Operation (Mandatory) Press F2 and select it by pressing Shift+F4.
13. Location Code Enter the population group to which customer belongs e.g Metro, Urban
etc. Press F2 and select it by pressing Shift+F4.
14. Account Mgr. User id of employee who is attached to this account as relationship
manager can be entered. Only employee Ids which are available in the list can be selected.
Press F2 and select it by pressing Shift+F4.
15. Cash Exception Limit Dr. - Default values is 99999999999999.99. E.g. if user wishes that
system should raise an exception if user tries to debit this account equal or above
Rs.100000/- by cash, the user can enter 100000 in this field.
16. Cash Exception Limit Cr. - Default values is 99999999999999.99. E.g. if user wishes that
system should raise an exception if user tries to credit this account equal or above
Rs.100000/- by cash, he can enter 100000 in this field.
17. Clg. Exception Limit Dr. Applicable for clearing.
18. Clg. Exception Limit Cr. Applicable for clearing.
19. Xfer Exception Limit Dr. Applicable for transfer.
20. Xfer Exception Limit Cr. Applicable for transfer. If the limits as mentioned in point 15 to
20 are changed by the user, system will raise exception Override Default Check when the
user commit verification of account; if the verifying official has sufficient work class he can
override the exception by pressing F4 key and authorize the account verification.
Page 40 of 294

21. Remarks free text field.

22. A/c Report Code Default is ZERO.
23. Ledger no. may not be necessarily filled.
24. Collect Charges Default is Y. This means, system will collect account maintenance
charges as and when they are due.
25. Turnover Details- Default is N. May be kept as it is. This field is Y, if customer wishes to
have account turnover details.
26. Relative to Staff Default is N.
27. Relative Staff ID If above field is set to Y, Staff Id in this field need to be entered. The
employee having the staff id entered in this field is barred from entering any transaction in
this account.
Press F6 to go to Next Page.
2nd Page

Screen 3
28. Passbook/Statement Valid values are P-Passbook, S-Statement, R-Deposit Receipt, BBoth P & S, N-None.
29. Statement If Passbook/Statement field is set to S (Statement) or B (Both P&S),
frequency for statement must be entered. There are five fields in statement.
Field 1: D Daily, W Weekly, M Monthly, F Fortnightly, Q Quarterly,
H Half yearly, Y Yearly
Field 2: 1 - First, 2 - Second, 3 - Third, 4 - Fourth week, M - Mid week,
L Last Week
Field 3: 1-Sunday, 2- Monday 7- Saturday & 8 - No weekly of
Field 4: Date of issue - 1 to 31
Field 5: For Holiday N Next, P Previous, S Skip

Page 41 of 294

Fields 2 & 3 are not required if frequency (field 1) is monthly, quarterly, half yearly
and yearly
Fields 2 ,3 & 4 are not required if frequency (field 1) is daily and fortnightly
Fields 2 & 4 are not required if frequency (field 1) is weekly
30. Local Calendar Default N. Not to be changed.
31. Dispatch Mode Press F1 for help. Fill appropriate value as per the codes defined in help.
32. Next Print Date Enter date on which next statement will be printed.
33. Download to PBF Default value is N. PBF stands for Positive Balance File, which required
for handling offline transactions.
34. Pay Interest Default Y, means interest will be paid for this account.
35. Collect Interest Default Y, means interest will be collected from this SF/CA account, if
TOD is granted.
36. Customer Pref. Interest (Cr.) We have already seen this field in currency details (option E)
in CUMM. Generally, in OAAC we should not fill any value in this field.
37. Customer Pref. Interest (Dr.) We have already seen this field in currency details (option E)
in CUMM. Generally, in OAAC we should not fill any value in this field.
38. Account Pref. Interest (Cr) If user wishes to give any preferential interest in this account,
over and above prevailing interest (explained in point 42). User can enter negative value if
user wishes to pay less interest. Dont try to give 1 in this field for Staff of our bank in SF
type of A/c. User should select SBSTF scheme code while opening staffs SB A/c.
39. Account Pref. Interest (Dr) If user wishes to charge any preferential interest from this
account, over and above prevailing interest. User can enter negative value if user wishes to
charge less interest.
40. Interest Cr A/c flag (Mandatory) Default is S. Valid values are S-Original A/c, O-Operative
A/c and T-Payment System. In most of the cases in SB A/cs, it will be S which means
whenever system wants to pay interest in this account, it will credit it to this account only.
41. Interest Dr A/c flag (Mandatory) Same as above field.
42. Int Rate Code For SBGEN scheme, it will be default SFGEN. This code stores interest
rate applicable for general publics SB A/c. Changes in interest rates will be done by Data
Centre. For staff SF A/c, interest rate code will be displayed as SFGEN. User need not
enter SFGEN in case of staff A/c, this code will be automatically picked up by the system
when the scheme code SFSTF is selected for staff members. If the interest rate code or
preferential interest in Dr/Cr are changed by the user, the system shall raise exception
Default Interest Parameter Change while committing the account verification; if the
verifying user has sufficient work class, he can press F4 to accept the exception and verify
the account.
43. Account Pegged Default is N, means system will pay prevailing rate of interest as and
when they are updated by Data Centre. This field will be Y in case of FDs in which system
will pay interest at contracted rate given while opening an FD a/c.
44. Pegging Review date Enter the date on which the pegging for the account is to be
reviewed. May not be required to change.
45. Pegging Frequency (Months/days) Enter months and days. May not be required for SB
A/c. User can press F4 to go to the Enter Option field or Press F6 to go to Next Page.
3rd Page

Page 42 of 294

Screen 3
46. Contact phone enter contact phone no.
47. Allow Sweeps - Enter Y if the sweep is allowed between accounts.
48. Interest Calc. Freq Cr and next three fields may not be entered.
49. Daily Compounding Interest Default N.
50. Tax (TDS) details may not be required to be entered for SB A/c.
Press F4 to go to Enter option field.
Scheme Details

Page 43 of 294

Screen 4
51. Enter Option Press F2, select S Scheme Details option (5th from top) by pressing
Shift+F4. Press F4 to get into scheme details. User can type S instead of pressing F2.
52. Availing Nomination facility default is N. Please make it Y if customer wishes to avail
nomination facility in this account. After making the flag as Y, press F4 to go to Enter
Option field. Other fields may not be entered, but these have been explained as below.
53. Cheque Allowed Default value is Y, which means cheque facility is allowed for this
account.
54. Charge for Cheque Default value is Y, which means cheque book charges to be levied.
55. Return Paid Cheques May be kept blank.
If cheques are to be returned to the
customer once they are paid, this value need to be filled in as Y.
56. Paid Cheque Return May be kept blank. Specify the frequency at which paid cheques
would be returned the customer.
57. A/c Health Code Press F2 and select value from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
58. Dr. Balance Limit The maximum debit allowed in this account. Generally 0 (zero) in
SF/CA type of A/cs.
59. Max. Allowed Limit The ceiling limit on the sanctions for this account. May be kept 0
(zero) for SB/CA accounts.
60. Debt. Acknowledgment Date May be kept blank in SF/CA type of A/cs.
For Transferred in A/c
User can enter the details for SB/CA accounts transferred from other branches as follows61. Interest Amount Enter the pending Interest amount.
62. Dr/Cr. Enter C if the transfer interest amount is Credit, else enter D for Debit.
63. Minimum Balance Enter the minimum balance during the month of transfer which needs
to be considered during next interest calculation.
64. A/c Balance (0.00), Created By, Created On, Deleted (N) are display fields. These fields will
be updated by the system automatically as and when operations take place in the a/c.
65. Press F4 to go to Enter Option field.
Nomination Details

Page 44 of 294

Screen 5
66. Enter Option - Press F2, select N Nomination details option (3rd from top) by pressing
Shift+F4. Press F4 to get into nomination details. User can type N instead of pressing F2.
67. Enter Nominee name (Mandatory)
68. Relationship (Mandatory) e.g. Father, Mother etc. Press F2, select relationship by
pressing Shift+F4.
69. Reg. No. Registration number for nominee is default generated by the system.
70. Please enter Address. (Mandatory) Two lines are available for address.
71. City (Mandatory) Type first 2-3 characters of city name press F2, select city code from the
list by pressing Shift+F4.
72. State (Mandatory)- press F2, select state by pressing Shift+F4. Country is default IN
(India).
73. Country (Mandatory) Default is IN (India). Need not be changed. If user wishes to change,
press F2 and select country by pressing Shift+F4.
74. Postal Code (Mandatory)- Enter Pin/Postal Code.
75. Nominee Minor Enter Y if nominee is minor.
76. Date of Birth if nominee is minor, date of birth of minor must be entered.
77. Enter guardians details as specified in this page.
78. Press F4 to go to Enter option field
Joint A/C Holders Details
79. Enter Option - Press F2, select A Related Party details option (1st from top) by pressing
Shift+F4. Press F4 to get into option details.

Screen 6
The first screen displays the Main Account Holders Details. To enter joint account holders
details, press Down Arrow of keyboard.

Page 45 of 294

80. Relation Type (Mandatory) Press F1 for help. The help displays various values for
relation codes. P (Power of Attorney), A (Authorised Signatory), L (letter of Authority), J
(Joint Holder), G (Guarantor) etc. Press Enter on OK button or click mouse on it. Enter the
value in this field.
81. Relation Code Press F2 and select the code from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
82. Despatch Mode If the account is enabled for statement, system gives user the option to
send the statement to related parties added through this option. Press F1 for help. Enter the
despatch mode in this field.
83. Designation Code Press F2 for list and select the code by pressing Shift+F4.
84. Customer ID If the related party (joint A/c holder) has a valid cust_id code, enter the same
here. In that case other details of the party like address need not be entered.
85. Name (Mandatory) Enter name of the related party. This field need not be field if partys
cust_id is entered.
86. If the cust_id of related party is not entered, Address, City, State, Country, Postal Code etc.
of the related party need to be filled in.
87. If user wishes to enter one more related party details, press Down Arrow and follow the
steps 80 to 87.
Press F4 to go to Enter option field. Press F10 to commit. System will display 16-digit
account number. Sometimes user may not get last digit of account on the screen. Please note
it, as it needs verification.
Account No. consists of following information. E.g. account no. generated by system is
4177000100001234.
417700
01
Sol id(6) Product code(2)

0000123
4
Account No.(7) Check digit(1)

Check digit is also a part of account no. User need not remember all 16 digits. Whenever user
accesses this account, user can simply enter 011234, system will automatically expand it to 16
digits. This facility is provided only when user accesses customers accounts of users own
branch. User must enter all 16 digits in account no. field for accounts of customers of other
branches.
B. How to verify newly opened account
Please note
1. The person who has opened the account through OAAC can not verify the account; as
Maker and Checker concept is applicable in Finacle, therefore maker can not be the
verifier.
2. During verification of account, no details can be changed, as all the fields are write
protected.
3. To modify account details of newly opened account, use menu option OAACAU function
M (Modify).
Menu option OAACAU
1. Function V.
2. Temporary A/c No. Enter the A/C No which is to be verified. User need not enter all 16
digits of account; user can enter short account no. of the account to be verified. If user
forgot to note account no. after committing OAAC, user can retrieve it by pressing F2 in this
field; select the account to be verified by pressing Shift+F4.
Page 46 of 294

3. Permanent A/c No. must not be entered. Press F4 to bring account details. User will see
General Details of account. Press F11 (Or click on Transmit button) twice to visit next page.
When the user is in 3rd page, press F4 to go to Enter option field.
4. Enter Option type S and press F4 to visit scheme details. Press F4 to come back to Enter
option field..
5. Enter Option If the user has entered nomination details for this account, the user should
visit it. Type N and press F4 to visit nomination details. Press F4 to come back to Enter
option field.
6. Enter option If the user has entered related party details like joint a/c details or authorised
signatory etc, the user should visit the same. Type A and press F4 to visit Related Party
Details. Press Up/Down arrow to scroll through the records. Press F4 to come back to Enter
option field.
7. Press F10 to commit.
Note : System may display warnings or/and exceptions. If the verifying official has sufficient
work class to override the exceptions, he can press F4. If the user presses F4 and accept,
then only account will be verified. If the user presses F3, system will not verify the account.
C. How to change account details of newly opened account before verification
Account details can be changed before verification, through menu option OAACAU. Use
function M and enter account no. Press F4. Details will appear on the screen. Modify the
account and press F10 when the cursor is in Enter Option field. Its not necessary that the
maker of the account can only change the account details. Even the verifier can do the
changes through OAACAU, through function M. After completing the modifications, same user
can verify the account through OAACAU, function V.
D. How to change account details after verification
Menu option ACM (Customer Account Maintenance)
Function M (Modify). A/c No. Give account no. which is to be modified. Press F4. System
will display general details on the screen.
1. To modify general details type 0 (zero) in enter option field and press F4. Make the
changes as desired and press F4 to come back to enter option field.
2. Type A (Related Party Details) in Enter option field and press F4 to enter/modify related
party details like joint a/c holder, authorised signatory etc. Press Down arrow in this page
and enter related party details. After entering all the details, press F4 to come back to enter
option field.
3. Case Study - If during account opening (OAAC) the user forgot to enter nomination details
and the user has already verified the account, the user can enter the nomination details
even after verification of the account. The steps are as follows Menu option ACM
1. Function M (Modify)
2. Account No. Enter short or full 16 digit account number of which the user wishes to
change the details. Press F4. The cursor will blink in Enter Option field.
3. Enter option Enter S (Scheme Details). Press F4.
4. Availing Nomination Facility Enter Y. Press F4.
5. Enter Option Enter N (Nomination Details). Press F4. Nomination details screen will
appear on desktop.
6. Nominees Name (Mandatory) Enter name.
Page 47 of 294

7. Relationship (Mandatory) Press F2. Select code by pressing Shift+F4.

8. Address (Mandatory) Enter address in 2 lines provided on the screen
9. City Code (Mandatory) Type first 2/3 characters of city and press F2. Select city by
pressing Shift+F4.
10. Enter other (Mandatory) details like state, postal code, country code etc.
11. If nominee is minor, enter Y in Nominee Minor field.
12. If the above field (Nominee minor) is made Y then Date of Birth of the nominee is
mandatory field. Enter other details of nominee like guardians name, guardian code,
address etc.
13. Press F4 to come back to Enter option field.
14. Press F10 to commit changes in the account.
Any modifications done through ACM have to be verified through ACM.
Menu option ACM. Function V, enter account no. and press F4. Visit all the options in
which modifications have been done. The user can commit only when cursor is in Enter Option
field.
E. How to see last Creater and Verifier of the A/c
The maker and checker for an account can be inquired through menu option ACM.
The steps are as follows
1.
2.
3.
4.

Function I (Inquire)
A/c No. Enter A/c no. Press F4.
Enter option S (Scheme Details). Press F4. Press F11 (Transmit) thrice.
Various display fields are available on the screen. Tot. Mod Times will show how many
times a/c details have been modified. The user can also see user who has created a/c, date
of creation, user who has last verified a/c, date of last verification, whether a/c is closed, no.
of dr. and cr. transactions in the a/c, no. of TODs allowed etc.
5. Press F3 thrice to quit from the menu option.
F. General issues in SB/CA
1. Use function X (Cancel) in ACM to Undo the changes in the account. But this function can
only be used before verification of changes.
2. Presently, Scheme code can not be changed once the account is opened or/and verified.
E.g. If by mistake the account is opened in SBGEN (Saving Fund General) for a staff, but at
later point of its noticed that the account should been opened in SBSTF, this change in
scheme code can not be handled in finacle.
If this is noticed before verifying the new account, use function X in OAACAU to cancel the
account opening.
If this problem is noticed after verifying the new account, the account needs to be closed and
new account should be opened in desired scheme code.
3. In OAAC, please select SBSTF as scheme code for staff SF A/c. The system will pick up
interest rate code applicable for staff members. Please dont open the staff SF A/c in
SBGEN scheme code and then give additional benefit of interest in A/c Preferential Interest
(Cr) field (General Details of OAAC) as system may not give other benefits to the staff
accounts opened in SBGEN scheme code.
4. Accounts can be opened in backdate.

Page 48 of 294

5. Finacle allows opening an account before verifying the Cust_Id of the account holder.
System also allows entering credit transaction in unverified account. But system will not
allow to post/verify the transaction without verifying the account. So if the user tries to verify
the account, system will not allow to do so. Cust_id must be verified before verifying the
account in which unverified cust_id has been used. Debit transactions are not allowed in
unverified accounts.
G. How to Inquire on the accounts having Zero Balance?
Menu option ACS (Account Selection). Screen 7.
Example 1 - Lets inquire about all the accounts in scheme code SBGEN, having Zero balance
as on date.
1. Scheme Code Enter SBGEN in scheme code.
2. Min. Bal Enter 0 (Zero)
3. Max. Bal Enter 0 (Zero). Press F4.
The system will display total number of accounts having zero balance against caption Account
Selected and accounts sorted as per account number in the list. Press Explode (Control+E)
on any a/c to see its account details; the system will display screen equivalent to menu option
ACM (Function I (Inquire)) or ACI (Function I (Inquire)).

Screen 7

Example 2 - List the accounts under scheme code CAGEN, which have been frozen (Only
Debit Frozen).
In the above menu option ACS, enter CAGEN in scheme code, enter D (Debit only) in Freeze
Code and press F4. System will display all the accounts under CAGEN scheme code which
have been frozen on debits only. The system will also display total number of accounts, their
total credit and debit balances.

Page 49 of 294

Other examples of uses of ACS

1. To know all the accounts of a particular cust_id opened under in a particular scheme code
or all the scheme codes.
2. To know accounts closed in a given range of dates.
Hint Enter Close Date low and high.
3. To know accounts opened in a given range of dates.
Hint Enter open date low and high.
4. To know accounts in which particular employees reference has been give.
Hint Enter employee id.
5. To know accounts which have been classified as Non performing/ sub standard.
Hint Press F6 in ACS on the first screen. On the second screen, enter Main Asset
classification and/or Sub Asset Classification as may be necessary.
There are 54 fields (1st and 2nd page), which can be clubbed in and/or conditions to find out
accounts fitting under a specified criteria.
H. How to change customer id of an account
During migration, system allots different cust_ids to different accounts of the same customer.
Post migration, it may be necessary to change customer id of such accounts to make it
accounts of single cut_id.
Menu option CCA (Change Customer Id of Account)
Screen 8 shows various field in this menu option.
4. Function M (Modify)
5. A/c No. Enter Account number of which cust_id need to be changed. Press F4. System
will display the cust_id of the account entered, with cursor blinking in cust_id field.
6. Customer id Change the customer id. Press F10 to commit.
Change in cust_id using this menu option need to be verified by other authorised user
through same menu option i.e. CCA.

Screen 8
Page 50 of 294

I. How to print Pass Book

Menu option PBP (Pass Book Print)
Pre-requisites
a. Printer driver must have been installed on the PC which would be used for
Passbook printing.
b. Printer has to be made as Default Printer.
c. ILINKWEB software has to be started before starting passbook printing and kept
running in the background.
d. Account for which passbook is to be printed must be enabled for passbook,
otherwise system will raise error This customer is not a Pass Book Holder. To
enable account for passbook, use menu option ACM, function-M (Modify),
enter a/c no., press F4, enter 0 (zero) in enter option field, press F4, press F6,
enter P (Passbook) or B (Both P & S) in passbook/statement field, press F4,
press F10. Get the account verified by another user.
Case 1-> If the passbook is being printed first time.
If the passbook is being printed for the first time for an account, the system will display fields
similar to screen 9. Please insert the passbook in the document printer with first page facing up
side. Menu option PBP.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

A/c No Enter A/c no of which passbook is to be printed.

Press F4. All the field will be activated by the system.
Press F4.
Press F10. Please wait until the progress indicator turns back to green.
After the printing is over, system will activate the Print OK field with cursor blinking in it. If
the printing is OK, enter Y in this field and press F4.
6. Please take out the passbook from the document printer, check whether the details of the
customer a/c are printed properly. Turn the passbook to the next page, insert it again in the
document printer, the system will print 2 on the left-top side of the page. Take out the
passbook from document printer.

Screen 9
Page 51 of 294

Case 2-> If the transaction are to be printed for the first time.
Menu option - PBP.
Please insert the passbook in the document printer with page (on which transactions need to
be printed) facing up side. Menu option PBP.
1. Enter A/c no. Press F4 twice. The user can see that the fields are activated.
2. New Passbook Default is Y. Make this field N, otherwise the system will again print the
customer a/c details.
3. Start Line No. and Start Page No. are default 1 which means that the transaction will be
printed from page 1 and line 1 onwards.
4. Passbook Srl. No. System displays this field as 1, which means that this is the 1st
passbook.
5. A/c Balance System displays it as 0 (zero), which means that no transaction is yet printed
on the passbook. Please dont get confused with this field with the actual balance in the a/c.
As described, this is the last balance printed on the passbook.
6. Press F4 to continue. Press F10 to print transactions on the passbook. The transaction will
be printed on the passbook. Wait until the cursor appears in Print OK field. Enter Y in this
field and press F4, if the transactions are printed properly.
7. If the number of transactions to be printed on passbook exceed 29, system will
display a message More transactions to be printed, please turn the PB page and
press <Commit>.
8. The user can see that the A/c balance on PBP screen is updated by the last balance on the
passbook. Please take out the passbook from the document printer, turn the page and
insert it again. Press F10. Follow the process until all the transactions are printed on the
passbook.

Screen 10
Case 3 -> How to issue duplicate passbook
Assume that in A/c 019322, all the transactions have already been printed on the passbook. To
issue duplicate passbook, invoke menu option PBP.
1. Follow the steps as described in Case 1 of passbook printing topic. This process will print
1st page i.e. a/c details.
Page 52 of 294

2. To print transactions on passbook from the beginning, invoke PBP again. Enter A/c No.
Press F4 twice. Keep on pressing until the cursor comes on Transactions printed in
Passbook upto dummy field. Press Control+E (Explode). Press F10. Follow the steps as
described in Case 2 of Passbook printing topic.
J. How to print Statement of Account for an account For regular statement printing, customers account need to be enabled for statement. Please
refer to pass book printing section point (d) for enabling the account for statement.
Adhoc or regular statements can be generated for accounts. System will not charge
automatically for adhoc statements.
K. How to Close Account
Following steps may be followed to close account.
1. Destroy Cheque Book(s) issued to the customer using menu option CHBM function D
(Destroy)
2. Other user shall verify above operation (destroy) cheque book(s) using menu option
CHBM function V(Verify).
3. Apply the a/c closure charges as applicable from the account. Use menu option CACC
(Closure of Account Charge Collection), function Z (Account Close)
4. Other user shall verify above operation using menu option CACC, function V (Verify).
5. Apply the interest either through the workflow INTRUN or through CAAC.
6. Make the a/c balance zero through TM.
7. Close the account through CAAC.
8. Other user shall verify the account closure through CAACAU.
L. ACOPN ( ACCOUNT OPENING WORKFLOW)
ACOPN is a workflow which can be used to perform all the activities like creating cust_id,
opening an SB/CA account and deposit money in the newly created account; all the activities in
one go. Normally, following activities have to be performed in Finacle, when a new customer
comes to our bank for the first time for opening an SB/CA account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Create Cust_id
Verify Cust_id
Open an account
Verify an account
Deposit money in a/c
Post transaction

CUMM (CTO/Officer & above)

CUMM (Officer & above)
OAAC (CTO/Officer and above)
OAACAU (Officer & above)
TM (CTO/Officer & above)
TM (CTO/Officer & above)

ACOPN can be used to perform 1st, 3rd & 5th steps. Steps 2nd & 4th can be performed by the
authorizer through menu option DSPWFQ. Step 6th can be performed through menu option
TM. Please note that help (F1) is not available in any field in ACOPN; but wherever list is
needed, the user can press F2 and get the list of valid codes. Step by step execution of all the
above steps is explained as below -

Page 53 of 294

Screen 11
1. Invoke Workflow Menu Option ACOPN
2. Customer ID - If the customer is new and has not valid cust_id in Finacle, type NEW. If the
customer has a valid cust_id, enter the same here. If the cust_id is entered, the workflow
shall take the cursor to A/c opening screen. If the cust_id is entered as NEW, the workflow
shall take the cursor to customer id creation. Lets assume that the customer is new and
cust_id is entered as NEW.
3. Authoriser ID Enter the finacle user id of the user who is supposed to authorize this
workflow.
4. Press F4, the system will take the user to customer id creation screen. The following screen
may get displayed on computer.

Screen 12

Page 54 of 294

5. Title As explained in OAAC, enter the valid title code (e.g. Mr, Ms etc) or press F2 and
select valid title code by pressing Shift+F4.
6. Name Enter name of the customer.
7. Short Name Enter the short name.
8. Cust Type Press F2 and select cust type from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
9. Occu Code Press F2 and select occupation code from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
10. Const Code - Press F2 and select Constitution code from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
INTRODUCER
There are 4 fields available under this block.
11. Customer ID Enter the cust_id of the introducer, if the same exist in finacle database. If
the cust_id is entered then the user should not enter anything in next 3 fields of introducer
block.
12. Status Code If the introducer does not have a valid cust_id in finacle, his/her status (e.g.
known to manager, existing customer etc.) can be selected from the list available in this
field.
13. Title Enter title or select the title of the introducer from the list.
14. Name Enter the name of introducer.
COMMUNICATION
15. Address line1 Enter the address of customer.
16. Address line2- If the address line1 is not sufficient to enter address of customer, the same
can be continued in this field.
17. City Code Enter city code or select city code from the list.
18. PIN Code Enter six digit pin code.
19. State Code Enter state code or select the same from the list.
20. Country Code Default IN (i.e. India) appears in this field. Enter country code (if its other
than India) or select from the list.
21. TDS Table Enter TDS table code or select the same from the list. Valid TDS table codes
may be TDSGE for General category public, TDSCR for Corporate bodies and TDSNR for
NRO/NRSR accounts.
MINOR DETAILS
There are 4 fields available in this block. If the customer is not a Minor, all these fields can be
skipped.
22. Minor (Y/N) Default value is N, If the customer is minor, enter Y in this field.
23. Date of Birth If the above field is entered as Y, the user need to enter date of birth of the
minor customer.
24. Guardian Code Enter the guardian code i.e. M for mother, F for father, D for defacto
guardian, O for others & C for court appointed.
25. Guardian Name Enter guardians name.
PASSPORT DETAILS
There are 6 fields available in this block. If the customer is not a NRE customer, all these fields
can be skipped.
26. NRE (Y/N) If the customer is NRE, enter Y in this field.
27. Passport Num Enter passport number.
28. Details Enter details of passport.
Page 55 of 294

29. Issue Date Enter issue date of passport.

30. Expiry Date Enter Expiry date of passport.
31. Nationality Default is IN (India), enter the country code of the customer or select the same
from the list.
STAFF DETAILS
There are 2 field available in this block. If the customer is Staff or Ex-Staff of our bank, these
two fields may be filled accordingly.
32. Customer Staff Default is N, Enter Y if the customer is staff of our Bank.
33. Employee ID If the customer is employee of any of the branches which are working on
Finacle, his/her employee id (PF No.) can be entered or selected from the list. If the
customer is employee of non-finacle branch and his/her employee Id is not available in the
list, please enter STAFF in this field. If the customer is Ex-Staff of our bank, the user may
enter STAFF in this field.
Press F4. The cursor will automatically appear in Combined Statement field.
34. Combined Stmt Enter N, if the customer does not need combined statement. If the
customer requests for combined statement, enter Y in this field. In that case the user needs
to enter frequency for statement which is available on the first page of General Details block
of CUMM. Press F4. An alert (box) may appear on the screen. Press Enter key or click
mouse on OK button. The customer ID is generated by the system and same can be seen
in Customer ID field. If the user wishes to open an account with the same workflow, Press
F4, otherwise the user can press F3 to quit. If the user press F4 the system shall bring the
following screen on computer.

Screen 13
35. Scheme Code Enter the scheme code under which customer wishes to open an account
e.g. SBGEN is scheme code for SF A/c for general public or CAGEN is scheme code for
CA A/c for general public. Press F4.
Page 56 of 294

36. GL SubHeadCode Default GL Subhead code shall appear. The user may press F4 to
continue.
37. Int. Rate Code Rate code according to the scheme selected may appear in this field. The
user may press F4 to continue.
38. Amount Enter the amount which the customer would like to deposit in account as a part of
account opening.
39. Part tran Type Default is C (Credit).
40. Type [C/T] Enter C (Cash) If the customer wishes to deposit above amount by cash in the
a/c which is being opened, else enter T (Transfer).
41. Sub Type [NR/CI] If the user select C (Cash) in the Type field, the user need to enter NR
(Normal Receipt) in this field. If the user select T (Transfer) in the Type field, the user need
to enter CI (Customer Induced) in this field.
42. Xfer A/c no. If the user select Type as T (transfer) and subtype as CI (Customer induced),
the user need to enter a/c no from which the amount will be transferred to the account
which is being opened. Press F4.

Screen 14
43. Mode of Oper Enter the code for mode of operation, or select the same form the list.
OTHER DETAILS
44. Cheque Allowed Default Y, If the customer is not to be made entitled for cheque book,
enter N in this field.
45. Acc Pref Dr. Enter preferential rate of interest in this field. This preferential rate may be
applicable in this account for TODs.
46. Acc Pref. Cr Enter preferential rate of interest in this field. If the customer is of special
type. E.g. if the user enters 1 in this field, the system will give a benefit of 1% of interest
over and above the prevailing rate of interest in the scheme and if the user enters -1 in this
field, system will give 1% less interest in this account than the prevailing rate of interest as
applicable in the scheme the user has selected while opening the account. Press F4.
47. System will display an alert in a box, with the message e.g. New workflow created for user
12345MBK with workflow ID D112660. Please not down the workflow id so as to convey
Page 57 of 294

the same to user who is going to authorize cust_id and account. Press Enter key or click
mouse on OK button.
48. Please note the Customer ID, A/c Number, Transaction ID and amount. Press F3 to
quit from the workflow.
M. How to Authorize/Verify cust_id, A/c and transaction generated through ACOPN?
There are two possibilities, if the authorizer is present in the office and second; if the authorizer
is not present in the office.
If the authorizer is not present in the office, then any user authorized to verify cust_id, A/c No
and Transaction can verify these entries through individual menu options as discussed in
earlier topics.
If the authorizer is present in the officer, he/she can invoke menu option DSPWFQ.
1. Invoke menu option DSPWFQ (Display Pending Workflow Items). The system shall
display a list of all the workflows which are pending for authorization. Go to the workflow as
noted earlier and press Control+E (Explode)

Screen 15
2. The system shall bring the screen of CUMM with V (Verify) in Function and cust_id in
Customer Id field. Press F4.
3. Verify the cust_id as explained in Customer creation chapter.
4. Once the user commits (F10) in CUMM and press F3 key, the system shall automatically
bring OAACAU menu option with the V in Function and A/c no. automatically in the
concerned field. Verify the account as explained in this chapter.
5. After the user commit (F10) in OAACAU, press F3 to quit from the a/c authorization menu.
Press F3 and come out from DSPWFQ.
6. Please post/verify the transaction through TM in modify mode.
ACOPN can also be used only to open an account for the customer already having valid
cust_id in finacle. In that case in the 1st screen of ACOPN, in Customer Id field, enter the
cust_id of the customer of whom the user wishes to open an account.
Page 58 of 294

Limitations of ACOPN
1. Nomination details can not be captured.
2. Joint Account holders details, authorized signatory, power of attorney etc. can not be
captured.
N. SUMMARY CUM FLOW CHART FOR OPENING OF ACCOUNTS SB / CA
1. For a new customer not having valid cust_id, create cust_id through Menu Option CUMM.
Mandatory sub options
G General Details
E - Currency details.
Other co-mandatory sub options
M - Minor Details
N - NRE details
T - Trade Finance Details.
2. Verify the cust_id through Menu Option CUMM.
3. For the customer already having valid cust_id, open an account through Menu Option
OAAC.
Mandatory Sub OptionsG General Details
S Scheme Details
Other sub options to be necessarily filled upN Nomination details
A Additional Party Details in case of joint accounts
R NRI Details in case of NRI customer
4. Verify the account through Menu Option OAACAU
5. Issue Cheque Books Menu Option ICHB
6. Verify issue of Cheque Books Menu Option ICHBAU
7. Put through transactions in the account-Menu Option TM
8. Post /Verify transactions Menu Option TM
9. Alternatively, for cust_id creation, account opening and transaction, use workflow ACOPN.
FLOW CHART FOR CLOSURE OF ACCOUNTS SB /CA
Please check that in the account which the user wishes to close -

a. there are no transactions in entered state in the account. Menu option TM.
b. there are no standing instructions on the account. Menu option SIM.
c. account is not frozen. Menu option AFSM.
d. Account authorization/verification is not pending. Menu option ACM.
Page 59 of 294

e. account does not belong to other SOL.

2. Destroy unused cheque books Menu Option-CHBM, function D. Note only one cheque
book can be destroyed at a time.
3. Verify destroy of cheque book through CHBM Function V.
4. Vacate/Delete Lien marked on the account Menu Option ALM, function M.
5. Verify vacate/delete of lien through ALM- function V.
6. Calculate and apply pending service charges if any Menu Option CACC
7. Verify charges Menu Option -CACC
8. Calculate and apply interest if any- Menu Option INTRUN
9. Close account Menu Option CAAC
10. Verify account closure Menu Option CAACAU
IMPORTANT AND USEFUL MENU OPTIONS
MENU
OPTION
CUMM

DESCRIPTION
Customer
Maintenance

PURPOSE
Master To Add a new Customer

OAAC

Accounts Opening

For opening new accounts

OAACAU

Accounts Authorization

For Verification / Modification / Cancellation of

Unverified Accounts

ACOPN

Account Opening workflow

Workflow to create cust_id, account and deposit

money in an account.

ACM

Accounts Maintenance

For Modification of Verified Accounts And Other

Inquiries/Maintenance

ACI

Account Inquiry

Inquiry on Account

CACC

Closure Charges Collection

To calculate/apply Account Closure Charges

CAAC

Accounts Closing

For closing accounts

CAACAU

Accounts
Authorization

JTHOLDER

List Joint Holders

To view Joint Holders/ All Related Parties

INTTM

Interest Table Maintenance

PSP

Pass Sheet print

To view/modify Interest Table

(Rates)
To Print Statement Of Accounts

PBP

Pass Book print

To Print Passbooks

ACS

A/C Selection

CUS

Customer Selection

To make inquiries
selected accounts
To make inquiries
selected customers

Closure

- For Verification / Cancellation of Closed Accounts

Page 60 of 294

Code

on

criteria-based

on

criteria-based

Prepared by: Makarand B Kedare

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
TRANSACTION MAINTENANCE
In finacle, all type of cash and transfer transactions can be handled through menu option TM
(Transaction Maintenance). Menu option TM does not allow user to add Clearing transactions, but
the user can post/verify all type of transactions (cash, transfer & clearing) through the menu.
Various fields in menu option TM are discussed below. We will discuss the TM through examples.
A. How to enter cash deposit transaction in accounts like SB,CA,CC & OD ?
TM menu option is divided into four blocks. The blocks are separated from each other by
double lines. The blocks from top to bottom are Function, Transaction, Option and status.
1. Menu option TM
Function Block
2. Function A (Add). User can press either Tab or enter or F11 key to go to the next field.
3. Tran. Id, Tran date and transaction remarks may not be entered.
4. Type/Subtype (Mandatory) This field is divided into two parts. Transaction Type and
Transaction Subtype.
In the first field, press F1 to get the help; the help message suggests to enter C for cash, T for
transfer and L for clearing. Enter C in the Type field. The cursor will be automatically placed in
subtype field.
In the second field, user can press F2 to get the list of valid codes. As, in this example an
account needs to be credited, select NR Normal Receipt by pressing Shift+F4. If the user
knows that NR stands for Normal Receipt, he can type the same in this field instead of
pressing F2 and selecting NR from the list. Press F4. The screen is shown in Screen 1 as
below.

Screen 1
Page 61 of 294

The system will activate the transaction block and the cursor will be placed in the A/c No. field.
5. A/c No. (Mandatory) Enter the account no.
i. If the a/c of the customer is with the SOL of the user who is entering the transaction,
then the user can enter short a/c no e.g. 019322, instead of entering all 16 digits
4177000100009322.
ii. If the a/c of the customer belongs to other SOL, user needs to enter all 16 digits of the
a/c no.
iii. If the user knows the short name of the customer in finacle, he can enter the short name
and press F2; system will display all the accounts of the customers having the
characters entered in their short name. Select the desired a/c no by pressing Shift+F4.
After entering a/c no, if the user presses Control+E (Explode) in a/c no field, system will
activate ACI (Customer Account Inquiry) menu option internally and will display account
details in inquiry mode.
Press F11 or enter or tab key. If the user presses F4 or F11 key, system will display
name of the a/c holder against the a/c no. & a/c balance, shadow balance, available
amt., & effective available amt in the status block (right-bottom side). Also, the system
will display Cust Status, Mode of operation, GL subhead and a/c status at the leftbottom side of the status block.
Signature viewing
6. In the transaction block, after entering the a/c no, user can press F9 to view the signature.
If the signature is not available in the finacle, the system will display a message Image
Record does not exist for this Account Id.
Case 1 If only one signature is attached to the account
System will display the signature attached to this a/c, if its already uploaded and verified.

Screen 2
Page 62 of 294

7. User needs to click mouse (left button) in the signature window for seeing various views of
signature.
i. User can press left arrow of keyboard to see inverse view; to bring the original view of
the signature user needs to press left arrow again.
ii. User can press right arrow of the keyboard to flip the signature horizontally; to bring
the original view of the signature user needs to press right arrow again.
iii. In the same way, user can press up arrow of the keyboard to flip the signature
vertically; to being the original view of the signature user needs to press up arrow
again.
8. The signature view also displays the account no., and any remarks as entered during
scanning of the signature. Its advisable that during signature scanning, Name of the
Account Holders and Mode of Operation may be entered. This may help the user to take
necessary action.
9. To exit from the signature screen, click mouse (left button) in the signature window.
Press F4.
10. Click the mouse on Transmit button (which is available next to menu option field). Press
F3. The system will come back to transaction screen.
Case 2 If the a/c has more than one signatures attached to it
11. If the a/c has multiple signatures attached to it, the system will display following screen

Screen 3
12. The above screen shows that there are 2 signatures attached to this a/c. The user can also
see that 1st signatures image access code is DE (i.e. Deleted). User may not require to
view the deleted signature. If user is not authorized to view DE (Deleted) or IN (Inoperative)
type of signatures and presses Control+E (Explode) to view the same, system may display
the message Image Access Denied.

Page 63 of 294

13. To view the next signature, bring the cursor to the next record by pressing down arrow key.
Press Control+E (Explode) to view the signature. Follow the steps to view and close the
signature window as described in case 1 above.
14. After viewing the signatures, press F3 to quit from signatures list screen.
Note User having DBA work class can authorize the users to view Deleted or Inoperative
signatures through menu option UPM (page 3 of UPM).
15. Amount (Mandatory) Enter the amount of transaction.
16. The next field is type of part transaction (Mandatory), which is default C i.e. Credit because
the user is crediting the a/c by cash/normal receipt (C/NR).
17. Transaction particulars (Mandatory) This field is free text field. The particulars entered in
this field will be printed in the Passbook/Statement of a/c. User shall enter suitable
particulars in this field. Press F4.
18. The system will place the cursor in the Specify Option field. This is displayed in Screen 4
as below.

Screen 4
19. Specify Option- default value will be displayed as E- Enter Entire Part Tran. Press
Down Arrow to see other part tran. User can see that system has automatically generated
debit part tran. Please note that whenever the transaction is Cash/Normal Receipt, system
automatically generates debit part tran i.e. Dr. - Cash in Hand in India.
Case 1 If the user is not authorized to post the transaction
Press F10 to commit in the Specify Option field. User can see that in the left-bottom part
of the screen, system will display Tran Id, please note it. Also, system displays that how
many Dr and Cr part trans have been entered in this transaction (Entered Dr/Cr). Screen 5.
Note: If the system finds some abnormality in the part tran, itll display message Warning:
Exceptions Encountered in the status bar. To see exception in a part tran during entry
state, then in Specify Option field type K Check Part Tran and press F4. System will
Page 64 of 294

display list of warnings/exceptions. If user wishes to accept the part tran with exceptions,
press F4.
Case 2 If the user is authorized to post the transaction
In the Specify option field, if anything other the P is displayed, press delete key to delete the
character and type P (Post part tran). Press F4 key. System will display the status (rightbottom side of the transaction block) as *P POSTING REQUESTED. Using Up/Down arrow
on the keyboard, go to every part tran and type P in the specify option field and press F4.
Finally press F10 to commit the transaction.

Screen 5
In the left-bottom part of the screen, system will display Tran Id, please note it. Also, system
will display that how many Dr and Cr part trans have been entered in this transaction
(Entered Dr/Cr) and how many Dr and Cr part transactions have been posted in this
transaction (Posted Dr/Cr). Please note that the number of Dr and Cr part transactions
displayed against Entered Dr/Cr should tally with the number of Dr and Cr part transactions
displayed against Posted Dr/Cr.
B. How to enter and post the above transaction in the Fast mode ?
Menu option TM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Function A. Press F11 or F4 key.

Type/Subtype C & NR (Cash/Normal Receipt). Press F4 key.
A/c No. Enter A/c No. Press F4.
Amount Enter amount of the trans. Press F4.
Enter transaction particulars e.g. By Cash. Press F4.
Specify Option Using Delete key, delete E and enter P. Press F4, press down arrow, the
system will display debit part tran, press F4 and press F10 to commit the transaction. Note
the tran Id.

Page 65 of 294

Note During posting of the transaction, system may raise warnings/exceptions/errors. If the
user is authorized to override warning and exceptions he can press F4. If any error type of
exception is raised, the same can not be overridden by the user.
C. How to enter cash withdrawal transaction in accounts like SB, CA, CC & OD ?
Menu option TM
1. Function (Mandatory) A (add)
2. Type/Subtype (Mandatory) In the type field enter C (Cash) and in Subtype field enter NP
(Normal Payment). Press F4 key. The system will activate the transaction block and the
cursor will be placed in the A/c No. field.
3. A/c No (Mandatory) Enter A/c No. Press F11 (Transmit) or F4 (Accept) key.
4. Amount (Mandatory) Enter the amount to be withdrawn.
5. The system will automatically display D (Debit) in the part transaction type field.
6. Particulars (Mandatory) Enter the transaction particulars e.g. To Self.
7. Inst Type (Mandatory) There may be two scenarios
i. If the Cash withdrawal is by using Withdrawal slip, enter WS in the field. This can also
be selected from the list. Press F2 and go to WS (Withdrawal slip) record using down
arrow. Select WS by pressing Shift+F4.
ii. If the Cash withdrawal is by using cheque leaf, enter CHQ in this field. This can also
be selected form the list.

Screen 6
8. Inst No. This field is mandatory if Inst. Type is entered as CHQ. This field is divided into
two parts. In the first part enter alpha part of the cheque (optional) and in the second part
enter printed no. (Mandatory) of the cheque leaf. If the cheque is already marked as
stopped or destroyed, system will display error message at the status bar as Cheque
Stopped or Cheque Unusable respectively and will not allow to proceed with the
transaction.
9. Inst. Date - This field is mandatory if Inst. Type is entered as CHQ. Enter the cheque date.
Press F4 (Accept) key. The system will bring the cursor in the Specify Option field. System
will not accept Post dated cheque.

Page 66 of 294

Case 1 If the user who is adding the transaction is not authorized to post the
transaction
10. Specify Option Press F10 to commit. Note the tran id.
Case 2 If the user who is adding the transaction is authorized to post the
transaction
11. Specify option Delete the field and enter P, Press F4, the system will update the status
of the part tran as *P POSTING REQUESTED, use down/up arrow key to go to the
next/previous part tran respectively, and press F4. After marking all the part trans as P
(Posting requested), finally Press F10 to commit. System may raise warning/exceptions; if
the users work class is sufficient, he can press F4 to accept the warning/exceptions and
proceed with the posting of the part trans. Note the tran id
D. How to post transaction entered by other user?
Menu option TM
User can post the transaction in Modify mode of TM.
1. Function M (Modify)
2. Tran id (Mandatory) enter tran id of transaction. Press F4. The cursor will appear in
Specify Option field.
3. Specify Option Type P (post) and press F4. If the system finds some abnormality in the
part tran, itll raise warning or exception or Error. If the user has sufficient work class to
override the warning/exception, he can press F4 to accept the same and proceed with the
posting of part tran.
User can see that the status of this part tran has been changed to *P POSTING
REQUESTED. Press Down/Up arrow to go to next/previous part tran. In Specify Option
field, P is already there, simply Press F4 to post the part tran. Follow this step for all part
trans.
4. Press F10 to commit.
5. System will display tran id and status of transaction in left-bottom part of the status block.
Please ensure that number of Dr and Cr part trans in Entered state must tally with number
of Dr and Cr part trans in Posted state.
6. Press F3 twice to exit from TM menu option.
The maker and checker concept is applicable in TM, which is explained as below
i.
ii.

If the user U1 enters the transaction and user U2 posts the same transaction, the
transaction will automatically get verified.
If the user U1 enters and posts the transaction, the transaction will remain in posted
state. User U2 needs to verify the transaction through TM, to make the status of the
transaction as Verified.

E. How to Verify the transaction posted by other user?

The user who enters/posts the transaction can not verify the transaction. System will raise the
error Not authorized to verify part tran
Menu Option TM
1. Function V (Verify)
2. Tran id (Mandatory) enter tran id of transaction. Press F4. The cursor will appear in
Specify Option field.
Page 67 of 294

3. Specify Option Type V (Verify) and press F4. User can see that the status of this part
tran has been changed to *V VERIFY REQUESTED. Press Down/Up arrow to go to
next/previous part tran. In Specify Option field, V is already there. Simply Press F4 to
verify the part tran. Follow this procedure for all part trans.
4. Press F10 to commit.
5. System will display tran id and status of transaction in left-bottom part of the status block.
6. Press F3 to exit from TM menu option.
F. How to enter Transfer type of transaction?
Menu Option TM
1. Function A (Add)
2. Tran id leave it blank, as system will allot a new transaction id.
3. Tran. Date you may leave it blank, as system will automatically pick up todays date. If
you wish to enter todays date in this field, press Control+X.
4. Type (Mandatory) Type T (Transfer)
5. Subtype (Mandatory)- Press F2 for list. Select CI (Customer Induced) from the list by
pressing Shift+F4. CI (Customer Induced) subtype is used when the request is originated
from the customer. If the transaction is originated from the Banks side e.g. charges etc.,
user can enter BI (Bank Induced) in this field.
Transaction block
User can see that on the right-top side of the transaction block number 1 is displayed. It
means that this is part tran No. 1.
6. A/c No. (Mandatory) Enter A/c No. Press F11 twice or press F4. System will display
Effective
7. Available amt., Shadow balance (i.e. funds in clearing) in the bottom-right side of the
screen.
8. Amount (Mandatory) Enter amount. Next to this field is type of part tran i.e. debit or credit.
Enter D (Debit) or C (Credit) in this field.
9. Particulars (Mandatory) Enter relevant particulars. E.g. To transfer. Please note that,
whatever user enters in this field, will be printed in the customers a/c passbook/statement.
10. Inst Type (Mandatory) Whenever customers a/c is debited through C/NP (Cash/Normal
Payment) or T/CI (Transfer/Customer Induced) type of transactions, this field must be filled.
Press F2 for list. Select the relevant instrument type e.g. VC (Debit Voucher) or CHQ
(Personal Cheque) etc.
11. Inst No. This field is mandatory if instrument type is selected as CHQ (Personal Cheque)
etc. If select instrument is of type VC, this field need not be filled. In the first field, enter
Alpha part (optional) of the instrument and in the next field enter printed serial no. of the
instrument (mandatory).
12. Inst Date This field is mandatory if instrument type is CHQ etc. Press F4. The cursor will
appear in Specify Option field with the default value as E- Enter Entire Part Tran.
To enter next part tran
13. Specify Option In this field, E (Enter Entire Part Tran) is already displayed; simply press
F4 and blank part tran block will appear on the screen.
Follow steps 6 to 12.
To enter next part tran
Follow steps 13 & 14.
Page 68 of 294

When all the debit and credit part trans are entered Case 1 If the user is who is adding the transaction is not authorized to post the
transaction
14. Specify Option Press F10 to commit. Please note the tran id generated by the system
displayed at the left-bottom part of the status block. System also displays that how many Dr
and Cr part trans have been entered in this transaction against Entered Dr/Cr field.
Case 2 If the user who is adding the transaction is authorized to post the
transaction
15. Specify option Delete the field and enter P, Press F4, the system will update the status of
the part tran as *P POSTING REQUESTED, use down/up arrow key to go to the
next/previous part tran respectively, and press F4. System may raise warning/exceptions; if
the users work class is sufficient, he can press F4 to accept the warning/exceptions and
proceed with the posting of the part trans. If system raises error, the same can not be
overridden by the user.
16. After marking all the part trans as P (Posting requested), finally Press F10 to commit.
G. How to change wrongly entered a/c no in TM??
When we enter a/c no and transaction details, we press F4 to come to Specify option field.
Now, if we find that the a/c no. is wrong, we will enter M in specify option field and press F4 to
modify transaction details. But the system wont allow us to modify a/c no. In this
eventuality, we have to delete the part tran and enter a new part tran. The steps are as follows

1. In specify option field, use up/down arrow to go to the part tran which is to be deleted.
2. Specify option type D (Delete Part Tran) & press F4. The system will show part tran
status as *D DELETE REQUESTED. Now we need to enter a new part tran with desired
a/c no.
3. Specify Option Type E (Enter Entire Part Tran) and press F4. Proceed with new part tran.
Deleted part transaction does not need verification.

Screen 7

Page 69 of 294

H. How to grant instant TOD through TM ??

If there is shortfall in the customers a/c while debiting it through TM and if the user wants to
grant instant TOD, following steps may be followed to do so 1. After entering part tran details like a/c no, amount, part tran type, inst. type etc, press F4 to
come to Specify Option field. If the Eff. Avail. Amt is below the amount entered in the
amount field, system will display a message in the status bar Warning: Exceptions
encountered. User can see the list of exceptions encountered at his stage by entering K
(Check Part Trans) in the specify options field. If the user enters K in specify option field
and presses F4, system may display the list of exceptions. E.g. in this case, system may
display following screen

Screen 8
User can press F4 or F3 on this screen as per the choice.
Case 1 - If the user is not authorized to grant TOD in the a/c
2. Specify Option Enter E and press F4. Enter other part trans as discussed earlier.
Case 2 If the user is authorized to grant TOD in the a/c
3. Specify Option If the user wants to grant Instant TOD at this stage, type N Instant TOD
Details (or press F2 for list & select option N by pressing Shift+F4) and press F4.
4. System shall bring Instant TOD Details screen. System will display the grant date &
advance amount (shortfall) to be granted as a part of instant TOD in this transaction.
System will also display Expiry date, penalty date; user shall not modify these dates.
System automatically treats this advance type as Single (i.e. single transaction) & advance
category as Clean (i.e. without security).
5. Permitted By (Mandatory) Enter finacle user id of the official who has permitted the TOD.
User can press F2 for list of finacle users list.
6. Remarks free text. Press F4. The system will bring the cursor back to specify option field.

Page 70 of 294

Screen 9
7. Proceed with other part trans as explained in above paras. After entering all the part
trans, if user may want to post the transaction.
8. Specify option - enter P and press F4 to post the part tran. Using Up/down arrow go to
every part tran and repeat this step.
9. Press F10 to commit.
I. How to post transaction in modify mode of TM in which Instant TOD needs to be granted
in an a/c?
Please note that it is not necessary to enter instant TOD details during entry of the transaction,
as instant TOD can be granted while posting the transaction also.
Menu option TM
1. Function M (Modify)
2. Tran Id (Mandatory) Enter the tran Id. Press F4.
3. Specify Option In the normal circumstances, user may try to post the transaction by typing
P & pressing F4 in the specify option field. In such cases where there is insufficient balance
in the account, system shall raise the exceptions which may be similar to the following
screen.

Page 71 of 294

Screen 10
4. Press F3.
5. Specify Option To grant instant TOD, enter delete P, enter N and press F4. Similar
screen as Screen 9 will be activated by the system. System will display grant date, advance
amount, advance type as Single, advance category as Clean. User shall not modify Expiry
Date and Penalty Date. User needs to enter finacle user id of the official who has permitted
the instant TOD in Permitted by field. User may enter instant TOD remarks in Remarks
field (optional). Press F4. The system will display the part tran and cursor will be placed in
Specify Option field.
6. Specify option Delete N and enter P. Press F4 to post the transaction. Go to the other
part trans using up/down arrow and post them. Finally press F10 in Specify option field to
commit.
J. How to copy one part tran to create similar part tran ??
Say, user has entered one part tran and pressed F4 to come to specify option field. Now, if he
wants to enter similar part tran, then in specify option field, type C Copy Entire Part tran
and press F4. System will generate new part tran with the similar details as of the part tran at
which the user has entered C & pressed F4 in specify option field. User can modify necessary
details and can press F4 to come to specify option field.
K. What are other options available in Specify Option field?
In Specify option field if the user presses F2 key, a list of options will be displayed on the
screen.

Page 72 of 294

Screen 11
1. Option A (Additional Part Tran Details) Some transactions need additional details to be
entered. During addition/posting/verification/inquiry, user can enter A and press F4 in this
field to know additional details, if they are already entered. Examples i.
ii.

While issuing DD, system asks details like branch D.No on which DD is to be
issued, Payee name, purchase a/c No/name, commission etc. These details are
captured by the system as a part of additional details.
While crediting Term Deposit A/Cs, system asks flow code like Principal Inflow,
Installment Inflow etc. These details are captured as a part of additional details.

2. Option K (Check Part Tran) This option can be visited during addition of a new
transaction. After entering necessary fields, when the user press F4 key to come to Specify
options field, system may display a message at the status bar as Warning: Exceptions
Encountered. User can visit the list of warning/exceptions by entering K and pressing F4 in
this field.
3. Option L (List Part Trans) This option can be used to see the list of all part trans. The
list displayed on the screen contain various details of every part tran like srl. No of the part
train in the transaction, A/c No, Inst No. (if entered), Status of the part tran (like P for posted
and V for verified & blank for entered but not posted/verified), Tran Dr. Amount, Tran Cr.
Amount & Currency. In the bottom part of the screen, system also displays information like
how many part trans are entered, posted & deleted.
4. Option O (Other Part Tran Details) Can be used to inquire about the details like users
who have entered, posted and verified the part tran along with the date and time of the
activity.
5. Option Q (Quit) Can be used to quit from the transaction, without saving.
6. Option B (Show Components of Balance) This option internally activates menu option
ACCBAL. Can be used to know the details about the a/c entered in the part tran; like Clear
Balance, Available Amount, Funds in Outward Clearing, total of amounts of cheques lodged

Page 73 of 294

in inward clearing, Drawing Power, Adhoc limit, Lien marked, Overdue liability etc. ACCBAL
discussed in detail later in this chapter.
7. Option U (Show Part Tran Totals) Can be used to know the total of all the Debit & Credit
part trans.
8. Option W (Release Lien Details) User can release lien(s) is they are already marked on
the accounts opened under scheme types SBA, CAA, ODA, CCA, BIA, FBA & TDA.
Release of Lien can be accessed only for debit part transactions. If the option is invoked,
system may display all the active liens on the account. The user can select any record from
the list o mark off the liens against the debit amount of the part tran. If the liens amount is
grater than the debit amount, then lien is released partially. If the debit amount is grater
than or equal to the lien amount then the entire lien will be marked off.
L. How to Inquire Accounts Ledger?
Menu Option ACLI (Account Ledger Inquiry)
Please enter A/c No., Start Date & End Date. User can press F9 to see signature(s) attached
to this account. Press F4. System will display the list of transactions entered in the account
since the day of migration of the account to finacle.

Screen 12

Screen 13

Page 74 of 294

The screen is divided into two parts. The1st part is displays status of the account and 2nd
part displays all the transactions which are in posted/verified state in the account.
The 1st part displays A/c No, Name, GL Subhead, A/c Open date, Close Date (if the a/c is
closed), Currency of the account, A/c status, opening & closing balance and available
amount. Funds in clearing is total of amounts of cheques which have been lodged & in
released shadow balance state in Outward Clearing). Float Balance is total of amounts of
cheques lodged (including unverified) in the outward clearing but not in release show
balance state.
The 2nd part displays the transactions in the account (posted & verified), with the details like
date, inst.no, particulars, Dr. Amount, Cr. Amount and balance.
User can use up/down arrow key (or Control U/Control D if the list is bigger) to scroll in the
list of transaction. User can press Control+E (Explode) to get into details of a particular
transaction. When user presses Control+E (Explode), system internally activated TM (TI)
menu option in inquiry mode. When the transaction details are displayed, user must type Q
(Quit) in specify option field, press F4 & F3 keys in sequence to come back to the ledger.
M. How to find tran id, if it is not noted during transactions?
Its quite possible that user may forget to note tran id and it may be required to find the same.
FTI menu option can be used to find tran id.
Menu option FTI (Financial Transaction Inquiry)

Screen 14
1. Set Id User can enter the set id who has initiated the transaction.
2. A/c sol Id Sol id where the a/c is being maintained.
3. Todays Tran only This is default Y, which means system will search the transactions
done in Sol BOD date only. This field must be kept blank, if user wants to search
transactions in other dates also.
Page 75 of 294

4. A/c No User can enter a/c no.

5. Currency If user wants to search transaction done in a particular currency, the same can
be entered in this field. Press F2 for list and select currency code by pressing Shift+F4.
6. Inst Id If user wants to search transaction done using a particular instrument, the same
can be entered in this field. In the 1st part, alpha part can be entered and in the 2nd part
printed No. can be entered.
7. Inst Type If user wants to search transactions done using a particular instrument type e.g.
CHQ, DD, PO, VC the same can be entered here. System will display all such transactions
in which this inst type exists.
8. Tran Amt Low If user wants to search transactions having amount equal or above a
particular amount, the same can be entered here. System will display such transactions in
which tran amount is equal or above the amount entered in this field.
9. Tran Amt High User can search transactions in which amount is less than or equal to the
amount entered in this field.
10. Start Date Enter the date from which onwards user wants to search transactions. If this
date is earlier than BOD date, user should keep the Todays Tran Only as blank.
11. Report Code This field is validated against Report Code available in TM.
12. Entered User ID If user wants to search transactions entered by a particular user, his/her
user id may be entered in this field.
13. Posted User Id If user wants to search transactions posted by a particular user, his/her
user id may be entered in this field.
14. Delivery Channel If user wants to search transactions done through a particular delivery
channel, the same can be entered in this field.
15. Reversal Tran Flg Enter Y if only reversed transactions are to be searched.
16. Tran Id Enter tran id if all the transactions having a particular tran id are to be searched.
17. Tran Type Enter C (Cash) or T (Transfer) or L (Clearing), if all the transactions of a
particular type are to be searched.
18. Tran SubType- Enter (or select from the list) a particular transaction subtype, if all the
transactions of a particular subtype are to be searched.
19. Part tran Type- Enter C (Credit) or D (Debit) to list only particular part tran type.
20. Only Value Dated User can enter Y if the transactions in which value date is entered. This
field is available in TM.
21. Reference No. This field is related to reference No. in the TM.
22. GL SubHead Code Enter (or select from the list). If user wants to search transactions
accounts pertaining to a particular GL Sub Head Code, the same can be entered in this
field.
23. Inter Sol Tran Only Enter Y if only intersol transactions are to be searched.
24. Tran Status Valid values are E (Enter), P (Posted), V (Verified) and D-Deleted. E.g. if user
wants to search/list transactions which are entered but not posted/verified, he can enter E
in this field. If user wants to search/list transactions which are posted but not verified, he
can enter P in this field. If user wants to search/list transactions which are verified, he can
enter V in this field. If user wants to search/list transactions which deleted, he can enter D in
this field.
25. Show Cash Part Tran User can enter Y in this field, if he wants to list only part trans
related to system cash accounts. Enter N to exclude system cash accounts related entries
from the result/list.
26. Acct Status Valid valued are A (Active), I (Inoperative) and D (Dormant). If user wants to
search/list transactions done in inoperative accounts only, he can enter I in this field.
Examples of use of FTI
1. User wants to know in which A/Cs high value transaction (100000/- and above) have been
done (in verified state), in todays date.
a. In start and end date, by default todays date is displayed.
b. Todays trans. Only is set to Y i.e. system will display transactions done in todays
date only.
Page 76 of 294

c. Tran. Amt Low Enter 100000

d. Tran. Amt High may be left blank, which means there is no upper cap on
amount (system will pickup maximum amount possible).
e. Tran. Status Enter V (Verified).
f. Press F4. The system will process the request and will display the result
accordingly which may look like screen 15.

Screen 15
The result of the query include - tran date, tran id, part tran no of the entry in voucher, type
of part tran (i.e. C for Cash/ L for Clearing/ T for Transfer), Account No. in the part tran,
Currency of the part tran, Transaction particulars, Amount, type of entry (D for debit and C
for credit) and status of part tran (E Entered, P-Posted, V-Verified & D-Deleted).
If the system doesnt find any entry fitting in the criteria as entered in FTI, it will display a
message Query causes no records to be retrieved.
2. User wants to know transactions pending for posting entered by a particular user.
a. Entered User Id enter the user Id of the user who has entered the transactions.
b. Tran Status Enter E (Entered). Press F4.
3. User wants to know debit transactions done in cash account of his own branch pending for
posting.
a. A/c No. enter a/c no of cash in hand in India a/c of the branch which may be
<sol id>5119901.
b. Part Tran type D (Debit). Press F4.
4. User wants to know whether a particular cheque has been already passed in the branch
since the day the branch has been rolled over to CBS.
a. Todays Tran only May be left blank; as user wants system to display all the
transactions done since the day branch has been rolled over to CBS.
b. Inst id in the second field, enter printed Sl.No of the cheque.
c. Inst. Type Enter CHQ (Personal Cheque).
d. Start Date May be left blank. Press F4.
N. Can user take print out of result of FTI ?
FTI is only online inquiry option. Menu option FTR can be used in place of FTI to generate the
report.
Page 77 of 294

Menu Option FTR (Financial Transactions Inquiry & Report)

1. Screen lay out of FTR is similar to FTI. Please enter the criteria of the inquiry/report and
press F4.
2. System will display the result accordingly. If there are no records to be displayed, system
will display message Query causes no records to be retrieved.
3. If the result in the form of list is displayed, user can press F4.
4. System will display print parameter acceptance form.
a. Fore/Background? Please enter F
b. Print Required? If the printer is connected to the computer from which user is
running this menu option, then user may enter Y, else N.
i. If user enters Y in print required field, then he needs to press F4. The second
block will be activated. Specify no. of copies to be printed, printer on which
report to be printed & whether the system shall delete the report after printing
and press F10. If the printed is connected to the computer and user wants to
print the report, he must start ILINKWEB before pressing F10; otherwise
system will display a fatal error and user will be automatically logged out from
finacle.
ii. If user enters N in the print required field, then he can press F10. System will
generate the report and will keep the same in the Print Queue of the user.
Use menu option PR and view or print the report.
O. Can the user verify transactions in mass?
Menu Option TV
Menu option TV can be used to mass verify transactions which are already in posted state.
User can not mass verify transactions posted by him.
Enter the selection criteria of transactions to be selected for mass verification.
1. Status by default P (Posted)
2. Select Flag by default Y; which means the system will mark all the transactions displayed
in selected state for mass verification. Press F4. The system will display the transactions
which have been already posted by users other than the one who has invoked this menu.
3. User may see * before the transaction date which means the record is in selected state.
User can press F10 to mass verify transactions which are in selected state.

Screen 16
Page 78 of 294

P. How to delete transactions in entered state?

Menu option - DTE (Delete Transactions in Entered Status)
User having DBA work class can invoke this menu option.
1. By default users SOL id is displayed in the sol Id field. Press F4.
2. System will display all the transactions which are in entered state. * Sign appears on the left
side of every tran id, which indicate that the transaction is selected for deletion. If the user
wants to deselect the transaction, he needs to press Shift+F4 to do so. System will display
only those transactions in which all the part trans are in entered state.
3. Finally, after selecting the desired transactions for deletion, user needs to press F10 to
commit the operation.
4. User can inquire/take report of deleted transactions using menu option FTI or FTR. User
need to enter D (Deleted) in tran. status field of FTI/FTR.
Alternative
Menu option TM
Users not having DBA work class can also delete transactions in entered state using menu
option TM.
1. Function D (Delete)
2. Tran id Enter tran id of transaction which is to be deleted. Press F4. System will allow this
operation only on transaction in which all the part trans are in entered state.
3. Specify option Press F10 to commit.
4. Press F3 to quit from TM.
Q. Can a Template of transaction be created?
For a transaction of repetitive in nature, user can create a template so that it can be used every
time to avoid creation of transaction again and again through TM.
Menu option TTM (Transaction Template Maintenance)

Screen 17
Page 79 of 294

1. Function A (Add) to create a new template. Other functions are D-Delete, U-Undelete, MModify, I-Inquire & L-List of Templates.
2. Temp. Id (Mandatory) Enter id to be allotted to this template. Its a free text field of 9
chars long.
3. Next field is particulars Enter the particulars of template. Its a free text field.
4. Press F4.
5. Type/Subtype (Mandatory)- Enter the type of transaction similar to TM. Enter C for cash or
T for transfer. In the subtype field, enter the subtype similar to TM e.g. NR for Normal
Receipt, NP for Normal Payment, CI for Customer Induced, BI for Bank Induced etc. Press
F4. The cursor will appear in Specify option field.
6. Specify Option If the user wants to enter a new part tran, he needs to enter E in this field
(which is appears by default) and press F4.
7. A/c No Enter the account no. and press F11 twice.
8. Enter the transactions details like amount, type of part tran (C-Credit or D-Debit) which is
mandatory, Instrument type etc. similar to TM. Press F4.
9. The cursor will appear in Specify option field.
10. Follow steps 6 to 8 for all the part trans.
11. Specify Option - Once all the part trans are entered, user can press F10 to commit/save
the template.
12. Once the template is saved, user can press F3 to quit from menu option.
One the template is saved, it can be used any number of times.
How to use template in TM?
Menu option TM (Transactions Maintenance)
1. Function C (Copy)
2. Tran Id Enter the template id which is already created through menu option TTM. Press
F4.
3. The system will display 1st part tran and cursor will be placed in Specify Option field.
4. Specify Option - If user wants to modify part tran details, he can enter M in this field and
press F4; except a/c no, user can modify all the details of the part tran. Follow the
procedure of TM as explained in previous topics.
R. How to create post dated transaction?
Menu option PTM (Post Dated Transaction Maintenance)
System allows to create post dated transaction, but does not allow to post it before the tran
date as entered in PTM.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Function A (Add) to create a new transaction.

Tran Date Enter the future date; system does not allow to enter BOD date in this field.
Follow the steps of entering a transaction as explained in TM.
Specify option Press F10 to commit. System may allot a transaction id (starts with SD1)
which may be noted by the user.

Transactions entered through PTM can be posted/verified on the date entered in tran date field
of PTM. Posting/Verification may be done through menu option TM.
S. How to print vouchers?
Menu Option - VCHR
VCHR may be used to print user and system generated vouchers.
Page 80 of 294

1. Service Outlet By default users Sol ID is displayed in this field, enter the service outlet or
select the same from the list.
2. Account Ownership Valid values are O for office, E for Employee and C for customer.
3. Currency By default INR is displayed. User can enter the currency of the vouchers to be
printed.
4. Cust From & To If user wants to print vouchers of all accounts of customers falling in a
range he can enter from and to cust_IDs.
5. A/c From & To - If user wants to print vouchers of accounts falling in a range he can enter
from and to A/cs.
6. Date From & To - If user wants to print vouchers of dates falling in a range he can enter
from and to dates.
7. Amt From & To - If user wants to print vouchers in which amounts are falling in a range he
can enter from and to amounts.
8. Tran Type Valid values are C-Cash, L-Clearing & T-Transfer. If user wants to print
vouchers of cash transactions, then he can enter C in this field, same is the case for
clearing and transfer.
9. Sub Type - User can enter sub type of transactions.
10. Dr/Cr If user wants to print only Debit or Credit part trans of vouchers, he can enter D for
debit and C for credit.
11. Tran Id- If user wants to print only a particular voucher, then the tran id of the transaction
may be entered in this field.

Screen 18
12. After entering the required criteria, press F4.
13. If no entries are found by the system, system will display a message Query Causes No
records to be retrieved, otherwise system will display all the part trans of the transactions
as per the criteria entered in various field.
14. Press Shift+F4 to select individual part trans to be printed.
15. Press F10 to commit.
16. System will display print parameter acceptance form. Follow the steps for generating and
printing the report as explained in section N of this document.

Page 81 of 294

T. How to see various details (components) of an account?

Menu Option ACCBAL

Screen 19
Enter the account No and press F4.

Clear Balance clear balance available in the accounts.

Sanction limit Total of Limits sanctioned in the account.
Funds in clearing Total of amounts of all the instruments lodged in the outward clearing
and sent to the Clearing House/RCC. User can click mouse in the dummy field available
against the field and press Control+E (Explode) to see instrument details.
Float Balance - Total of amounts of all the instruments lodged in the outward clearing but
not yet sent in the outward clearing. User can click mouse in the dummy field available
against the field and press Control+E (Explode) to see instrument details.
Drawing Power Drawing power of the accounts is displayed against this field.
There are two sections in this screen for limits Secured Limits and Clean Limits.
Secured Limits This section has three parts; Adhoc, running and single transaction limits.
These limits can be entered through menu option ACTODM. System may not make the
limits available until necessary changes in DP (Drawing Power) are not made.
Clean limits This section has three parts; Adhoc, running and single transaction limits.
These limits can be entered through menu option ACTODM. System may make the limits
available without changing the DP (Drawing Power).
DACC Limit This is Debit Against Clearing Cheques. DACC limit can be entered through
option H (limit history details) during account opening (OAAC), or subsequently can be
changed though menu option ACLHM (Account Limit History Maint.).
Lien Amount The total of all liens marked on the account will be displayed.
Overdue Liability This field may be the total of instant TODs granted in the account.
System Reserved Amount The system marks a temporary lien on account of transactions
originated through ATM or Internet Banking or Inward Clearing. When the user lodges
Page 82 of 294

instrument in the inward clearing, the system immediately carves the required amount from
the account i.e. marks a temporary lien.
Note
1. Cash transactions can not be entered in back date.
2. The Intersol transactions can only be done by the user having tenor as Free (F). To
make the user free user, please use menu option UPM and modify the details. UPM can
be accessed by users having work class of DBA.
3. If a batch of transactions is to be entered in TM, its advisable that after entering some
part trans, please save the transaction & note the tran id. Use TM and function Modify to
enter remaining part trans.

Page 83 of 294

Prepared By Makarand B Kedare

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
TRANSACTIONS IN SUNDRY / SUSPENSE A/Cs
Sundry & Suspense Accounts are called Office Accounts in Finacle. Office accounts in Finacle are
13 digits long. Sundry & Suspense accounts are mapped under OAP (Office Account Pointing)
scheme type i.e. originating entry in Sundry accounts shall be credit; and debit in suspense
account. While reversing the entries user shall select outstanding entries in respective accounts
only.
In Finacle, any outstanding entry in OAP (scheme type) type of accounts has to be reversed fully
(partial reversal is not allowed).
A. TRANSACTION IN SUSPENSE ACCOUNT
Lets take an example of granting an LFC advance to an employee who has a saving fund account
in the branch.
Menu Option - TM

Screen 1
1. Function (Mandatory) A (Add)
2. Type/Subtype (Mandatory) Enter T (Transfer) in the first field and BI (Bank Induced) in
the next field. Press F4.
3. A/c No. (Mandatory) If the user knows the account number of suspense, he can enter it;
otherwise, he can type first few characters of account like SUSP and press F2 for the list. A
list of all the accounts whose account names are starting with the characters entered (in our
example SUSP) shall appear. Using Up/Down arrow of keyboard, go to the account which
is to be debited and press Shift+F4 to select it.
4. Amount (Mandatory) Enter the amount.
5. Type of Part Tran (Mandatory) In our example we are debiting the suspense account for
granting the advance, user shall enter D (Debit) in this field.
Page 84 of 294

6. Particulars (Mandatory) Enter the relevant particulars in this field.

7. Value Date (Mandatory) System automatically displays BOD (todays date), if any value
dated transaction is to be entered, then the date can be changed.
8. Ref No. Although this field is not mandatory, but the user shall enter reference which will
help the user to identify the outstanding entry while reversing the same. Press F4.
9. The cursor shall appear in Specify option field.
10. Specify Option As in this example we are entering transfer entry, system shall not create
credit part tran automatically and we need to enter the same. Therefore, type E and press
F4.
(In case of cash / normal payment transaction, system shall automatically create credit part
tran and therefore user need not enter it)
11. A blank part tran screen shall appear. Enter the credit part tran details as discussed in
Transaction Maint. topic. (Mandatory fields while entering credit part tran are a/c no.,
amount, part tran type and particulars). After entering values in the relevant fields, press
F4. The cursor shall appear in Specify Option field.
12. If the user is authorized for passing the transaction, he can post the transaction; otherwise
the user shall press F10 to Save / Commit & note the transaction id on the voucher and
then another authorized user shall post/verify the voucher through menu option TM.
B. REVERSAL OF AN OUTSTANDING ENTRY
Lets take an example to reverse the above entry which is outstanding in suspense a/c. In this
example we will reverse this entry to the debit of LFC A/c.
Menu option TM
1. Function (Mandatory) A (Add)
2. Type/Subtype (Mandatory) Enter T (Transfer) in the first field and BI (Bank Induced) in
the next field. Press F4.
3. A/c No. (Mandatory) Enter the account which is to be debited / credited. As in our
example, we are reversing suspense entry; we will debit the LFC A/c (Office A/c).
4. Amount (Mandatory) Enter the amount.
5. Type of Part Tran (Mandatory) In our example we are reversing the outstanding suspense
entry, the user shall enter D (Debit) in this field.
6. Particulars (Mandatory) Enter the relevant particulars in this field.
7. Value Date (Mandatory) System automatically displays BOD (todays date), generally it
need not be changed. If any value dated transaction is to be entered, then the date can be
changed. Press F4.
8. Specify option Type E (Enter Entire Part Tran) and press F4. A blank part tran screen
shall appear.
9. A/c No. Enter the suspense/sundry account number of which entry is to be reversed.
10. Enter Amount, part tran type (C for Credit and D for Debit, in our example we will enter C),
particulars etc. and press F4.
11. Minor subsidiaries screen shall appear.

Page 85 of 294

Screen 2
12. The system shall display start amt & end amt equal to the amount entered in amount field of
the voucher, which means that the system shall display all the outstanding entries whose
amounts are equal to the amount displayed in above two fields.
13. As in our example, we are reversing only one outstanding entry in suspense account, the
user shall press F4.

Screen 3
14. System shall display all the entries outstanding in suspense account with the amount as
displayed in Screen 3.
15. System may display multiple records in the list. Using Up / Down arrow keys, user shall
locate the outstanding entry which is to be reversed. While locating outstanding entry, user
shall meticulously check transaction date, particulars and Ref. Num. for the entry which is to
be reversed.
16. After locating the entry, press Shift+F4 to select the entry for reversal. User shall ensure
that the * sign appears on extreme left hand side of the entry. Press F4 to come back to
TM.

Page 86 of 294

17. If the user is authorized for passing the transaction, he can post the transaction; otherwise
the he shall press F10 to Save / Commit & note the transaction id on the voucher and then
another authorized user shall post/verify the voucher through menu option TM.
C. REVERSAL OF MULTIPLE OUTSTANDING ENTRIES WITHIN ONE TRANSACTION
Lets take an example of reversing two suspense outstanding entries (one entry of Rs. 1770/- and
another of Rs. 2000/-). Lets assume that the total outstanding amount (i.e. Rs. 3770/-) is to be
debited to customers / office account(s).
Menu option TM
1. Function A (Add)
2. Type/Subtype T (Transfer) and BI (Bank Induced). User can use transaction type as T /CI
(Customer Induced, as the case may be) Press F4.
3. A/c No. As in our example, we are reversing suspense entries, we need to select
suspense account. As user may not remember account number of suspense, he can type
SUSP and press F2.
4. Select suspense account in which entries are outstanding and are to reversed, by pressing
Shift+F4.
5. Amount Enter total amount of reversal. (in our example Rs.3770/-)
6. Part tran type C (Credit).
7. Particulars Enter transaction details/particulars as per requirement. Press F4.
8. System shall display minor subsidiaries details screen as shown in Screen 4.

Screen 4
9. System shall display start amt and end amt as total of all credit (debit in case of sundry a/c
reversal) part tran amounts of account whose entries are to be reversed (in our example suspense a/c). User shall change start amt to the lowest and end amt to highest of all
entries to be reversed. Press F4.
10. System shall display a list consisting of all outstanding entries between the amounts as
entered in the start and end amt fields.

Screen 5
Page 87 of 294

11. Using Up / Down arrow keys, user shall locate the outstanding entries which are to be
reversed. While locating outstanding entry, user shall meticulously check transaction date,
particulars and Ref. Num. for the entry which is to be reversed.
12. After locating the entry, press Shift+F4 to select the entry for reversal. User shall ensure
that the * sign appears on extreme left hand side of the entry. Steps 11 & 12 shall be
repeated for selecting appropriate entries for reversal. User shall check that the total
amount of all entries selected for reversal shall be equal to total amount of all credit amount
(debit in case of sundry) part trans. This status is available at the bottom of the screen
(display fields Current tran amt & Total). Press F4 to come back to TM.
13. User then shall enter contra entry/entries in customers / office Account(s).
14. If the user is authorized for passing the transaction, he can post the transaction; otherwise
the he shall press F10 to Save / Commit & note the transaction id on the voucher and then
another authorized user shall post/verify the voucher through menu option TM.
Alternatively, user shall enter individual credit part trans for reversal of outstanding entries in
suspense account (in our example one for Rs.1770/- and another for Rs.2000/-) as discussed
in point B. This could be a lengthy process if user wants to reverse more than 2/3 entries, as
for every reversal entry separate part tran for suspense outstanding entry reversal would be
required.
D. INQUIRIES AND REPORTS
a. Inquiries
Menu Option - IOT (INQUIRE ON TRANSACTIONS)
This menu option can be used to inquire about outstanding and reversed entries as per the
criteria entered by the user. Lets take an example to see outstanding entries in Suspense
account Others account.

Screen 6
1. SOL Set Id Enter the Set / Sol ID, or select the same from the list.
2. A/c No. Enter the Account number of the sundry/suspense account of which user wishes
to list the entries.
3. Start Date Enter the date from which onward user wishes to inquire the entries.
4. End Date - Enter the date up to which user wishes to inquire the entries.
5. Start Amt Enter the amount above which user wishes to list the entries.
6. End Amt Enter the amount up to which user wishes to list the entries.
Page 88 of 294

7. If the user does not enter any values in the above 4 fields, system shall list all the entries
irrespective of dates & amounts. Therefore, if your wishes to list all the entries, its
advisable that no values be entered in the above 4 fields.
8. Filter Valid values are U (Unresponded i.e. outstanding) or F (Fully i.e. already reversed).
9. Press F4

Screen 7
10. Depending upon the criteria, the system shall list the entries (Screen 7). If no entries are
found fitting in the criteria entered, the system shall display a message Query caused no
records to be retrieved. If the user is inquiring about outstanding entries, he can see that
Reversed Amts. are zero against all the entries listed.
11. Optional - User can press Control+E (Explode) on any listed entry to see the transaction
details. The system shall automatically bring Transaction Inquiry screen. In the specify
option field, user can press Up / Down arrow to view other part trans. In the specify option
field, user shall type Q and press F4 to quit from the Transaction Inquiry screen.
b. REPORTS
Menu option PNBREP

Screen 8
1. Type 10 (Deposits Returns Reports Module) in the input bar and press F4.
2. The system display submenu.
3. Enter 10 (for suspense accounts) or 12 (for sundry accounts) and press F4, as shown in
Screen 9.
Page 89 of 294

Screen 9
4. System shall ask some values like SOL Id, from date, to date etc. User shall enter the
values as per the systems requirement. After entering every value, user shall press F4.
5. After entering all the values as per the systems requirement, system shall generate the
report. User shall wait until the progress indicator turns back to green.
6. Once the progress indicator turns back to green, user shall type Q (quit) in the input field
and press F4 to quit from the menu.
7. To view/print the reports, user shall invoke the menu option PR (Print Reports).
8. System shall display a list of reports generated as per the users criteria.

Screen 10
9. User can see that in case of suspense accounts, system has generated 4 reports. Using Up
/ Down arrow user shall go to the report which is to be viewed / printed.
10. In the field provided at the bottom-left side, user shall type T and press F10 to view the
report.
11. While viewing the report, user shall press F4 key to go to the next page; type (minus) and
press F4 to go to previous page; type page number and press F4 to directly go to the
required page.
12. User shall type Q and press F4 to quit from the report.
C. INQUIRY THROUGH TM / TI
On the basis of transaction Id and transaction date, user can inquire about the
sundry/suspense entries are reversed. Menu Option TM or TI (Transaction Inquiry)
Page 90 of 294

1. Function I (inquiry)
2. Tran Id Enter the transaction id.
3. Tran. Date If the transaction which is to be inquired was happened in the date prior to
todays date, then user shall enter that date. Press F4.
4. System shall display transaction details. Using Up / down arrow keys go to the part tran of
suspense / sundry account.
5. Specify Option Type A (Additional Part Tran Details) and press F4. System shall display
details of sundry / suspense entries which are reversed in the transaction being inquired.

Page 91 of 294

Prepared By : Anil K Aggarwal

Sr.Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
ACCOUNT FREEZING
In Finacle AFSM menu option allows a user to Freeze or Un-freeze any or all accounts of a
Customer.
Freezing of Account/Accounts.
Step
1.
2.
3.

Field
Menu option
Function
Customer_id

4.

Freeze
Reason Code
Freeze Code

5.

Step
6.

Field

Action
Enter AFSM at the menu option place and press ENTER.
Enter F in the Function Field for Freezing an account & press Tab.
Enter Customer_id of the customer whose account is to be frozen &
press Tab.
Enter Freeze Reason Code. Valid codes can be selected from the list,
which can be seen by pressing F2 key. Press Tab.
Enter Freeze Code i.e. T for Total Freeze, C for freezing Credit only and
D for Debit freeze only. Press F4.
System will display a list of all accounts of the customer whose
customer_id has been given in the customer_id column duly marked * in
their beginning. It means system has selected all the accounts of a
customer. The accounts which are not to be marked freeze can be
deselected by pressing Shift+F4. That means * prefixed accounts can
be marked as Freeze. The screen will appear as follows:

Action
Press F10 to commit.

Page 92 of 294

Verification
Step
1.
2.

Field
Function
Customer id

Action
Enter V for verification and press Tab.
Enter Customer id of the account holder and Press F4. System will
display all the accounts which have been selected for marking freeze
duly prefixed with * This has been shown on next page below. Press
F10 to commit.
The account has been marked as Freeze.

Unfreeze
Step
1.
2.

Field
Function
Customer id

Action
Enter U in the Function Field and press Tab to go on to the next field.
Enter Customer id of account holder whose account is to be unfreeze &
Press F4. System will display the screen as shown on the next page.

Press F10 to commit.

Like Freeze, UN Freeze also requires verification. The procedure is the same as applied in case
of Freeze.
Page 93 of 294

LIEN MAINTENANCE
For the purpose of future settlement of the debt or obligation of a customer, if Bank retains any of
his deposits, is referred to as Lien. This is a type of caution on the customer deposit account/s, so
that the amount under lien may not be paid through an oversight. By marking lien on an account,
the clear balance amount gets reduced to the tune of lien amount. The customer is not allowed to
withdraw the amount of lien (full or part) unless the lien is vacated. A user defined lien can be
marked manually through menu option ALM. Here in this chapter we shall explain the procedure
to mark user defined lien.
1. Account Lien Maintenance
System permits to place User Defined Lien on various types of accounts using menu option ALM.
Through ALM, we can Add, Modify, Inquire, Verify Lien & can cancel it before verification. The
provision is also available to view List & History of Lien.
2. Lien Marking
Invoke menu option ALM. On invoking this menu option system shall ask for Password of the
user invoking this menu option. Enter Password and Press F4. Repeat the Password & Press
F4. System will display ALM Screen. To see the various functions Press F1, system will display a
window showing all the functions, as referred above under para 1. Click on Ok, to close window.
Step Action
1.
Enter A in the Function field for adding/marking Lien & Press Tab.
2.
Enter A/c No. on which the lien is to be placed & Press F4.
System will itself pick up the module type as ULIEN & cursor will blink on the field (New
Lien Amount) at the bottom showing field value as 0.00. Make the field blank either by
deleting 0.00 or Press Ctrl F.
3.
Enter Lien Amount and Press Tab.
4.
Enter Lien Expiry Date if available. Normally the lien expiry date is not available; therefore
enter the maximum date like 31.12.2099 or the same field can be left blank. Press Tab.
5.
Enter the reason code for marking lien. List of reasons can be seen by pressing F2.
Select the reason from the list by pressing Shift F4. Press Tab.
6.
Enter the remarks if any, if the reason code is selected as others then the reason may be
entered in this field.
The screen will look like as follows:

Page 94 of 294

ALM Screen showing various fields duly entered.

TO ENTER MORE LIEN ON THE SAME ACCOUNT PRESS DOWN ARROW KEY & FOLLOW
STEPS 3 TO 6.
7.

Press F10. Lien has been entered. Verify the same.

3. Lien Verification
Once the lien is marked, it has to be verified by other user having sufficient work class. The menu
option is the same i.e. ALM.
Step Action
1.
Enter V in the Function field of the Account Lien Maintenance Screen.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Enter Account Number in the Account No. field (or Press F2, the system shall list all the
accounts on which liens have been marked but not verified. Press Shift+F4 to select the
account which a user wish to verify) and press F4 to Accept.
A list of records of liens on the account to be verified is displayed.
The cursor ( > )is positioned at the first record in the list.
Use up arrow, down arrow key to move to the record that you want to verify.
Press F10 to commit. The cursor will return to the Function field. Press F3 to quit from
ALM.

System will display ALM screen with lien details as shown below:

4. Modify existing Lien and/or Marking another Lien in the same account.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.

Action
Invoke ALM menu option.
Enter M (modify) in Function field & Press Tab, Cursor shall appear on A/c No. Field.
Enter Account Number and Press F4. System shall display the lien already marked in the
account and cursor will appear on the lien amount field.
You can modify details of existing lien. Use
arrow key to navigate through multiple
Page 95 of 294

5.
6.
7.

records. To mark new lien Press down arrow key at the last lien record, the amount field
shall display 0.00. Delete 0.00 and enter the amount of another lien to be marked. Press
Tab.
Enter Lien Expiry Date (this is not mandatory). Press Tab.
Enter valid reason for marking lien.
The reason can also be selected from the list as described above in Lien Marking. Press
Tab.
The cursor shall blink on the next blank field. This is the text field. Any remark, if
required, can be filled in it.

screen showing addition of second lien in the same account through modify mode.
5. Other user has to Verify new lien as per the procedure explained above under heading 3. Lien
Verification. This completes the addition of new lien in the same account.
6. Lien Revocation/Modification
Step Action
1.
Enter M in the Function field of the Account Lien Maintenance screen.
2.
Enter the account number in the Account Id field and press [F4].
3.
A list of records of the liens on the account is displayed. The cursor is positioned in the
Lien Amount field of the first record.
4.
Use down arrow key, or up arrow
Key, to move the cursor on to the record that you
want to modify or vacate/revoke.
5.
Enter/modify details of the lien i.e. if the amount of lien is to be vacated/revoked then
modify the lien amount to 0 (zero) or if the lien amount is to be increased or reduced then
modify the amount to that extent and press F10 to commit. The cursor will return to the
Function field.
7. Verifying Lien Modification/Revocation.
Procedure of verification is the same as described above.

Page 96 of 294

8. LIEN INQUIRY
Inquiry on lien on any account can be made through the menu option ALM.
Invoke ALM option. Enter I in the function field and fill the Account Number on which the inquiry is
to be made. Press F4. System will display list of all liens marked on the account as shown below:

Lien History:
If history of lien is to be seen then Enter H in the Function field on the ALM Screen, enter the
Account Number & Press F4. The system will display the screen shown on next page.

screen showing above history of lien in an account

Page 97 of 294

Here in the above screen it can be noticed that first lien of Rs. 2000/- was marked on 17.04.2003
and then it was released on the same date. Again on 17.04.2003 another lien was marked for Rs.
25000/- of which the general details were modified and the same was released on the same date.
It can be noticed that before the date of lien creation/modification of each record one alphabet M,
or R, or G, are shown which means M for Marked, R for Released and G for General
Modifications.
The other details relating to history as shown above can be viewed by exploding (Press Ctrl+E
key) on any of the records. The screen will appear as shown on the next page.
How to see Lien marked through ACI/ACM?
Lien marked in an account can also be inquired through the menu option ACI or ACM and sub
option T. System will show all the records of existing liens in an account. This can be further
exploded by pressing Ctrl+E key.

screen showing above lien released

screen showing above lien is marked

Page 98 of 294

Prepared by: Anil Kumar Aggarwal

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
INVENTORY MOVEMENT BETWEEN LOCATIONS
Cheque Books, Demand Drafts, TPO, FDR, Cash Order etc. are called as the Inventory in Finacle.
As per the manual procedure, these forms are kept in Double Lock (DL) when they are received
from Stationery Department. Before printing/issuing such instruments, its very necessary to move
such inventory from DL to the Employee location.
In Finacle, Inventory Movement is the activity through which these Security Forms are moved from
one location to another location like from Outside location (stationary division) to Double lock (i.e.
branch), from Double Lock to Employee, from Employee to another Employee. IMC is the menu
option in Finacle through which the inventory can be moved from one location to another location.
The procedure for moving the inventory is described below:
A. MOVING OF INVENTORY FROM ONE LOCATION TO ANOTHER.
1. Invoke menu option IMC.
Function field.

The following screen will appear and cursor will appear in the

2. Press F1 key to see the valid function codes on message bar.

3. Enter A for ADD, in Function field and Press F4, the cursor will appear in the next block at
From Locaton field.

Page 99 of 294

4. Lets assume that the inventory is received from Stationery Division. Enter ZZ in the first field
and EXT in the next field (i.e the inventory is being moved from Outside to Double Lock
whenever new inventory is entered in the system as and when the new security forms are
received) & press Tab or ENTER Key twice, the cursor will appear at To Location field.
5. Enter DL in the first field & DL in the next field, Press F4, the cursor will appear in the next
block at the Inventory Class/Type field.
6. Enter Inventory Class like CHQ for Cheque Book, CO for Cash Order, DDS for Demand Draft,
SI for Stock Invest, TDR for Term Deposit Receipt, TPO for TPOs etc. The list of Inventory Class
can be seen by press F2. Please see below:

the type of inventory will be automatically be selected if the class is selected from the list by
pressing Shift F4, otherwise enter the type of inventory and press Tab or Enter key to go on to
the next field.
7. Alpha. Enter Alpha Series of inventory e.g. ABZ & press Tab or Enter key to go on to the next
field.
8. Start No. Enter Start No. of inventory e.g. the start no. is 100001. Press Tab to go on to the
next field.
9. End. No. enter the end no. of inventory e.g. e.g. 101000 & press Down Arrow Key the
system will automatically display the quantity which is being moved. Please see the screen shown
below:

Page 100 of 294

9. Follow steps 6 to 9 for moving another inventory from the location & to the location as specified
in function block. Finally, press F10 to commit the record.
10. The system shall generate an Inv. Tran. No. like 68999 (as shown below). Please note this
transaction no.

11. Verify this inventory transaction through the menu option IMC,
B. VERIFICATION OF INVENTORY MOVEMENT:
1. Invoke menu option IMC, enter V for verification and press Tab to go on to Invt. Tran. No.
field.
2. Enter Invt. Tran. No. In our example its 68999 and press F4 to go on to the next block.
3. System shall show the following screen duly displaying the record of inventory to be
verified.

4. Press F4, the system will display another screen as follows:

5. Enter password of Authorised Officials who can operate Double Lock. In this case the
authorized officials are 79710MK & 70000MK. User 79710MK & 70000MK have to enter
their passwords in the respective fields. On accepting password the flag of password will
automatically convert to Y from N as shown above. Finally Press F10 to commit.
6. The system will give the message Record Verified as shown in the following screen.

Page 101 of 294

C. INVENTORY MOVEMENT FROM DOUBLE LOCK TO EMPLOYEE

1. Invoke menu option IMC.
2. Enter A in the Function field and Press F4, the cursor will appear at the field From
Location in the next block.
3. Enter DL in the first field & DL in the next field (if the inventory is being moved from Double
Lock to Employee) that means inventory is being moved from Double lock to Employee for
his further action. & press Tab or ENTER Key twice, the cursor will appear at To Location
field.
4. Enter EM in the first field and Employees Employee ID (i.e. generally PF No.) of the user
to whom the inventory is being moved/issued, in the To Location field, as shown in the
following screen. This Employee id/PF No. can also be selected from the list which is
available by pressing F2. Press F4, the Cursor will appear in the next block at the
Inventory Class/Type field.

5. Enter Inventory Class/Type, Alpha, Start No., End No. as explained at Point No. 6, 7, 8 &
9 under the procedure MOVING OF INVENTORY FROM ONE LOCATION TO ANOTHER,
above.

Press F10, the system will generate a inventory transaction id, note down the transaction id
number.
To verify this inventory movement, invoke menu option IMC. Enter Function as V for
verification, enter inventory transaction id and Press F4, system will display the inventory
record moved to the employee location. Press F4, the following screen will appear:

Page 102 of 294

Follow the procedure as explained at point no. 5 under title VERIFICTION OF INVENTORY.
Please note that apart from entering password of DL Authorisers, Password of inventory
recipients user will also to be entered.
D. INQUIRE, SPLITING & MERGING OF INVENTORY
After the inventory is issued at the employee location, the concerned employee should execute
the menu option ISI to inquire that whether the said inventory is available at his location. See
the following screen on execution of menu option ISI, the Locn Class/Code is automatically
displayed of the user at whose location an inquiry is made. Enter Inventory Class/Type and
Press F4.

screen 1
On pressing F4 as explained above, the following screen will appear:

screen 2
Press Ctrl E, the system will display the record of the inventory as shown below:

screen 3
Press F3 three times to come back on the Function Field of ISI menu.
E. SPLITTING OF INVENTORY
Invoke ISI menu option, enter S in the Function field & Press F4 for splitting the inventory.
The cursor will appear at Locn Class/Code field, Press Tab key twice. Lets take am example
of splitting above mentioned inventory available at employee location. Enter CHQ as Inventory
Class and CA25 as Inventory Type as shown below:

Page 103 of 294

screen 4
Press F4, the system will show the inventory record as shown in the screen 3 above. Press
Shift F4 to select the record. The following screen will appear wherein the Start Serial
Number is shown by default by the system.

screen5
Press Tab to go on to Items per Unit field and enter 25, as this inventory is to be splitted in
the unit of 25 each, Press Tab and enter No. of Units, as 4 & Press F10, the system will
display a message as Record Split is Successful! & the cursor will appear at the Function
Field. To see the splitted record of inventory, delete S in the Function field and enter I for
Inquire and Press F4 the cursor will appear in the next block. Press Tab twice. Enter
Inventory Class as CHQ & Type as CA25 & Press F4, a screen will show the record as
shown above in the screen 2. Press Ctrl E, the system will display the splitted record of
inventory in the unit of 25 leaves each as shown below:

screen 6
Press F3 four times to come back on to the main menu screen.
F. MERGING OF INVENTORY
At the time of day end when the remaining inventory is to be returned back to the Officer
concerned, User can MERGE the splitted inventory and move the inventory back to the officer.
The system does not restrict a user to move the inventory without merging.

Page 104 of 294

To merge the inventory invoke menu option ISI, enter M in the Function Field and Press F4,
the cursor will appear at the Locn Class/Code, Press Tab & enter Inven. Class/Type & Press
Tab. Enter Start Serial Number i.e. Alphabetic portion of inventory & start serial number of
inventory to be merged & Press Tab. Enter Quantity, as shown below:

screen 7
Press F4, the system will shown another screen displaying the records to be splitted, as
shown below in the screen 8:

screen 8
Press10. System will shown the message Records Merger is Successful ! This can again
be inquired into whether the merger is successful.
G. DESTROYING OF INVENTORY
If any inventory is to be destroyed say e.g. the Draft is not printed properly by the system then
we have to select next number of inventory for printing of that Draft but the earlier number of
Draft Leaf has to be destroyed. The procedure for destroying an inventory is the same through
the menu option IMC as we follow at the time of moving an inventory from one location to other
location. In case of Destroy, the To Location Field has to entered as DI DI as shown in the
following screen:

screen 9
MENU OPTIONS:
IMC

For Functions: A-ADD, I-Inquire, L-List, M-Modify, V-Verify & X-Cancel.

For generating List of Inventory:
Enter L for List in Function field & Press F4 twice, the system will display list of all
type of inventory with the status as Authorised, Entered but not Authorised &
Deleted.
Page 105 of 294

If list of Authorised, Entered but not Authorised & Deleted Inventory at a

particular location is to be generated then enter the Location Code along with the
Status of Inventory and Press F4.
ISI
ISIA
ISR
ISRA
IMR
IMI

For Inquiry, Splitting & Merging of Inventory.

For Inquiry, Splitting & Merging of Inventory, at other locations.
Inventory Status Report at EM (own location)
Inventory Status Report at other Locations
Inventory Movement Report
Inventory Movement Inquiry.

Page 106 of 294

Prepared By : Anil K Aggarwal

Sr.Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
CHEQUE BOOK ISSUE & MAINTENANCE
Cheque Book can be issued by the user at whose location the inventory is available.
How to Issue Cheque Book:
Cheque Book can be issued using menu option ICHB. The issue of Cheque Book is complete
only after the same is verified through menu option ICHB by the other User.
Invoke Menu Option ICHB
On invoking the menu option ICHB, the following screen shall appear:

cheque book issue first screen

Function Block is mandatory to be filled in. The valid options are I for Issue, V for Verify, X for
Cancel & P for Print. In our Bank Print option is not being used and cancellation of Cheque Book
can be done before the same is issued and verified.
To issue a cheque book, Enter I in the function block and Press Tab. The cursor will go on the
Account No. field. Enter account number to which the cheque is to be issued and Press Tab.
The cursor will blink on Cheque Book Ack. Obtained. Enter Y if the acknowledgment of cheque
book is received, else enter N. Here, it is clarified that when an account holder comes in person
to get the cheque book issued then this field has to be filled in Y because in such case there is no
need to obtain its acknowledgment. In case the cheque book is to be issued to a third party then
the Cheque Book Ack. Obtained Flag is to be entered N till the acknowledgement is received.
Press F4, to go to next block. Cheque Book allowed for the account flag, Balance in the account
and Total Unused Leaves will be displayed by the system.
The cursor will blink on Cheque Book Type. Issue Date i.e. BOD Date and Cheque with i.e. the
Employee_id (on whose location the cheque book is available) fields are displayed by default.
Press F2 for viewing the list of Cheque Book Type (i.e. SB Cheque Book, CA Cheque Book etc.
containing 20 leaves or 25 leaves) available for issue. Select the related Cheque Book Type by

Page 107 of 294

pressing Shift+F4 and press F4, the system shall display the cheque books available for issue as
shown in the following screen:

Select the cheque book to be issued from this list by pressing Shift+F4 and press F10. The
cheque book stands issued. But the same is to be verified.
Verification of Cheque Book Issued:
Verification of cheque book is to be done through the menu option ICHB. Invoke menu option
ICHB, enter V in Function and press Tab. Enter Account number to which the cheque book is
issued or press F2 to see the list of Cheque Book issued pending for verification and select the
Account No. by pressing Shift+F4. Press F4, the system shall display the cheque Book issued as
per the following screen:

Page 108 of 294

The cursor shall blink on the field Collect MICR Charges? By default the value is Y, the same
can be set to N if no charges are to be collected. PressF4, the cursor will appear in the beginning
of the Cheque Book Record. Press F10 to commit. The cheque book issued is verified.
However, in case the cheque book is issued to the Minor A/c then the system shall raise an
exception, which can be accepted by pressing F4 or if not then to Quit by pressing F3.
Cheque Book Acknowledgement: The Cheque Books issued of which the acknowledgement
flag has been given as N, can be marked as Y through the menu option CHBM (Cheque Book
Maintenance). The valid values are A: Acknowledge, C: Caution, D: Destroy, X: Cancel, I:
Inquire, V: Verify and U: Undo Caution.
Acknowledge, Caution, Destroy, Cancel, Inquire, verify and Undo Caution can be done through
CHBM.
A: Acknowledge, invoke menu option CHBM and enter A. Press Tab, the cursor shall blink on
the Account number field. Enter Account no. in which the cheque book is to be acknowledged and
Press F4. The under mentioned screen will appear.

If required the details of each leaf of Cheque book can be seen by exploding the record here. But
for acknowledging the Cheque Book select the record, as displayed above, through Shift+F4 &
Press F10 to commit.
Acknowledgment Verification
This is to be verified through the same menu i.e. CHBM by other User. The other user shall
invoke the menu CHBM, Enter V in the Function Block and Press Tab, Enter Account No. and
Press F4. Same screen as shown above shall appear. Press F10 to Commit. However, If a user
wants to see the status of each leaf, before committing, he may note down the begin cheque
number and press F3. In the function block, enter the begin cheque number in the Begin Chq. No.
Field and Press F4, the system shall display the status of all the cheque leaves (down arrow key
can be used to see more records) as follows;

Page 109 of 294

Press F10 to commit. The acknowledgment is verified.

C: Caution: Caution can be marked on the cheques of which the status is UNUSED. That is to
say that caution cannot be marked on a cheque which has not been acknowledged. Caution on a
Cheque can be marked through menu option CHBM.
Invoke menu option CHBM: Enter C in the Function Field, Press Tab, Enter Account No., Press
Tab, Enter Begin Ch. No., Press Tab, Enter No. of Leave & Press F4, system will display equal
number of cheques as entered in No. of Leave Column starting from the Begin Ch. NO.
The system will also display the Current Status of Cheque and New Status of Cheque as shown
in the next screen.

Page 110 of 294

Press F10 to commit.

Verification of Caution: The caution marked Cheque can be verified with the same menu option
i.e. CHBM by the other user. Invoke the menu option CHBM, Enter V in the Function Field, Fill
in the Account No. and Begin Ch. No. & Press F4. The system will display Cheque pending for
verification of Caution. Press F10 to commit.
It is to be noted that system allows payment of caution marked cheques. However, an exception
Cheque Cautioned <Manager> is raised at the time of its posting/verification.
Caution can be unmarked by UNDO function through the same menu option i.e. CHBM. Invoke
the menu option CHBM; enter U in the function field. Enter A/c No., Begin Ch. No. & No. of
leaves & press F4. System will display the cheques selected for unmarking caution. Press F10.
Caution has been unmarked. Verify the same with the same menu option i.e. CHBM. Enter V in
the function field. Enter A/c No., Begin Ch. No. & press F4. System will display the cheques
selected for verification of unmarked Caution. Press F10 to commit.
Destroy of Cheque/s
At the time of closure of an account, as per the procedure the customer has to surrender the
unused Cheque leaves. In that case these Cheque leaves are required to be destroyed. There is
a provision available in Finacle that we can mark Cheque leaves as destroyed through menu
option CHBM. How to mark a Cheque leaf as destroyed is described as follows:
Invoke menu option CHBM.
Enter Function as D for Destroy. Press Tab and enter Account Number to which the Cheque leaf
pertains. Enter Begin Cheque No. and Number of Leaves, to be destroyed, as displayed in the
following screen, and PressF10 to commit. The Cheque leaves are marked to destroy. This is
required to be verified through the same menu option CHBM but by the other user as explained
ahead.

Destroy Verification
Invoke menu option CHBM, enter V in Function field & Press Tab, Cursor shall move on to the
Account Number field. Enter Account Number & press Tab. Enter Begin Cheque Number and
Page 111 of 294

Press F4. System shall display the Cheque leaves marked for Destroy as shown in the following
screen. Press F10, cursor will blink at the Function field. This means that the cheque leaves
marked for Destroy have been verified. Press F3 to come on to the main menu of Finacle.

Inquire a Cheque Book

Inquiry of a cheque book can be made through the menu option CHBM. Through this menu option
we can know as to how many cheque books have been issued in a particular account, their date of
issue, number of cheque book starting from with number of leaves and leaves status. The Inquiry
procedure has been explained as under:
Menu Option CHBM
Invoke CHBM and enter I in Function Field. Press Tab and enter Account Number in which
inquiry of a cheque book is to be made. Press F4, the system shall display the screen as shown
on the next page. Any cheque book can be selected (Shift F4) and exploded by pressing (Ctrl E)

The above screen shows all the cheque books issued to an account.
Page 112 of 294

Screen showing status of each leaf of a cheque book after the cheque book record has
been exploded.
Same way the inquiry of other cheque book leaves can also be made.
Cheque Book inquiry can also be made while working in any screen or any menu option without
quitting from it. User can press F5 or can click on Background at the menu option bar, the
system will display the Background Menu as shown on the next page. At the Background menu
delete the number appearing in the Make your Choice field and enter the same again before
pressing F4. CHBM screen will be displayed. Enter I (for inquire) & A/c No. & Press F4. System
shall display the same screen as shown above (1st Screen) under the title Menu Option CHBM. If
user wants, the cheque book record can be exploded here too, for looking at status of cheque
book leaves as described above.

Display of Background Menu.

Page 113 of 294

Cheque Book inquiry is also available through Transaction Maintenance and Account Ledger
Inquiry menu options. In TM or in ACLI, if you enter valid A/c No in the appropriate field and
explode Press Ctrl E, the system shall bring the ACI screen, with cursor blinking at Enter Option
Field. Type Q (Cheque Book Inquiry), in the Enter option field and press F4 to see the cheque
books issued to the customer, in the account entered in TM.

Screen shown above when exploded in TM menu option at A/c No. Field
User can quit by pressing F3.
STOP PAYMENT
Stop payment of a cheque can be marked in Finacle through the menu option SPP. Through this
menu option <S> Stop Payment can be marked, <R> Revoked, <I> Inquired, <V> Verified & <X>
Cancelled i.e. before verification.
Invoke SPP menu, enter S for marking stop payment, press Tab, enter Account No. to which the
cheque is issued and enter Begin Cheque No. (this is a mandatory field). Enter cheque no. to
be stopped and enter No. of Leaves (mandatory field) i.e. enter 1 if only one cheque is to be
stopped or if there are more than one cheque (in seriatim) to be stopped, then enter equal
number of leaves. Press F4, system will display the balance in the account on the screen and
Stop payment accept date and time by default. Enter Payee Name, Cheque Date, Cheque
Amount & Reason Code from the list available. Press F4, the cursor will blink on the option field
as displayed in the next screen.

Page 114 of 294

See above Cursor is blinking on Option Field.

Enter C for charge details and Press F4, the following screen will appear displaying charges
applicable. These charges are editable.

Press F4 and then F10 to commit. Verify stop payment marking with some other user.
Verification can also be done through the same menu option SPP.
Invoke SPP, enter V in Function field, press Tab & enter Account No. followed by Begin
Cheque No. (Account No. and Begin Cheque No. can also be selected from the list press
F2 Key at Account No. Field to see the list and Shift F4 for selection of record.) and then
Press F4 twice. System will display all the information entered for marking Stop Payment with
cursor blinking on Option field. To visit Charge details enter C here and Press F4 to see details
and again Press F4 to come back on the first page of Stop Payment Verification. Press F10 to
commit. System will display message as Charge Transaction Created: SD1186170. That
Page 115 of 294

means system has also posted charges in the account in which the stop payment has been
marked. However, if system encounters any exception then the transaction will remain in entered
state which can be posted manually.
Inquiries of stop payment Cheque Leaf can also be made by entering Account No. in the inquiry
mode after invoking SPP menu option and explode it by pressing Ctrl+E or click at <Explode>
available on the menu option bar. System will display the screen (as shown below) with cursor
blinking on Enter Option field.

screen displayed after exploded on A/c No. Field in SPP menu option.
Enter Q and Press F4. System will display record of the entire cheque book/s issued in the
account. This record can be further exploded. On explode system will display the following type
of screen.

Screen showing each leaf status of a cheque book after the record exploded.
Page 116 of 294

Press F3 Key to Quit.

Similar inquiry can also be made while working in TM or ACLI or through Background menu, as
explained above in menu option CHBM.
Revocation of Stop Payment
Revocation of stop payment is also done through the menu option SPP. Invoke menu option SPP,
enter R (for revocation) in the Function field, enter respective details in Account No., Begin
Cheque No. and No. of Leaves fields and Press F4 twice. System will display the details of
stopped cheques with cursor blinking on Option field as shown below:

cursor is on Option field

Press F10 to commit. Verify this revocation through the same menu option SPP. Invoke SPP,
enter V in Function field, press Tab & enter Account No. followed by Begin Cheque No.
(Account No. and Begin Cheque No. can also be selected from the list, press F2 Key at
Account No. Field to see the list and Shift F4 for selection of record.) and then Press F4
twice. System will display all the information entered for revocation of Stop Payment with cursor
blinking on Option field. Press F10 to commit.
Press F3 Key to Quit.
SUMMARY
1. Cheque Book can be issued through the menu option ICHB, Function as I. Cheque Book
can be issued by the user at whose location the inventory is available. After issue the same
is required to be verified. The verification will also be done through the menu option ICHB.
2. Inquiry of a cheque book, marking of Acknowledgement, Caution & Destroy of a
cheque/range of cheques can be done through the menu option CHBM.
3. Stop Payment & Stop Payment Revocation can be marked through the menu option
SPP.

Page 117 of 294

RELATED MENU OPTIONS - CUSTOMER MASTER CREATION, OPENING/ CLOSING

SB /CA ACCOUNTS, ISSUE OF CHEQUE BOOKS, TRANSACTIONS, STOP
PAYMENTS, STANDING INSTRUCTIONS
MENU
DESCRIPTION
PURPOSE
OPTION
CUMM
Customer Master Maintenance
To Add a new Customer
OAAC

Accounts Opening

For opening new accounts

OAACAU

Accounts Authorization

For Verification / Modification / Cancellation of

Unverified Accounts

ACM

Accounts Maintenance

For Modification of Verified Accounts And Other

Inquiries/Maintenance

CACC

Closure Charges Collection

To calculate/apply Account Closure Charges

CAAC

Accounts Closing

For closing accounts

CAACAU

Accounts Closure - Authorization For Verification

Accounts

ICHB

Issue Chequebooks

For Issue, Verification, Cancellation And Printing

Of Chequebooks

CHBM

Cheque Book Maintenance

For
Marking
Acknowledgement,
Caution,
Revoking Caution, Destroying Unused Cheque
Leaves, Verification And Inquiry

INQACHQ

Inquire A/C
Cheque

CHBIR

Cheque Book Issued Register

For Printing Chequebook Issue Register

TM

Transaction Maintenance

To Post Transactions in the Accounts

ALM

A/C Lien Maintenance

To Mark/Release Lien on Accounts

Number

For

Cancellation

of

A For Inquiring Account Number From Cheque

Number

JTHOLDER List Joint Holders

To view Joint Holders/ All Related Parties

INTTM

Interest Table Maintenance

SPP

Stop Payment Processing

To view/modify Interest Table Code

(Rates)
To enter/cancel Stop Payments

SIM

Standing
Maintenance

PSP

Pass Sheet print

To Print Statement Of Accounts

PBP

Pass Book print

To Print Passbooks

ACS

A/C Selection

CUS
ACCBAL

Closed

Instruction To Add/Maintain Standing Instructions

To make inquiries on criteria-based

selected accounts
Customer Selection
To make inquiries on criteria-based
selected customers
Components of Account Balance To view break-up of an account balance
Inquiry

ACLI

A/C Ledger Inquiry

To view transactions in Account Ledger

ACTI

A/C Turnover Inquiry

To view Turnover in account

ADVC

Print Dr/Cr. Advice To Customer

VCHR

Print Dr/Cr. Voucher

To Print Advices based on selected

criteria
To Print Vouchers based on selected
criteria

Page 118 of 294

ABMR

Report Of A/Cs Below Minimum To print list of accounts below minimum

Balance
balance

AFSM

Account
Freeze
Maintenance

CBM

Customer Becoming Major

ACLPCA

Customer A/C Ledger Print

CUIR
CUMP
TACBSH
INTRUN

Status To maintain freeze status in account

To inquire / update status of minor a/c

To print Ledger Printout of criteria-based

selected accounts
Customer Interest Report
To print Interest Application Report for a
Customers Accounts
Customer Master Print
To print Master Details for Customers
Accounts based on Selected Criteria
Transfer Accounts Between To transfer Accounts From Inoperative to
Subheads
Operative Category
Interest run on account

Application of interest on accounts

Page 119 of 294

DEMAND DRAFTS /PAY ORDERS

A.

ISSUE OF DEMAND DRAFT

Case: I Issue of Single Demand Draft Menu Option TM
1.
Type TM at the function block and press <enter>.
2.
Type A to add, enter transaction type/sub type (cash or transfer) and press F4.
3.
Type DD at the a/c number field, enter DD amount, type C at transaction type block
and enter transaction particulars. Use <tab> or <enter> key to move to next field. Press
F4. System takes the user to additional details screen.
4.
If tran type is Transfer, modify create contra flag to Y, else do not modify the flag.
5.
Enter drawee bank/branch code.
6.
Enter name of payee, purchaser a/c number (if tran type is transfer) and name of
purchaser.
7.
In the print option field, type I for immediate printing or L for printing at a later stage.
Press F4.
8.
System displays the DD commission charges which are modifiable. Press F4 again.
System takes the user to TM screen option block. Type P to post and press F4. Post all
part trans. Press F10.
9.
If the print option in additional details screens is I (immediate), system takes the user
the DD print screen which displays the entire DD particulars like DD serial number,
payees name, date of issue, drawee branch and the inventory details like type of
inventory and its printed serial number (for printing to go through, DD inventory must be
available at the user location). Press F4. The system displays the printed serial number
of the draft. Press F4 again. System prints the draft and asks for confirmation Is print
OK and default populates Y. If print is okay, press F10. If print is not okay, modify Y
flag to N and then press F10. Then use DDPRNT option to re-print the draft. In either
case, system displays the tran id, which the user has to note down.
10.
If the print option in additional details screen is L (Later), then the user displays the
tran id, which the user has to note down. Use DDPRNT option later to print the draft.
11.
Verify the transaction (verification to be done by some other user).
Case II: Issue of Mass Demand Draft Menu Option DDMI
Mass issue of demand drafts is done using menu option DDMI. Through this menu option, user
can Add, Modify, Post, Print and Inquire on a demand draft. Further, multiple DDs can be issued
on behalf of only one purchaser.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

Type DDMI at the finacle user menu option block and press <enter>.
Type A at the function block and press F4.
Type C for cash or T for transfer type of transaction. If tran type is T, enter tran sub
type. Use <tab> or <enter> key to move to next field.
Type DD in DD a/c number field, purchaser a/c number in case of transfer tran for
debiting DD amt and commission amt (name of purchaser in case of cash transaction)
and press F4.
Enter DD particulars like amount, drawee bank/branch code, payee name and tran
remarks. Use down arrow key to enter particulars of next demand draft. Continue with
the process till particulars of all DD to be issued are entered.
Press F10 to commit. System displays tran id. Note down the same. Post the same
using menu option DDMI or TM.

Page 120 of 294

B.

PRINT A DEMAND DRAFT

CASE I PRINT A SINGLE DEMAND DRAFT MENU OPTION DDPRNT
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.

Type DDPRNT in finacle user menu option block and press <enter>.
Enter DD number to be printed, its date of issue and press F4.
If the system finds more than one record meeting above criteria, it displays message
More than one DD record exists, enter tran id. Enter the tran id and part tran serial
number and press F4. System displays the particulars of the DD.
Press F4. System displays the inventory type and the printed serial number of the DD
and prints the draft. It then asks for confirmation Is print OK and default populates Y
in the field.
If print is OK, press F10. The system will then move the inventory.
If print is not OK, modify Y flag to N and then press F10. Reprint the draft.

CASE II PRINT BULK DEMAND DRAFT MENU OPTION DDPALL

This menu option can be used to print all unprinted DDs for a particular date.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.

Type DDPALL in finacle user menu function block and pres <enter>.
System by default populates the BOD date. This can be modified. Enter the date for
which the drafts need to be printed.
Press F4. System displays the DDPRNT screen and by default displays the particulars
of first DD to be printed. Press F4 twice. System prints the drafts and asks for
confirmation. Press F10.
The system displays the next DD to be printed. Press F4 twice. System prints the draft
and asks for confirmation. Press F10.
Repeat above step till printing of all drafts is over.
Press F3 to quit.

CASE III PRINT DEMAND DRAFTS WITH SELECTION CRITERIA MENU OPTION
DDBP
Using above menu option, user can print drafts that meet the selection criteria given above.
30.
31.
32.
33.

Type DDBP at finacle user menu option block and pres <enter>.
Enter selection criteria. This could be DD no from/to, Issue date from/to, DD amount
from/to, Tran id from/to, Drawee branch code, Purchaser a/c number, Purchaser name,
Payee name etc. Press F4.
System displays all records meeting the selection criteria as specified above. Select P
for print and R for reprint and press F4.
System takes the user to DDPRNT screen and picks up DD for printing one by one.
Repeat step nos 26 to 29.

The user will not be able to indicate R where DD is not even printed once and also P where it is
already printed. The main advantage of this option is that the user is able to select records for both
printing and reprinting in one shot.

Page 121 of 294

CASE IV RE-PRINT A DEMAND DRAFT MENU OPTION DDREPRNT

Reprinting of drafts can be done only when the original printing is already done. The user will not
be able to select a record for reprinting which is not already printed. Reprinting is also required in
case of issue of duplicate DD.
34.
35.

Type DDREPRNT at finacle user menu option block and press <enter>.
Repeat step no 19 to 23 as explained above.

C. CANCELLATION OF DEMAND DRAFT MENU OPTION DDC

A draft, which has been issued, can be cancelled only after it has been printed. Further, it can be
cancelled only by the issuing sol and not by any other sol within data centre.
1. Type DDC at finacle user menu option block and press <enter>.
2. Type C to cancel at the function block and press F4.
3. Enter DD number, date of issue, tran type (cash or transfer) and put Y in create service
charge tran field and press F4.
4. If there are more than on DDs meeting the above criteria, system displays the message
More than one DD exists, enter tran id. User then has to enter tran id and press F4 again
(tran id means the id of the transaction by which the DD was originally issued. If tran id is
not known, the same can be inquired using FTI menu and specifying instrument type as
DD, date of issue of DD, tran type cash or transfer and amount of DD).
5. The system displays the particulars of the draft. If the draft was issued by debiting the
customers a/c, system also displays the customer a/c number if tran type above is selected
as T (for transfer). Press F4. You are now in the remarks column.
6. Enter suitable remarks and press F10.
7. System displays message DD has been cancelled successfully. Tran ids are _. Note
down the tran id and post the same through TM menu.
D. MARK A DEMAND DRAFT AS LOST: MENU OPTION DDLOST
Status of a demand draft, which has been printed, can be marked as Lost only by the DD issuing
branch. This is a pre-requisite for issuing a duplicate DD.
1. Type DDLOST at finacle user menu option block and press <enter>.
2. Enter DD number, its date of issue and DD issue tran id (in case multiple records with same
DD number and date of issue exist) and press F4.
3. System displays the particulars of the demand draft and asks for confirmation Non
Payment Advice Required. If the value for this field is Y, then user has to enter receipt of
non-payment advice using menu option DDNPADV before issue of duplicate DD. If the
value for this field is N, then DDNPADV is not required.
4. Press F10 to commit. System updates the status of DD as Reported Lost
E. ENTER RECEIPT OF NON PAYMENT ADVICE IN CASE OF LOST DD: DDNPADV
When the Non payment advice required flag is Y in DDLOST, then entry of receipt of non
payment advice from the drawee branch becomes mandatory.
1. Type DDNPADV at finacle user menu option block and press <enter>.
2. Enter DD number, its date of issue and DD issue tran id (in case multiple records with same
DD number and date of issue exist) and press F4.
Page 122 of 294

3. System displays the particulars of the demand draft. Press F10 to <commit>.
F. ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DEMAND DRAFT MENU OPTION DDD
A duplicate demand draft can be issued only after the status of original demand draft has been
marked as Lost and non-payment advice from the drawee branch has been entered in
DDNPADV.
1. Type DDD at finacle user menu option block and press <enter>.
2. Enter original DD number, date of issue, tran id (in case multiple record exists) and put
create service charge flag to Y. Specify tran type as C for cash or T for transfer.
Press F4.
3. System displays the particulars of the demand draft. Press F4 again. System displays
duplicate DD issue charges. Enter transaction remarks in the Remarks column and press
F10. System displays the message Duplicate DD has been issued successfully. Tran id is
____. Customer has to pay Rs._____. Note down the tran id
4. Post the transaction through TM menu.
5. Print the demand draft using menu option DDREPRNT.
G. PAYMENT OF DRAFT
PAYMENT OF SINGLE DRAFT MENU OPTION TM
1. Type TM at finacle user menu option block and press <enter>.
2. Type A to add at the function block and specify tran type and sub type. Press F4.
3. Type DD at the a/c number field, enter DD amount, specify tran type (credit or debit), enter
tran particulars, type DD as instrument type, enter running serial number of the DD as
instrument number and its date of issue and press F4. System takes the user to additional
details screen and default populates the DD particulars.
4. If tran type is T (for transfer) then modify create contra flag to Y.
5. If more than one DD exists with matching particulars, system displays drawee branch code
of one of the DDs. User has to modify the drawee branch code, if required and enter other
particulars of the DD and press F4.
6. System takes the user to TM screen option block. Select P for post and press F4. Post all
part trans. Press F10 to commit and note down the tran id.
7. Verify the transaction (verification to be done by other authorized user).
H. MASS PAYMENT OF DEMAND DRAFT MENU OPTION DDMP
Mass payment of demand drafts can be done using menu option DDMP. This feature is enabled
only when credit of all demand drafts has to go to only one account. Further, the credit will also be
consolidated credit.
1. Type DDMP at finacle user menu option block and pres <enter>
2. Enter tran type and sub type (cash or transfer), specify instrument type as DD, Enter DD
a/c number (type DD), specify DD currency as INR, enter payee name in case of cash
payment and payees a/c number in case of payment through transfer mode and press F4.
System takes the user to DD particulars screen.
3. Leave alpha code column blank. Enter running serial number of the DD, its date of issue,
amount and issuing bank/branch code. If draft is being paid ex-advice, modify ex-advice
flag to Y. Enter tran particulars and press down arrow key to enter particulars of next draft.
4. Continue with the process till all the drafts to be paid are entered. Press F10 to commit and
note down the tran id.

Page 123 of 294

5. Post the transaction using P mode in DDMP option. At the function block, type P and
enter tran id and press F4. System displays the particulars of the payee as well as of all the
drafts to be paid. Press F10 to commit.
6. If any of the particulars need modification, press F3 to quit and type M instead of P at the
function block and enter tran id. Press F4. System displays all particulars of the transaction.
Make necessary modification and press F10 to commit. Note: modification of transaction is
to be done before its posting as explained in step no.54.
7. Inquiry I option is also available in DDMP menu.
I. INQUIRY & REPORTS
SPECIFIC DD ISSUED INQUIRY MENU OPTION DDII
Using this menu option, user can inquire on the particulars of any specific DD that has been
issued.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Type DDII at the finacle user menu option block and press <enter>
Enter DD number and date of issue and press F4.
System displays the particulars of the DD.
Press F3 to <quit>.

DD CREDITS INQUIRY MENU OPTION DDIC

Using this menu option, user can inquire on credits that have gone into the centralized DD a/c. In
this inquiry, system displays the date of issue, DD number, issuing/drawee branch code, DD
amount and name of payee. User has to enter selection criteria.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Type DDIC at the finacle user menu option block and press <enter>
Enter selection criteria like DD no from/to, Issue date from/to, DD amt low/high, drawee
bank/branch code, purchaser a/c number, inventory type and number, print option, print
flag, print count and press F4.
System displays all records meeting the selection criteria.
To see further details of any specific record, go to that record and <explode>. System
would display further details of that record.
Press F3 to return to previous screen.
Press F3 again to <quit>.

SPECIFIC DD PAID INQUIRY MENU OPTION DDIP

Using this menu option, user can inquire on the particulars of any specific DD that has been paid.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Type DDIP at the finacle user menu option block and press <enter>
Enter DD number and date of issue and press F4.
System displays the particulars of the DD.
Press F3 to <quit>.

DD CREDITS INQUIRY MENU OPTION DDID

Using this menu option, user can inquire on debits that have gone into the centralized DD a/c. In
this inquiry, system displays the date of issue, DD number, issuing/drawee branch code, DD
amount and name of payee. User has to enter selection criteria.

Page 124 of 294

REMITTANCES
Sr.No. Issue
01.
Issue of Demand
Draft
02.
TRANSACTION
TYPE
03.
04.

05.

DRAFT AMOUNT
COMMISSION

PRINTING OF
DRAFT

DO
Always credit centralized DD A/c
number (2107003161401)
T/CI or T/BI where draft amount =>
Rs.50000/-

DO NOT
Do not credit HO A/c.

Do not use C/NR (cash/

normal receipt) as tran
type where draft amt =>
Rs.50000/Issue more than one draft where Do not issue single draft
draft amount =>Rs.10 lacs
for Rs.10 lacs & above.

Modify commission amt as displayed Do

not
modify
by the system, when required.
commission part tran
where commission has
For draft purchased in cash, modify been shown as zero.
commission to 120% of what is
displayed by the system.
Initialize Ilinkweb before initiating Do not close ilinkweb
print option.
during the day until all
drafts have been printed.
Ensure that default term id of the
user initiating print option is Do not initiate print
option unless UPM of
new_def.
the user initiating print
option has new-def as
its default term id.
Ensure inventory is available at
employee location initiating print
option and printed serial number of
draft as on the leaflet is same as is
appearing on screen.
If print is OK, press F10 followed by
F3.

06.

CANCEL
DEMAND DRAFT

If print is not OK, take 2nd print of the If print is OK, do not
draft and move the draft earlier press F3 unless F10 is
consumed to destroyed location done.
through IMC.
Do not forget to move
Ensure that all drafts are printed spoiled
inventory
to
before end of the day.
destroyed location.
Use DDC option to debit DD a/c to
cancel DD issued after migration to
finacle.
Use TM option to debit HO a/c with
visit screen flag as X to cancel DD For draft issued prior to
issued prior to date of migration to migration to finacle, Do
finacle.
Not use DDC option to
cancel DD.
If draft is cancelled in cash, do
attach cash receipt voucher for Do not forget to attach
collecting cancellation charges along cancellation
charge
with the cash payment voucher.
voucher to the cash
Page 125 of 294

07.

DUPLICATE
ISSUE OF DRAFT

Use DDLOST option to mark DD as

lost and DDD to issue a duplicate
DD where date of issue is after the
date of migration to finacle.
If date of issue is prior to date of
migration
to
finacle,
handle
procedurally.

08.

SENDING DRAFT
ADVICE

Collect duplicate issue charges and

prepare/print related voucher.
Drafts drawn on finacle branches will
have FINACLE printed below the
drawee branch code.
Segregate drafts drawn on finacle
branch and non-finacle branch. For
non-finacle drafts, send draft
advices to drawee branches for
drafts =>
Rs. 25000/-

payment voucher
Do not use DDLOST
and DDD options for
issuing duplicate DD if
date of issue of original
DD is prior to date of
migration to finacle.

Do not send draft advice

to the drawee branch if
FINACLE is printed
below
the
drawee
branch code.

Pay Order
S.No
01.
02.

Issue
Issue
Order

DO
of

03.

04

Pay Always credit PO A/c (3161101) Do not

prefixed by sol id.
A/c/DDA/c

TRANSACTION
TYPE
COMMISSION

PRINTING OF
PAY ORDER

DO NOT
credit

HO

T/CI or T/BI where pay order Do not use C/NR (cash/

amount => Rs.50000/normal receipt) as tran
type where pay order
amt => Rs.50000/Modify
commission
amt
as Do
not
modify
displayed by the system, when commission part tran
required.
where commission has
been shown as zero.
For PO purchased in cash, modify
commission to 120% of what is
displayed by the system.
Initialize Ilinkweb before initiating Do not close ilinkweb
print option.
during the day until all
drafts/pay orders have
been printed.
Ensure that default term id of the
user initiating print option is Do not initiate print
new_def.
option unless UPM of
the user initiating print
option has new-def as
its default term id.
Ensure inventory is available at
employee location initiating print
option and printed serial number of
PO as on the leaflet is same as is
Page 126 of 294

appearing on screen.
If print is OK, press F10 followed by
F3.

06.

CANCEL PAY
ORDER

07.

DUPLICATE
ISSUE OF
Pay order.

If print is not OK, take 2nd print of If print is OK, do not

the PO and move the PO earlier press F3 unless F10 is
consumed to destroyed location done.
through IMC.
Do not forget to move
Ensure that all drafts/POs are spoiled
inventory
to
printed before end of the day.
destroyed location.
Use DDC option to debit PO a/c to Do not use TM option
cancel PO issued after migration for cancellation of PO.
to finacle.
.
If PO is cancelled in cash, do
attach cash receipt voucher for Do not forget to attach
collecting
cancellation
charges cancellation
charge
along with the cash payment voucher to the cash
voucher.
payment voucher
Use DDLOST option to mark PO as Do not use DDLOST
lost and DDD to issue a duplicate and DDD options for
PO where date of issue is after the issuing duplicate PO if
date of migration to finacle.
Pay orders issued prior
to the date of migration
are not uploaded in the
Collect duplicate issue charges and DST records .
prepare/print related voucher.
In such cases , it is to
be handle procedurally.

Page 127 of 294

Prepared by: Makarand B Kedare

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
TERM DEPOSITS
Term deposits accounts can be opened in finacle for customers having valid cust_id in finacle.
Every term deposit in finacle is treated as a separate account. User can use menu option OAAC or
workflow ACOPN to open new Term Deposit account.
Mandatory options in OAAC G (General Details),
S (Scheme Details)
F (Flow Details)
Optional options in OAAC N (Nomination Details)
A (Related Party Details) for joint A/c holders details etc.
C (Customers Instructions)
X (Transaction details)
2 (TDS Details)
A. How to open FDMB account ?
Menu option OAAC

Screen 1
1. Function O (Open)
2. Customer ID Enter customer id of the customer of which user wishes to open a/c.
3. Currency Code By default INR (Indian Rupees) appears i.e. the currency in which user
wishes to open a/c.
4. Scheme Code If the scheme code is known to the user, he can enter the same in this
field. Otherwise, user can type FD in this field and press F2 (List). System will display a list
of all the scheme codes starting with FD. User can select scheme code under which he
wishes to open an a/c by pressing shift+F4. While selecting scheme code, user should also
see the GL subhead code of the scheme under which the account is to be opened. In this
example, we are opening a FDMB Term deposit, therefore, in this field user should enter
FDMB.

Page 128 of 294

5. GL Subhead If the user enters (or selects scheme code from list), the GL subhead will
appear automatically, otherwise user can enter the same in this field. Press F4 to accept
the details.
System will display AOF and the cursor will appear in function field.
6. Function User can press F1 for help. There are 4 valid functions O-Open, R-Renew, EExtend & T-Transfer In. As in this example we are opening a new FDMB, user should enter
O (Open).
7. A/c No If the user is opening a new FD, then nothing is to be entered in this field. User
should press F4 to accept.
General Details
As the user presses F4 in the function block, system brings general details screen for account
which is being opened.

Screen 2
8. Acct Name System will automatically display the name of the customer entered in Cust-ID
record. (System allows changing the name, but system will raise related exception after
committing the verification of account. If the user who is verifying the account has sufficient
work class, he can override the exception by pressing F4 and verify the account.)
9. Acct Short Name This will be automatically displayed from Cust-ID. User can change the
short name.
10. A/c open Date BOD date is displayed. User can change the date.
11. Special Charge Code This field is used to give preferential charges. Press F2 to see the
list. Press Shift+F4 to select respective charge code.
12. Mode of Operation (Mandatory) Press F2 and select it by pressing Shift+F4.
13. Location Code Enter the population group to which customer belongs e.g Metro, Urban
etc. Press F2 and select it by pressing Shift+F4.
14. Account Mgr. User id of employee who is attached to this account as relationship
manager can be entered. Only employee Id which is available in the list can be selected.
Press F2 and select it by pressing Shift+F4.

Page 129 of 294

15. Cash Exception Limit Dr. - Default values is 19,999.99. If the user tries to debit this account
by an amount more than 19,999.99, system will raise an exception.
16. Cash Exception Limit Cr. - Default values is 99999999999999.99.
17. Clg. Exception Limit Dr. By default 0 (Zero), which means that no debit transaction
through clearing shall be allowed in this FD.
18. Clg. Exception Limit Cr. By default 0 (Zero), which means that no Credit transaction
through clearing shall be allowed in this FD
19. Xfer Exception Limit Dr. Applicable for transfer.
20. Xfer Exception Limit Cr. Applicable for transfer. (If the limits as mentioned in point 15 to
20 are changed by the user, system will raise exception Override Default Check when the
user commit verification of account; if the verifying official has sufficient work class he can
override the exception by pressing F4 key and authorize the account verification.)
21. Remarks free text field.
22. A/c Report Code Default is ZERO.
23. Ledger no. may not be necessarily filled.
24. Collect Charges Default is Y. This means, system will collect account maintenance
charges as and when they are due.
25. Turnover Details- Default is N. May be kept as it is. This field is Y, if customer wishes to
have account turnover details, generally set Y for CC type of accounts.
26. Relative to Staff Default is N.
27. Relative Staff ID If above field is set to Y, Staff Id in this field need to be entered. The
employee having the staff id entered in this field is barred from entering any transaction in
this account. Press F6 to go to Next Page.
2nd Page

Screen 3
28. Passbook/Statement (Mandatory) By default system displays R (Deposit Receipt) in this
field. This should be kept as R.
29. Statement Frequency Nothing to be entered in this field.
30. Local Calendar Default N. Not to be changed.
31. Dispatch Mode As the account has been enabled only for deposit receipt, there is no
necessity to enter anything in this field.
32. Next Print Date Nothing is to be entered in this field.
33. Download to PBF Default value is N and its a protected field, i.e. user can not modify this
field.
Page 130 of 294

34. Pay Interest Default Y, means interest will be paid for this account.
35. Collect Interest Default N, means interest will not be collected from this FDMB account.
36. Customer Pref. Interest (Cr.) We have already seen this field in currency details (option E)
in CUMM. Generally, in OAAC we should not fill any value in this field.
37. Customer Pref. Interest (Dr.) We have already seen this field in currency details (option E)
in CUMM. Generally, in OAAC we should not fill any value in this field.
38. Account Pref. Interest (Cr) If preferential interest is to be given to the FD being opened,
over and above prevailing interest (explained in point 39), the same can be entered in this
field. User can enter negative value if user wishes to pay less interest for this account or he
can enter positive value in this field if he wants to pay more interest over and above the
prevailing rate of interest. This field is required to be entered for preferential rate of interest
for Staff/senior citizens etc.
39. Int Rate Code For FDMB scheme, the interest rate code is TDGEN. This value need not
be changed.
40. Account Pegged Default is Y, means system will pay contracted rate of interest as
entered during account opening.
41. User can press F4 to go to the Enter Option field or Press F6 to go to Next Page. If
user presses F4 key then switch over to point No. 46. If the user presses F6 key, system
will display 3rd page (as shown in screen 4).
rd
3 Page

Screen 4
42. Contact phone enter contact phone no.
43. Allow Sweeps - Enter Y if the sweep is allowed between accounts.
Tax Details 44. Tax Category By default T (Customer level TDS) appears in this field. Press F1 for help. If
the account is to be exempted from any tax deduction as may be required in certain cases,
user can enter N (None) in this field. In NRO/NRNR accounts, the user needs to modify tax
category from T (Customer level TDS) to W (Account level withholding tax).
45. Withholding Tax % - Enter the withholding tax percentage as applicable to NRO a/c and
prevailing at the time of a/c opening.

Page 131 of 294

Press F4 to go to Enter option field.

Scheme Details
46. Enter Option - Press F2, select S Scheme Details option (5th from top) by pressing
Shift+F4. Press F4 to get into scheme details. (Or user can type S instead of pressing F2
& Press F4.)
47. Dep./Instl. Amt (Mandatory) Enter deposit amount in case of FDs (enter installment
amount in case of RD.) As in this case we are opening FDMB, we need to enter deposit
amount.
48. Deposit Period (Mandatory) There are two fields. In the 1st field user can enter number of
months and in 2nd field he can enter no. of days as may be the case.
49. Value Date By default, system displays todays date (BOD date). If user wishes to open
FD in back date, enter the same in this field.
50. Maturity Date System will automatically calculate maturity date of deposit depending upon
value date and deposit period. As such, nothing is to be entered in this field.
51. Special Category Press F2 for list and select valid code from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
Valid Special category codes are B-blocked, C-Court Order, E-Earnest Money, O-Other
Bank Deposit, P-Prohibitory Order & T-Tender Money. But there is no validation provided
on this field, this field is can be used only for recording and future information.
52. Availing Nomination Facility (Mandatory) Enter Y if the customer wishes to avail
nomination facility.
53. Print Nominee Name Enter Y if the nominees name is to be printed on FDR.
54. Repayment A/c No Enter the repayment a/c no in which the maturity proceeds of the FD
would be credited. Press F4 to goto Enter Option field and please see point No. 59. (Or
Press F6 to go to the next Page.)
Depending on the request from the customer, this page may be required to be filled.
55. Auto Closure Enter Y if the FD is to be automatically closed on the maturity date.
56. Auto Renewal By default N (No). If customer gives option to renew the FD being opened
after its maturity, then user needs to modify this field. Valid values in this field are UUnlimited and L-Limited.
57. Max Renewal Allowed User can specify that how many times this FD is to be renewed. In
case the previous field is changed to U, then nothing is to be entered in this field. If the
previous field is changed to L (Limited) and user shall enter the value that how many times
the FD would be renewed.
58. User needs to enter other information like scheme code, GL subhead code etc for the FD
as applicable when the same is to be renewed. Press F4 to accept Scheme details. The
cursor shall appear in Enter option field.
Flow Details
59. Enter option Enter F (Flow Details) or select the same from list. Press F4.

Page 132 of 294

Screen 5
60. The system will display the expected behavior of the FD in future. The 1st part of the screen
will display summary of expected transactions in FDMB from the date of opening the FD till
the date of maturity of FD. In case of FDMB, flow codes will be PI (Principal Inflow), II
(Interest Inflow) & TO (Total Outflow)
61. User shall Press Control + E to explode the screen. System will compute & display flow
details like flow date, flow amount, flow code, account balance, transaction amount and
value date, in the 2nd part of the screen.
The first flow record is always PI (Principal Inflow) and is always the full amount of the
principal deposit.
Next flow records will be of type II (interest Inflow) for FDMB.
Last flow record will be of type TO (Total Outflow) for FDMB.
62. Press F4 twice to accept flow details. The cursor will appear in Enter Option field.
Joint A/C Holders Details (Optional)
63. Enter Option - Press F2, select A Related Party details option (1st from top) by pressing
Shift+F4. Press F4 to get into option details.

Page 133 of 294

Screen 6
The first screen displays the Main Account Holders Details. To enter joint account holders
details, press Down Arrow of keyboard.
64. Relation Type (Mandatory) Press F1 for help. The help displays various values for
relation codes. P (Power of Attorney), A (Authorised Signatory), L (letter of Authority), J
(Joint Holder), G (Guarantor) etc. Press Enter on OK button or click mouse on it. Enter the
value in this field.
65. Relation Code Press F2 and select the code from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
66. Despatch Mode If the account is enabled for statement, system gives user the option to
send the statement to related parties added through this option. Press F1 for help. Enter the
despatch mode in this field.
67. Designation Code Press F2 for list and select the code by pressing Shift+F4.
68. Customer ID If the related party (joint A/c holder) has a valid cust_id code, enter the same
here. In that case other details of the party like address need not be entered.
69. Name (Mandatory) Enter name of the related party. This field need not be field if partys
cust_id is entered.
70. If the cust_id of related party is not entered, Address, City, State, Country, Postal Code etc.
of the related party need to be filled in.
71. If user wishes to enter one more related party detail, press Down Arrow and follow the
steps 64 to 70. After entering joint a/c holders details, user can press F4 to come to enter
option field.

Page 134 of 294

Nomination Details (Mandatory if Availing Nomination Facility flag is set to Y in Scheme

Details)

Screen 5
88. Enter Option - Press F2, select N Nomination details option (3rd from top) by pressing
Shift+F4. Press F4 to get into nomination details. (User can type N instead of pressing F2
and press F4)
89. Enter Nominee name (Mandatory)
90. Relationship (Mandatory) e.g. Father, Mother etc. Press F2, select relationship by
pressing Shift+F4.
91. Reg. No. Registration number for nominee is default generated by the system.
92. Please enter Address. (Mandatory) Two lines are available for address; out of which 1st line
is mandatory.
93. City (Mandatory) Type first 2-3 characters of city name press F2, select city code from the
list by pressing Shift+F4.
94. State (Mandatory)- press F2, select state by pressing Shift+F4.
95. Country (Mandatory) Default is IN (India). Need not be changed. If user wishes to change,
press F2 and select country by pressing Shift+F4.
96. Postal Code (Mandatory) - Enter Pin/Postal Code.
97. Nominee Minor Enter Y if nominee is minor.
98. Date of Birth if nominee is minor, date of birth of minor must be entered.
99. Enter guardians details as specified in this page.
100.
Press F4 to go to Enter option field
User can press F10 (Commit) to save the account details. Or otherwise, depending on
requirement, user can visit options 2 (TDS Details), C (Customer Instructions) options in
OAAC.
System will display a box on the desktop with the details like A/c No, maturity amount and
maturity date. Click mouse on OK button.

Page 135 of 294

A/c No consists of 16 digits as explained below

SOL ID
417700

Product Code
31

A/c No
0000595

Check Digit
2

31 is product code for a/c opened under the FDMB scheme code.
Check digit is also a part of account no. User need not remember all 16 digits. Whenever user
accesses this account, he can simply enter 315952, system will automatically expand it to 16
digits. This facility is provided only when user accesses customers accounts of users own
branch. User must enter all 16 digits in account no. field for accounts of customers of other
branches.
Note : During new FD account opening, if the customer already has fixed deposit in the same
branch where hes opening the new FD, and wants to know impact of TDS on FD, user can use
option 2 (TDS details) to get the detailed information about TDS.
B. How to verify newly opened FDMB A/c ??
Please note
1. The user who has opened the account through OAAC can not verify the account; as Maker
and Checker concept is applicable in Finacle, therefore maker can not be the verifier.
2. During verification of account, no details can be changed, as all the fields are write
protected.
3. Before verification, if user wishes to modify a/c details of newly opened a/c, he can use
menu option OAACAU function M (Modify).
Menu option OAACAU
1. Function V.
2. Temporary A/c No. Enter the A/C No which is to be verified. User need not enter all 16
digits of account; user can enter short account no. of the account to be verified. If user
forgot to note account no. after committing OAAC, then user can retrieve it by pressing F2
in this field; select the account to be verified by pressing Shift+F4.
3. Permanent A/c No. must not be entered. Press F4 to bring account details. User will see
General Details of account. Press F11 twice (Or click on Transmit button twice) to visit next
page. When the user is in 3rd page, press F4 to go to Enter option field.
4. Enter Option Enter S (scheme details) and press F4 to visit scheme details. After verifying
scheme details, press F4 to come back to Enter option field..
5. Enter Option Enter F (Flow details) and press F4 to visit flow details. After verifying flow
details, press F4 twice to come to enter option field.
6. If the user nomination details are entered during A/c opening, the verifying user must visit it.
Enter Option Enter N and press F4 to visit nomination details. After verifying nomination
details, press F4 to come back to Enter option field.
7. Enter option If the related party details like joint a/c details or authorised signatory etc are
entered, the verifying user should visit the same. Enter Option - A and press F4 to visit
Related Party Details. Press Up/Down arrow to scroll through the records. After verifying
related party details, press F4 to come back to Enter option field.
8. Enter Option - Press F10 to commit.
Note : System may display warnings or/and exceptions. If the verifying official has sufficient
work class to override the exceptions, he can press F4. If the user presses F4 and accept, then
only account will get verified. If the user presses F3, system will not verify the account.

Page 136 of 294

Various Exceptions raised during account verification

When the user presses F10 to commit account verification, system may raise warnings or/and
exceptions, if the user has sufficient work class to override these warning/exceptions, then he
can press F4 to accept account verifications with warnings/exceptions.
Following are warnings/exceptions
1. Account name change exception In the general details of account opening, system by
defaults populated customer name from the customer master. If during account opening,
user changes name of the customer, system may raise this exception.
2. Override default check - If user changes any of the default values populated by the
system during opening the account, like cash/clearing/transfer values, a/c report code,
collect charges etc, system will raise this exception.
3. Default Interest parameter change System by default populates intt. Rate code (e.g.
TDGEN) in the intt. rate code field (2nd screen of general details). If the user changes this
rate code, system will raise this exception. As also, if user enters any preferential (customer
or/and account) interest Dr/Cr, system raises this exception.
4. Introducer not customer During cust_id creation, introducer details must be entered. If
the introducer is not a customer and user enters only name and status of the introducer,
system raises the warning during cust_id verification.
5. Introducer New customer In finacle, customer is treated as new for 3 months after
creation of cust_id. If during this period he introduces another customer, then the system
raises this warning.
6. Account verification balance check During verification of an account, system checks
whether the principal inflow transaction is done in the account. If the same is not already
done, system raises this exception.
7. Value dated account opening If the user modifies value date field available in the
scheme details to date prior than todays date (i.e. BOD date), system raises this exception.
8. Cust_id mismatch (Cr) In the C (Customer instruction), if the user enters account
number of a customer whose cust_id is different than the cust_id for which user is entering
C details, system will raise this exception.
C. Fast track FDMB a/c opening
Lets open a new FDMB deposit using menu option OAAC.
Assumptions in this example
Customer already has a Cust_ID.
Currency - Indian Rupees
Account Opening (Value) date - todays date
Deposit Period - 12 month period
Nomination Facility Yes. Nominee is not minor.
Mode of Operating Self; with no preferential rate of interest.
Maturity proceeds to be credited to the same FDMB account.
Open A/c Menu option OAAC
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Function O (Open).
Customer Id Enter cust_id
Scheme Code FDMB. Press F4.
Function O (Open). Press F4.
Mode of operation enter SELF. Press F4.
Page 137 of 294

6. Enter Option Delete present option and enter S (Scheme Details). Press F4.
7. Dep/Instl. Amt - Enter deposit amount.
8. Deposit period 12. Second field to be left blank.
9. Availing Nomination facility Y. Press F4.
10. Enter Option Delete present option and enter F (Flow Details). Press F4.
11. Flow details screen shall appear. Press Control+E (Explode).
12. Press F4 twice.
13. Enter option Delete present option and enter N (Nomination Details). Press F4.
14. Nominees Name Enter nominees name.
15. Relationship Press F2 for list and select the code as per requirement.
16. Address Enter Nominees address.
17. City Code - Press F2 for list and select the code as per requirement.
18. State Code - Press F2 for list and select the code as per requirement.
19. Postal Code Enter the postal code as desired. Press F4.
20. Enter option Press F10 to commit/save account details.
21. Message box shall appear. Please note account number, maturity date and maturity
amount. Press enter key or click mouse on OK button.
22. Press F3.
Verification of this account need to be done through menu option OAACAU, the steps are
discussed in paragraph B.
D. ACOPN ( ACCOUNT OPENING WORKFLOW)
ACOPN is a workflow which can be used to perform all the activities like creating cust_id,
opening an TD account and deposit money in the newly created account; all the activities in
one go. Normally, following activities have to be performed in Finacle, when a new customer
comes to our bank for the first time for opening an TD account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Create Cust_id
Verify Cust_id
Open an account
Verify an account
Deposit money in a/c
Post transaction

CUMM (CTO/Officer & above)

CUMM (Officer & above)
OAAC (CTO/Officer and above)
OAACAU (Officer & above)
TM (CTO/Officer & above)
TM (Officer & above)

ACOPN can be used to perform 1st, 3rd & 5th steps. Steps 2nd & 4th can be performed by the
authorizer through menu option DSPWFQ. Step 6th need to be performed through menu option
TM. Please note that help (F1) is not available in any field in ACOPN; but wherever list is
needed, the user can press F2 and get the list of valid codes. Step by step execution of all the
above steps is explained as below -

Page 138 of 294

Screen 11
1. Invoke Workflow Menu Option ACOPN
2. Customer ID - If the customer is new and does not have valid cust_id in Finacle, type NEW.
If the customer has a valid cust_id, enter the same here. If the cust_id of existing customer
is entered, the workflow shall take the user to A/c opening screen. If the cust_id is entered
as NEW, the workflow shall take the user to customer id creation. Lets assume that the
customer is new. Enter NEW in customer id field.
3. Authoriser ID Enter the finacle user id of the user who is supposed to authorize this
workflow.
4. Press F4, the system will take the user to customer id creation screen. The following screen
may appear on the screen.

Screen 12
Page 139 of 294

5. Title As explained in OAAC, enter the valid title code (e.g. Mr, Ms etc) or press F2 and
select valid title code by pressing Shift+F4.
6. Name Enter name of the customer.
7. Short Name Enter the short name.
8. Cust Type Press F2 and select cust type from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
9. Occu Code Press F2 and select occupation code from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
10. Const Code - Press F2 and select Constitution code from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
INTRODUCER
There are 4 fields available under this block.
11. Customer ID Enter the cust_id of the introducer, if the same exist in finacle database. If
the cust_id is entered then the user should not enter anything in next 3 fields of introducer
block.
12. Status Code If the introducer does not have a valid cust_id in finacle, his/her status (e.g.
known to manager, existing customer etc.) can be selected from the list available in this
field.
13. Title Enter title or select the title of the introducer from the list. Not necessary to be
entered if cust_id is entered.
14. Name Enter the name of introducer. Not necessary to be entered if cust_id is entered.
COMMUNICATION
15. Address line1 Enter the address of customer.
16. Address line2- If the address line1 is not sufficient to enter address of customer, the same
can be continued in this field.
17. City Code Enter city code or select city code from the list.
18. PIN Code Enter six digit pin code.
19. State Code Enter state code or select the same from the list.
20. Country Code Default IN (i.e. India) appears in this field. Enter country code (if its other
than India) or select from the list.
21. TDS Table Enter TDS table code or select the same from the list. Valid TDS table codes
may be TDSGE for General category public, TDSCR for Corporate bodies and TDSNR for
NRO/NRSR accounts. If the customer is not a Minor, nor a NRE, nor a staff then press F4
and see point No. 34, else follow the next points.
MINOR DETAILS
There are 4 fields available in this block. If the customer is not a Minor, all these fields can be
skipped.
22. Minor (Y/N) Default value is N, If the customer is minor, enter Y in this field.
23. Date of Birth If the above field is entered as Y, the user need to enter date of birth of the
minor customer.
24. Guardian Code Enter the guardian code i.e. M for mother, F for father, D for defacto
guardian, O for others & C for court appointed.
25. Guardian Name Enter guardians name. If the customer is not NRE, nor a staff, then
press F4 and follow point No. 34, else follow points mentioned below.
PASSPORT DETAILS
There are 6 fields available in this block. If the customer is not a NRE customer, all these
fields can be skipped.
Page 140 of 294

26. NRE (Y/N) If the customer is NRE, enter Y in this field.

27. Passport Num Enter passport number.
28. Details Enter details of passport.
29. Issue Date Enter issue date of passport.
30. Expiry Date Enter Expiry date of passport.
31. Nationality Default is IN (India), enter the country code of the customer or select the same
from the list. If the customer is not a staff, then press F4 and follow point No. 34, else follow
points mentioned below.
STAFF DETAILS
There are 2 field available in this block. If the customer is Staff or Ex-Staff of our bank, these two
fields may be filled accordingly.
32. Customer Staff Default is N, Enter Y if the customer is staff of our Bank.
33. Employee ID If the customer is employee of any of finacle branch, his/her employee id
(PF No.) can be entered or selected from the list. If the customer is employee of non-finacle
branch and his/her employee Id is not available in the list, please enter STAFF in this field.
If the customer is Ex-Staff of our bank, the user may enter STAFF in this field. Press F4.
The cursor will automatically appear in Combined Statement field.
34. Combined Stmt Enter N and press F4. (If the customer needs combined statement of
accounts, enter Y in this field. In that case the user needs to enter frequency for statement
which is available on the first page of General Details block of CUMM. Press F4.)
35. An alert (box) may appear on the screen. Press Enter key or click mouse on OK button.
The customer ID is generated by the system and same can be seen in Customer ID field.
Press F4 and the system shall take the user to account opening form.

Screen 13
36. Scheme Code Enter the scheme code under which customer wishes to open an account
e.g. FDMB is scheme code for FDMB a/c for general public or FDMBS for FDMB a/c for
staff members of our bank. Press F4.

Page 141 of 294

37. GL SubHeadCode Default GL Subhead code shall appear. The user may press F4 to
continue.
38. Int. Rate Code Rate code according to the scheme selected shall appear in this field. The
user may press F4 to continue.
39. Amount Enter the principal amount.
40. Part tran Type Default is C (Credit).
41. Type [C/T] Enter C (Cash) If the customer wishes to deposit above amount by cash in the
a/c which is being opened, else enter T (Transfer).
42. Sub Type [NR/CI] If the user select C (Cash) in the Type field, the user need to enter NR
(Normal Receipt) in this field. If the user select T (Transfer) in the Type field, the user need
to enter CI (Customer Induced) in this field.
43. Xfer A/c no. If the user select Type as T (transfer) and subtype as CI (Customer induced),
as stated in point 41 & 42 respectively, then the user need to enter a/c no from which the
amount will be transferred to the account which is being opened. Press F4.

Screen 14
44. Mode of Oper Enter the code for mode of operation, or select the same form the list.
TD DETAILS
45. Period months Enter the period of TD in months.
46. Period Days - Enter the period of TD in days, as may be desired.
47. Rep/Int Cr A/c Enter any operative account to which the customer would like to credit
maturity proceeds. (Note In case of special/ordinary FD, enter the A/c No. of the
customer where the intesrest/principal shall be transferred by the system, otherwise the
same shall be credited by the system to Sundry-FD)
48. Acc Pref Dr. May be left blank.
49. Acc Pref. Cr Enter preferential rate of interest in this field. E.g. if the user enters 1 in this
field, the system will give a benefit of 1% of interest over and above the prevailing rate of
interest in the scheme and if the user enters -1 in this field, system will give 1% less interest
in this account than the prevailing rate of interest as applicable in the scheme the user has
selected while opening the account. Press F4.
50. System will display an alert in a box (See Screen 15). Please note the A/c No., Maturity
Amount, Maturity Date & Workflow Id. The workflow id is to be used by the user who is
going to authorize cust_id and account. Press Enter key or click mouse on OK button.
51. Please note the Transaction ID and amount. Press F3 to quit from the workflow.

Page 142 of 294

Screen 15
E. How to Verify Cust_id, A/c No. and transaction generated through ACOPN?
There are two possibilities, if the authorizer (the user whose finacle user id has been entered in
the first screen of ACOPN) is present in the office and second, if the authorizer is not present in
the office.
If the authorizer is not present in the office, then any user authorized to verify cust_id, A/c No
and Transaction can verify these entries through individual menu options as like CUMM,
OAACAU & TM respectively.
If the authorizer is present in the office, he/she can invoke menu option DSPWFQ.
1. Invoke menu option DSPWFQ (Display Pending Workflow Items). The system shall
display a list of all the workflows which are pending for authorization. Go to the workflow id
as noted earlier and press Control+E (Explode)

Screen 16

Page 143 of 294

2. The system shall bring the screen of CUMM with V (Verify) in Function and cust_id in
Customer Id field. Press F4.
3. Verify the cust_id as explained in Customer ID creation chapter.
4. Once the user commits (F10) in CUMM and presses F3 key, the system shall automatically
bring OAACAU menu option with the V in Function and A/c no. automatically in the
concerned field. Verify the account as explained in this chapter.
5. After the user commits (F10) in OAACAU & presses F3 to quit from the a/c authorization
menu the system shall display the workflow list. Press F3 and come out from DSPWFQ.
6. Please post/verify the transaction through TM in modify mode.
ACOPN can also be used only to open an account of the customer already having valid cust_id
in finacle. In that case in the 1st screen of ACOPN, in Customer Id field, enter the cust_id of the
customer of whom the user wishes to open an account.
Limitations of ACOPN
1. Nomination details can not be captured.
2. Joint Account holders details, authorized signatory, power of attorney etc. can not be
captured. These details can be entered though menu option ACM in modify mode. The
modifications done through ACM must be verified by other authorized user, through ACM.
F. DETAILS TO BE FILLED FOR SPECIAL/ORDINARY FD
Mandatory options in OAAC for FD are G (General), S (Scheme) & F (Flow) details.
For Special/Ordinary FD A/C opening, C (Customer Instructions) should also be entered for
crediting Monthly/Quarterly interest to customers operative A/cs like SF, CA etc.
Steps After filling G,S & F Details, user should follow following steps -

Screen 17
1. Enter option C (Customer Instructions Details). Press F4. Screen 17 shall appear on the
desktop.
2. User can see * sign on left hand side of IO (Interest Outlflow) record.
Page 144 of 294

3. Press Control+E on IO record. Screen 18 shall appear on the desktop.

4. In this example, it is assumed that the intrest will be credited to only one account.
5. In the first field, enter the account number of the customer where the interest is to be
credited.
6. In the second field, delete F and enter P (Percentage).
7. In the third field, enter 100 i.e. 100 percent of the interest will be credited to the account
entered in the first field. Press F4.
8. System shall display the screen 17 again.
9. Press F4.
Note: If the customer wishes to credit interest in multiple accounts then, in the third field
enter the percentage of IO to be credited in first account. Press Down arrow on the
keyboard and follow the steps as mentioned above. User should also press Control+E on
PO (Principal Outflow) record and enter the repayment account i.e. the account where the
principal shall be credited on maturity of FD.
Important: If C details (IO & PO) are not captured for Special/Ordinary FD, system shall
credit the interest and principal deposit to Sundry Fixed Deposit account as and when
applicable.

Screen 18
G. HOW TO ENTER DEPOSIT TRANSACTION IN NEWLY OPENED FD?
Menu Option TM
After entering the FD account number, amount, part tran type, particulars etc, user needs to
press F4. System shall automatically bring screen 19.

Page 145 of 294

Screen 19
As the user is entering deposit transaction in PI (Principal Inflow) type of FD, system
automatically brings deposit additional screen with Flow Code as PI. User needs to press
F4 twice to accept the flow code. Enter the other part tran as usual.
Note:
1. System does not allow user to accept (i.e. F4) deposit additional details if the amount
entered in credit part transaction of FD is more than the amount entered in deposit
amount field in scheme details of FD account opening. System raises error Cum.
Instl.paid (
0.00) + tran amt exceeds deposit amount. User has to press F3 and
modify amount field of credit part tran of FD as desired.
H. HOW TO DEPOSIT PRINCIPAL BY CASH/TRANSFER IN FD DURING A/C OPENING?
Menu option OAAC
1. After entering G,S & F (Mandatory) details, press F4. Make sure that the cursor
appears in Enter option field.
2. Enter Option X (Transaction Details). Press F4. Screen 20 shall appear.

Screen 20
Page 146 of 294

3. Transaction creation during (O/V) Enter V in this field if transaction id is to be

generated (& verified) during a/c verification. Enter O if the transaction is to be
created after commiting the OAAC.
4. Type of Transaction - Case 1 Enter C (Cash).Press F4. Sstem shall automatically
generate transaction Dr. Cash and Cr. Deposit A/c (being opened). Press F4.
System shall come back to enter option field.
Type of Transaction - Case 2 Enter T (Transfer) & press F4. System shall try to create
CI (Customer Induced) type of transaction.
i.

Very Important - System may raise an error Script Error: Interst Cr. Account not
specified; as the system picks up this account for transferring funds to FD being
opened. This field is available on 2nd page of General Details, 4th from bottom of
left hand side of the screen.
Steps to enter Interest Cr. Account
Press F3 in the current screen (i.e. X option).
Enter option G. Press F4.
Press F6 to go to the next page.
Go to Interest Cr. Account field. Enter the account No. Make sure that the
sufficient balance is available in the account.
Press F4.
Follow the steps starting from point no. 1.

ii.

If the Interest Cr. Account is already mentioned in the conecerned field before
entering into X option, system shall display the transaction. Press F4 to accept
the transction, system shall come back to enter option field.

If in X option, user has entred V in the Transaction created during (O/V) field, then During
verification (OAACAU) of the account, user needs to follow the same steps as mentioned
from point no. 1; otherwise system will not create ( & will not post/verify) the transaction.
I. HOW TO CLOSE FDMB ON MATURITY?
SUGGESTED METHOD
Note - Please make sure that for every such customer who is to be exempted from TDS
bracket (customer has submitted form 15H), user needs to get into modify mode of CUMM,
general details, 4th page and enter TDS exempt end date (5th from bottom on left hand side
of the screen). The modification in CUMM has to be verified by other authorized official.
1. After the BOD of the branch, the Manager/Officer should run menu option FDMBINT
(Workflow). This workflow internally runs ACINT (Interest Run for Accounts) & TDSCALC
(TDS Calculation) processes for all FDMBs (i.e. all II Interest Inflow type of A/Cs) matured
till the BOD date.
System internally creates following transactions in verified state for successful Interest
Calculation and TDS deduction processes.
ACINT process passes following transaction for individual FDMBs
Dr. Interest paid/accrued on deposit (MBFD)
Cr. Sundry (Interest Before TDS)

Page 147 of 294

TDSCALC process passes following transaction for individual FDMBs (If the FDMB falls
under TDS bracket)
Dr. Sundry (Interest Before TDS)
Cr. Sundry Deposit TDS
Cr. FDMB A/c
TDSCALC process passes following transaction for individual FDMBs (If the FDMB does
not fall under TDS bracket)
Dr. Sundry (Interest Before TDS)
Cr. FDMB A/c
System generates OFTI post reports and keeps them in PR (Print Reports) of the user.
User can view these reports by getting into PR. User may note System Generated
transaction IDs for Interest calculated & TDS deducted.
As the ACINT process does not credit Interest to the FDMB, user will not find that entry in
account ledger of FDMB. But at the same time if the user wants to know how much interest
and TDS is calculated by the system, he can use ACLI menu option, enter the FDMB A/c,
press F4 and press Control+E (Explode) on Interest entry and using up/down arrow can
view interest & TDS amounts.
Important Note : System shall not allow the user to proceed for closure of current FD, until
all the pending operations are completed. Also, if the FD is frozen, lien is marked, any
transaction in FD in entered state, SI (standing Instruction) exists on FD etc. system shall
not allow user to close the FD.
2. Menu option TDCLS (TD Closure). This is a workflow, which internally runs CAAC (Close
an Account) followed by CAACAU (Verification of Closure of Account). This menu option
has to be run by officials having workclass officer or above. Screen 21 shows the view of
TDCLS.

Screen 21

Page 148 of 294

3. Clos Acct Number Enter 16 digit (short account number shall not be accepted by the
system)
4. Cash/Transfer Enter C for cash refund of maturity proceeds, else T if the maturity
proceeds are to be transferred to operative account like SF, CA etc. If the user enteres C
(Cash) in this field, then the system shall not allow the user to proceed if the total maturity
value is beyond the amount entered in cash exception dr. limit field of OAAC/ACM of FDMB
(e.g. 19,999.00).
5. Transfer Acct Num Only if T (Transfer) is entered in previous field, then enter the account
number where the maturity proceeds to be credited.
6. Sure to Start Y for actual run of TD closure.
7. Press F4. Wait till the progress indicator turns back to green.
8. System may display an alert box wherein the transaction ids are displayed.
9. If the transaction type is entered as C in the second field, system shall automatically
generate transactions of Dr. Sundry FD and Cr. Cash in Hand in India, which can be viewed
through FTI.
10. If the transaction type is entered as T in the second field, system shall automatically
generate transactions of Dr. FDMB and Cr. Operative a/c as entered in the third field.
ALTERNATIVE TO TDCLS The restriction of TDCLS is that it can be run by user having
workclass officer or above. Alternatively, CTO can invoke menu option CAAC to close the
FD and officer can verify closure of FD through CAACAU.
Note:
a. If the branch does not want to use FDMBINT for interest and TDS calculation on daily
basis. User (officer and above workclass) can straight away use TDCLS. This menu
option/workflow shall internally run ACINT, TDSCALC, CAAC & CAACAU processes.
b. If the branch does not want to use FDMBINT & TDCLS workflows, then for every FDMB
user has to use ACINT, TDSCALC, CAAC & CAACAU menu options one by one.
J. HOW TO RENEW FDMB?
Note - Please make sure that for every such customer who is to be exempted from TDS
bracket (customer has submitted form 15H), user needs to get into modify mode of CUMM,
general details, 4th page and enter TDS exempt end date (5th from bottom on left hand side
of the screen). The modification in CUMM has to be verified by other authorized official.
1. After the BOD of the branch, the Manager/Officer should run menu option FDMBINT
(Workflow). This workflow internally runs ACINT (Interest Run for Accounts) & TDSCALC
(TDS Calculation) processes for all FDMBs (i.e. all II Interest Inflow type of A/Cs) matured
till the BOD date.
System internally creates following transactions in verified state for successful Interest
Calculation and TDS deduction processes.
ACINT process passes following transaction for individual FDMBs
Dr. Interest paid/accrued on deposit (MBFD)
Cr. Sundry (Interest Before TDS)
TDSCALC process passes following transaction for individual FDMBs (If the FDMB falls
under TDS bracket)
Dr. Sundry (Interest Before TDS)
Cr. Sundry Deposit TDS
Cr. FDMB A/c
Page 149 of 294

TDSCALC process passes following transaction for individual FDMBs (If the FDMB does
not fall under TDS bracket)
Dr. Sundry (Interest Before TDS)
Cr. FDMB A/c
System generates OFTI post reports and keeps them in PR (Print Reports) of the user.
User can view these reports by getting into PR. User may note System Generated
transaction IDs for Interest calculated & TDS deducted.
As the ACINT process does not credit Interest to the FDMB, user will not find that entry in
account ledger of FDMB. But at the same time if the user wants to know how much interest
and TDS is calculated by the system, he can use ACLI menu option, enter the FDMB A/c,
press F4 and press Control+E (Explode) on Interest entry and using up/down arrow can
view interest & TDS amounts.
Important Note : System shall not allow the user to proceed for closure/renewal of current
FD, until all the pending operations are completed. Also, if the FD is frozen, lien is marked,
any transaction in FD in entered state, SI (standing Instruction) exists on FD etc. system
shall not allow user to close the FD.
2. Run workflow Menu Option RENTD (Renewal of TD). The limitation of this workflow is that
only officials having workclass of Officer and above can run it.

Screen 22
3. Account Num User must enter 16 digit A/c No. of FD being renewed.
4. Currency Code Automatically INR appears in this field. Press F4. Please wait until a new
screen appears on the computer.
5. Screen 23 shows the various values system brings for FD being renewed.
6. Scheme Code Enter the scheme code under which customer wishes to renew current FD.
Automatically the system brings FDMB in this field.
7. Renewal Amount System shall bring maturity amount of current FD.
8. Ren. Prd(mths) Enter renewal period in months.
9. Ren. Prd (days) Enter renewal period in days.
10. GL-Sub head code By default 10100 (i.e. Fixed Deposit) appears.
Page 150 of 294

11. Customer ID Cust_id of current FD holder appears.

THERE ARE THREE POSSIBILITIES OF CUSTOMER RENEWING CURRENT FD.
a. If the customer wishes to renew FD with the amount equal to maturity of current FD
i. Press F4. Wait until the progress indicator turns green.
ii. An alert window shall appear. Click on OK button.
iii. Press F4. Wait until the progress indicator turns green.
iv. An alert box shall appear. Please note the new FD No., maturity amount, date of
maturity & transaction ID and click on OK button.
v. User should check whether the transaction is in verified/posted state, using menu option
TM or TI.
vi. User can check ACLI of old and new FD to see that the balance is transaferred from old
to new FD.
b. If the customer wishes to renew FD with higher amount than the maturity of current
FD.
Renewal amount Modify the amount with which the customer wishes to renew FD.
CASE 1
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.

Extra Amt Pay: C/T Keep the field as it it i.e. C (Cash).

Press F4. Wait until an Alert box appears.
Click on OK button. Press F4. Wait until an Alrt Box appears.
Please note new FD No., maturity amount, maturity date & two transaction Ids
(starting with SD1 & D1).
v. Click on OK button.
vi. User should check whether the transactions are in verified/posted state, using menu
option TM or TI. Tran id starting with SD1 has details of Dr. Current FD and Cr. New
FD. Tran Id starting with D1 has details of voucher Dr. Cash and Cr. New FD.
vii. User can see ACLI of both the FDs to re-ensure the transactions.
CASE 2
i. Extra Amt Pay: C/T Modif the field to T (Transfer)
ii. Transfer Acct Num - Enter 16 digit a/c number from which customer wishes to
transfer extra amount.
iii. Instrument type Enter VC (Debit Voucher) or CHQ (Personal Cheque)
iv. Inst Alpha If Instrument type is entered as CHQ in the above field, then user must
enter alpha part of cheque in this field.
v. Inst Num. If Instrument type is entered as CHQ then user must enter printed number
of cheque.
vi. Inst. Date - If Instrument type is entered as CHQ then user must enter date of cheque.
vii. Press F4. Wait until an Alert box appears.
viii. Click on OK button. Press F4. Wait until an Alrt Box appears.
ix. Please note new FD No., maturity amount, maturity date. System may display two
transaction Ids (starting with SD1; & D1 if no exceptions are encountered by the
system).
x. Click on OK button. System may raise exceptions/warnings. If the user has sufficient
work class to accept these warnings/exceptions, he can press F4. Once the user
presses F4, system may display transation Id starting with D1, on the message bar.
xi. User should check whether the transactions are in verified/posted state, using menu
option TM or TI. Tran id starting with SD1 has details of Dr. Current FD and Cr. New
FD. Tran Id starting with D1 has details of voucher Dr. A/c entered in transfer A/c Num
field and Cr. New FD.
Page 151 of 294

xii. User can see ACLI of both the FDs to re-ensure the transactions.
c. If the customer wishes to renew FD with lesser amount than the maturity of current
FD.
i.

ii.

iii.
iv.
v.

Before invoking RENTD workflow, user shall invoke menu option ACM in modify
mode (function M)and use option C (Customer Instruction Details) and shall specify
operative A/c No. where the remaining amount (maturity amountt-renewal amount)
be credited.
The steps are discussed in paragraph F of this module. Except that the user
needs to press Control+E (Explode) on TO (Total Outflow). In the second field, user
needs to enter F (Fixed), in the third field enter 100 (i.e. 100 percent) and in the
fourth field, enter the amount (i.e. maturity less renewal).
Verify ACM.
Invoke RENTD workflow.
Modify Renewal Amount (even if user the forgets to modify renewal amount, system
shall renew the FD with maturity amount less the amount to be transferred to
operative A/c). Other steps are similar as discussed in above topics.

ALTERNATE METHOD FOR RENEWAL OF FD

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Ensure that Interest calculation and TDS deduction processes are over for FD to be
renewed, otherwise user can run FDMBINT or ACINT / INTRUN and TDSCALC menu
options.
User shall open a new FD A/c through OAAC in R (Renewal) mode by giving reference
of FD to be renewed.
Other user having sufficient workclass shall verify opening of new FD A/c though menu
option OAACAU.
User shall close current FD (which is to be renewed) though CAAC in R (Renewal)
mode. System shall automatically display new FD A/c No. in Repayment A/c field.
Other user having sufficient workclass shall verify closure of FD (which is to be
renewed) though menu option CAACAU. System shall automatically create necessary
transaction.
Check ACLI of both FDs to ensure proper renewal of FD.

H. PREMATURE CANCELLATION OF FDMB

1. Menu Option CAAC (Close an Account)
2. Function Z (Close). Press F4 twice. New screen shall appear. System shall not allow the
user to proceed for closure until all the pending operations are completed. Also, if the FD
is frozen, lien is marked, any transaction in FD in entered state, SI (standing Instruction)
exists on FD etc. system shall not allow user to close the FD.
3. Function Z (Close).
4. Withdrawn Amt System shall display principal amount. Press F4.
5. Closure Remarks User can enter closure remarks e.g. premature canc. Etc
6. Penel Intt for full period Enter Y if applicable else N.
7. Repayment A/c No Enter operative A/c of the customer, if he wishes to get maturity
proceeds credited to his operative a/c.
8. Add preferential to penel rate Enter Y if the user wishes to give preferential rate of intt.
as entered in OAAC/ACM (e.g. staff and senior citizens etc.) over and above the interest
rate applicable for premature cancellation of FD.
9. Close Option Press F10 to commit. Wait until the progress indicator turns back to green.
10. Please note all the transaction Ids.
11. Premature Closure of FD needs to be verified by other authorized user.
12. Menu option CAACAU
13. Function V (Verify). Press F4 twice.
Page 152 of 294

14. Close option Press F10 to commit.

15. The proceeds shall be credited by the system to Sundry (intt. Before TDS) A/c.
16. Menu Option TDSCALC (TDS Calculation)
17. Report to free text field e.g. user can enter his name.
18. Start A/c No. Enter FD No.
19. End A/c No Enter same FD No.
20. Adhoc Run Enter N for actual TDS deduction.
21. Press F4.
22. Fore/Background Enter F.
23. Print Required Enter N. Press F10. Wait until progress indicator turns green.
24. User can see ACLI of operative A/c to see proceeds of FD. User can press press
Control+E (Explode) on Repayment entry to see TDS amount, alternatively use TDSIP or
ACI (option 2) to see TDS details.
Note : If the repayment A/c No. is not given in OAAC/ACM/CAAC, then after TDSCALC
process, the system shall Dr. Sundry (Intt. Before TDS place holder 3171118) and Cr. Sundry
FD (place holder 3171106) for FD not having deducted TDS. For FDs having TDS deducted,
system shall Dr. Sundry (Intt. Before TDS place holder 3171118) and Cr. Sundry TDS (place
holder 3171108) & Cr. Sundry FD (place holder 3171106).
I. HOW TO OPEN ANUPAM DEPOSIT?
1. User shall use OAAC menu option to open Anupam FD under scheme code FDANU (for
geneal public) and FANUS (for staff members). Mandatory details are G, S & F. Please
change auto closure flag to Y available on 2nd page of scheme details. User can also
enter optional details like A (Related Party Details for joint A/c etc), X (Transaction details
for depositing principal amount transaction) as per requirement.
2. User shall open OD A/c using menu option OAAC under the scheme code ODAGN
(general public) and ODAST (for staff members).
3. Authorised official shall verify Anupam FD account using menu option OAACAU.
4. Authorised official shall verify Anupam OD A/c using menu option OAACAU.
5. User shall use menu option ACM in modify mode and get into C (Customer Inst) details to
enter OD A/c as repayment A/c.
6. Authorised official shall verify changes done in FD using menu option ACM.
7. User shall use menu option SRM to create security record for OD A/c, by margin and
marking lien on Anupam Deposit.
8. Authorized official shall verify SRM.
9. User shall use inquiry menu option ACCBAL for OD A/c and check whether proper
sanctioned limit and DP is available in the A/c.
10. User shall issue a check book to OD A/c using menu option ICHB.
11. Authorized official shall verify ICHB or ICHBAU.
ALTERNATE METHOD
a. IF THE CUSTOMER DOES NOT HAVE CUST_ID
1. User (having workclass officer and above) shall use workflow menu ANUDEP.

Page 153 of 294

Screen 23
Customer ID Nothing to be entered, as the customer is new.
Enter customer title, name, short name
Staff[Y/N]? Enter Y if the customer is staff, else keep it as N.
Employee ID If the above field is set to Y, then enter employee ID of the customer in this
field, if employee ID is not available in the list, user shall enter STAFF in this field, for ExStaff user shall enter STAFF.
6. Enter occupation, address, city, state, pin code. User cn F2 in occupation, city and state
for list.
7. Cash/Transfer Enter C, if the user wishes to deposit principal by cash.
8. Init Dep Amt Enter initial deposit amount with which customer wishes to open Anupam.
9. Trans from (A/c No.) Mandatory is user eteres T (Transfer) in Cash/Transfer field. Enter
operative A/c No. of customer form where the system shall debit principal.
10. Period (Months) Enter period of deposit in months.
11. (Days) Enter period od deposit in days, if applicable.
12. Scheme Code For general public, the scheme code is FDANU and for staff members its
FANUS.
13. Introducer Id If the introducer is customer if finacle branch, enter his/her cust_id,
otherwise leave the field as blank.
14. If the introducer is not customer of finacle branch, then enter his/her Title and Name.
15. Minor Enter Y is customer is minor.
16. Press F4.
17. The cursor shall appear in Type field of CUMM. Enter the code or select the same from
the list (F2). User shall enter other necessary details in CUMM if necessary or can press
F4.
18. Click on OK button.
19. System shall bring general details screen of OAAC for Anupam deposit. User shall enter
other details if necessary, or press F4.
20. System shall display an Alert box. Please note Anupam deposit A/c No., maturity date
and amount. Click on OK button.
21. The system shall bring general details screen of OAAC for OD A/c. Please delete Next
Int. Calc. Date Dr. and fill up other necessary details if any and press F4.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Page 154 of 294

22. An Alert box shall appear. Click on OK button.

23. Please delete the value in Purpose of Advance and select the necessary value from list
(F2). User shall also change/fill other necessary fields as these are important for proper
MIS generation. Press F4.
24. System shall display Customer ID, Anupam FD A/c No, OD A/c No. and FD Tran. ID.
Please note all the values. Press F3.
25. Authorised official shall verify the transaction through TM in Verify mode.
26. User shall check sanctioned limit of OD A/c, using menu option ACCBAL.
27. User shall perform other important activities as discussed in above topi like SRM, ACM,
ICHB etc. all the operations shall be verified by authorized officials.
b. IF THE CUSTOMER HAS CUSTOMER ID IN FINACLE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Invoke ANUDEP workflow.

Customer ID Enter cust_id of the customer.
Cash/Transfer Enter C for cash or T for transfer.
Init Dep Amt Enter initial deposit amount.
Tran from (A/c No.) If the user enters T in the Cash/Transfer field, then enter A/c No.
from where the amount is to be debitted and transferred to FD being opened.
Enter period of deposit in months and days in respective field.
Scheme Code Valid scheme codes are FDANU for general public or FANUS for staff
members.
Press F4.
Please follow from step number 19, as discussed section a.
c.

FURTHER DEPOSITS IN ANUPAM DEPOSIT

1. User can invoke workflow ANUDEP.

2. Please follow steps as discussed in section b above.
3. In this case, system shall not open a new OD A/c. Instead, system shall increase
sanctioned limit of existing Anupam OD A/c.
4. User shall check the same using menu option ACCBAL for Anupam OD A/c.
5. Alternatively, users shall follow steps 1,3,5,6,7,8,9 and (10 &11 optionally), as discussed
in main section of section I.
J. HOW TO WITHDRAW FUNDS FROM ANUPAM DEPOSIT (PART CLOSURE)
As per existing scheme, customer may withdraw any amount from Anupam deposits, in
multiple of Rs.1000/- before maturity without breaking the entire deposit and also without
loosing interest on remaining part of FD.
1. Invoke menu option SRM and modify unit value of security. Please check that the
changes in the screen are happening properly.
2. Authorized official shall verify SRM.
3. Invoke menu option CAAC. Function Z, enter a/c no., press F4. 2nd screen shall appear,
modify withdrawn Amt as per requirement (multiples of Rs.1000/-). Press F4. Please enter
Anupam OD A/c No. attached to the FD in Repayment A/c No. field. Press F10 to commit.
4. System shall credit Sundry (Intt. Before TDS) A/c with the amount entered in withdrawn
amt field+interest amount.
5. Authorized official shall verify the above operation thorugh menu option CAACAU.
6. The authorized official shall invoke menu option TDSCALC (TDS Calculation). Please
enter value in Report field, enter same Anupam FD A/c No. in Start A/c No. and End A/c
No. fields, Adhoc Run flag shall be made N. Press F4. Enter F in Fore/background, enter
N in Print Required and press F10. Please check OFTI post report (note transaction id on
4th page) and TDS success report in PR.
Page 155 of 294

7. This process shall debit Sundry (Intt. Before TDS) A/c and Credit Anupam OD A/c with
(withdrawn amt+interest)-TDS.
K. REFUND OF TDS
If the TDS is already deducted through menu option TDSCALC, and the same is not
remitted to Tax Authorities, user can refund the same using menu option RFTDS. User can
refund whole or part of TDS.

Screen 24
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Menu option RFTDS

Report To (Mandatory) Its a free text field. User can enter any text in this field.
Currency By default INR appears.
Refund Cust ID (Mandatory) Enter the same cust_id with which the deposit a/c was
opened.
Closed A/cs If FD is not already closed or renewed, user shall enter N in this field.
Tran Type If customer wishes TDS refund by cash, then user shall enter C (Cash), or
otherwise T (Transfer).
Press F4.
System shall display all the FDs falling in the criteria entered in the above screen.

Screen 25
Page 156 of 294

9. Sel By default Y appears in this field i.e. if customer wishes to get refund of TDS for this
FD, then user shall keep this flag as Y, else N.
10. Refund Amt System automatically displays amount to be refunded. If customer wishes
to get part of TDS, user shall modify this field.
11. Refund Acct. User can enter operative A/c (SF/CA/CC/OD) of customer where the TDS
refund is to be credited. This field is protected if the refund is to be made by cash.
12. If there are more than one FDs in which TDS has been deducted and customer wishes to
get refund in other FDs as well, then user shall press Down arrow on the keyboard, to go
to next FD.
13. Follow step 9 to 11.
14. Finally press F10.
15. Enter F in Fore/Background field, N in Print Required (if printer is not attached to the
computer) and press F10.
16. User shall get into menu option PR and view reports - Refund TDS, Failure Report for
TDS refund and OFTI Post Report. Please get into 4th page of OFTI post report and note
down tran_id. If the transaction is not posted/verified by system, user shall post/verify this
transaction through menu option TM. System creates a transaction of Dr. Sundry TDS
and Cr. Cash/Operative A/c of the customer.
17. User can check ACLI of operatibe A/c which was entered in Refund Acct field to confirm
whether the proceeds are credited by the system.
18. User can take print of refund voucher, through menu option VCHR.
Note Under no circumstances, user should try to refund TDS directly through TM
by debiting Sundry TDS.
L. REMIT TDS

Screen 26
Before getting into this menu option, user should check entries for a month in Sundry
TDS A/c using ACLI or ACLPOA menu options. User should also take print of TDSIP option

Page 157 of 294

No. 5 (TDS summary) for a month. User should then tally entries in ACLI (or ACLPOA) with
TDS summary report.
1. Report To (Mandatory) e.g. user can enter Manager
2. Enter the selection criteria.
3. If user wishes to remit the TDS deducted from all the FDs, the he shall not fill any criteria.
Enter Dates in respective fields, generally for a month.
4. Remit Optn (G/C/R) Enter G if TDS is to be remitted; enter C if TDS is remitted and user
wishes to capture challan No. etc.
5. Press F4.
6. System shall display all the FDs falling under the criteria entered.
7. Sel Enter Y to select FD for remitting TDS, else N.
8. Press down arrow on the key board and select (i.e. enter Y in Sel field) or deselect (i.e.
enter N in Sel field).
9. Press F10 to commit.
10. Fore/Background Enter F.
11. Print Required Enter N (if printer is not attached to computer). Press F10.
12. User shall get into menu option PR and view/print Remit TDS report. User shall tally the
figures with ACLPOA (or ACLI) of Sundry-TDS A/c.
13. User shall then manually pass the entry thorugh TM by debiting Sundry TDS A/c with
the grand total as printed in above report.
14. After getting acknowledgement from Tax Authorities, user shall invoke same menu option
i.e. RMTDS. In this case, user shall enter C in Remit option (G/C/R) field and enter
challan No. in Remit Details field.
M. HOW TO PRINT TDS CERTIFICATE,
Menu option TDSIP

Screen 27
1. Report Option - Enter 2.
2. Enter the criteria for selecting customers/accounts for printing TDS certificate. E.g. is user
wishes to print TDS certificate for a particular customer, he can enter cust_id in Cust_id
Page 158 of 294

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

from ad to fields. If user wishes to print TDS certificates of closed FDs as well, he shall
enter Y in Closed A/cs field etc.
Press F4.
System shall display all the accounts selected by it, falling under the criteria as entered by
the user, with the * on Left Hand Side of each FD.
User can include or exclude FD from TDS certificate by pressing Shift+F4.
Press F4.
Printer ID Local. Note Please make sure that the ILINKWEB is running in the
background. Ensure that the printer is ON.
Delete on Print Enter Y or N as per requirement. If the user enters N in this field, he can
view/print the same report through menu option PR.
Press F10 to commit.

N. HOW TO PRINT FDR?

Menu option DRP
PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT THE NECESSARY INVENTORY IS AVAILABLE AT
USERS LOCATION, OTHERWISE USE MENU OPTION IMC TO MOVE THE
INVENTORY AT USERS LOCATION.
1. Customer ID Enter customer ID, if user wishes to select all the FDs opened but not yet
printed for a particular customer.
2. From A/c No and To A/c No If user wishes to print a particular FDR, user shall enter the
same A/c No. of the FD in both the fields.

Screen 28
3. After entering the criteria, press F4.
4. System shall display all the FDs falling under the criteria with * appearing on left side of
each FD (i.e. the FDs are in selected mode for printing). User can use Shift+F4 to select
or deselect FD from printing criteria. Only FDs which have not been printed even once
shall be selected by the system.
5. Press F4.
6. Printer ID Local. Please make sure that the ILINKWEB is running in the background and
printer is attached to the computer and in OK status, also ensure that the required
inventory is available at users location.
7. Delete on print Y.
Page 159 of 294

8. Press F4. System shall display screen equivalent to Screen 29.

9. If the inventory is available at users location, then system shall display printed Srl. Num
(Alpha and number) in respective fields. Make sure that the same inventory is inserted
into the document printer.
10. Press F4. Please check whether the FDR is being properly printed.
11. After printing the FD, system shall seek confirmation Print OK. If the print is OK, user
shall ensure that Y is appearing in the field and press F10.
12. If the printing is not proper and FDR is not in a condition to insert again into document
printer, user shall enter D (Destroy Inventory) and press F4. System shall move the
inventory to destroy location and shall bring next inventory available at users location for
printing. Follow steps 9, 10 & 11 as per requirement.
13. If the printing is not proper and the FDR is reusable, user shall enter P (Print Again) and
press F10. Floow steps 9, 10, 11 & 12 as per requirement.

Screen 29
DUDRP & REDRP menu options can be used for duplicate FDR printing and reprinting
FDR respectively.
Menu Option DUDRP
1. The input screen is similar to menu option DRP.
2. Please enter the criteria as per requirement. Press F4.
3. System shall display all the FDs falling under the criteria entered. System shall display
only those FDs which have been printed at least once.
4. Select/deselect FDs for printing by pressing Shift+F4.
5. Press F4.
6. Please follow steps 6-13 as discussed above and as per requirement. Please enter
Issued in lieu original FD No._____________ reported lost in the Remarks Field.
7. User can invoke menu option ACM in modify/inquiry mode and in the enter option field
type K (Denominations details) and press F4. User shall check the status of old FDR as H
(History) and duplicate FDRs status as A (Active).

Page 160 of 294

O. HOW TO CHECK FOR UNPRINTED FDRs?

Before the day end i.e. ABH, user shall invoke menu option PENDDRP and enter dates in
related fields. Press F4. System shall display all the unprinted FDRs failing under the
selection criteria entered in the previous screen. User can print the FDRs as discussed in
above topics.
P. HOW TO TRANSFER DEPOSIT TO OVERDUE?
Menu option - TXOD (TRANSFER TO OVERDUE GL SUB-HEAD).
To be run by DBA / System Officer of the branch.
As regards, everyday concerned officials at the branch can run workflow FDMBINT or
menu option ACINT & TDSCALC for FDs maturing today.
TXOD option does not transfer matured deposits to overdue if the interest calculation is
not upto date and balance in FD is not equal to maturity amount.
If the FDs are matured and not closed/renewed during the day, the DBA shall transfer
such deposites to Overdue SGL using menu option TXOD.
The option changes GL Subhead of deposit to respective Overdue GL Subhead.
System shall also create transaction in verified state Dr. FD and Cr. Same FD. Please
check the report in menu option PR.
Q. REPORTS
Menu option ACDET (ACCOUNT BALANCE DETAILS)
E.g. User wishes to list all FDMBs maturing today.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Report To (Mandatory) Free text field.

Scheme Code From & To FDMB
Maturity Date From & To Enter the dates.
Press F4.
Enter the values in Fore/Background & Print Required and Press F10.
Wait until the progress indicator turns to green.
Quit from the menu option and invoke menu option PR and view/print the report.

E.g. User wishes to list all the fixed deposits (like FDMB, ordinary, special etc.) matured
and renewed as on BOD date.
1. Report To (Mandatory) Free text field. E.g. enter Manager.
2. GL Subhead From & To Press F2 and select GL subhead code for Fixed Deposit by
pressing Shift+F4, or enter 10100.
3. Close Date From & To Enter BOD date in both the fields.
4. Deposit Status Press F2 and select R (Renewal) by pressing Shift+F4. Or enter R.
5. Press F4.
6. Fore/Background Enter F.
7. Print Required Enter N. (Or Y if printer is attached to the computer)
8. Press F10.
9. Invoke menu option PR and view/print Account Details Report. This report shall list all
the FDs matured and renewed. But system shall not display A/c No. of renewed FD.

Page 161 of 294

User can generate various types of reports as per the criteria like A/c closed, lien marked,
amountwise, opened/matured/renewed between different dates, deposit period-wise (like
12 months, 24 months), FDs of a particular customer, spl category deposits (like blocked,
court order, tender money etc.), safe custody deposits etc.
ACDET may help Auditors to list all the fresh FDs opened between the dates.
1. Report To Free text field. E.g. Auditor.
2. Account open Date & To Enter the dates.
3. GL Subhead From & To Enter GL Subhead code as 10100 in both the fields.
4. Press F4.
5. Fore/Background F.
6. Print Required N. (If printer is attached, then enter Y).
7. Press F10.
8. Wait until progress indicator turns green.
9. Invoke menu option PR and view/print Account Details Report.
10. Please go to right hand side of every FD and check the value under the deposit status
(DS) column. Please count all the FDs having value under DS column as blank.
There are inquiry/report/MIS menu options related to FD/RDs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

PNBRPT Option No. 4 in MAIN MENU.

PNBREP Option No. 10. There are sub options related to FDs.
SDD Schemewise distribution of deposits.
RDD Ratewise distribution of deposits.
FDD Flow Amountwise distribution of deposits.
GDET General Deposits Details.
ACS Account Selection.
RELACI Related Accounts Lookup for Deposits. Generally used for finding
old/renewed references of FDs.
9. DEPINT Interest Calculator.
10. DEPMOD Deposit Modeling.
11. DN Due Notice. Can be effectively used to inform customers about maturity of their
FDs.
12. PLIST Pending Installments List.
13. IRRDEP Irregular Recurring Deposits.
14. TVSI Term Deposit Interest Slabs Inquiry.

Page 162 of 294

Prepared By Makarand B Kedare

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
CLEARING
OUTWARD CLEARING
A. OPEN ZONE
Before lodging the instruments, the concerned clearing incharge or any such official has
to open the Zone using menu option MCLZOH.
Menu option MCLZOH

Screen 1
1. Function O (Open). Or user can press F2 for the list and select O (Open Zone) function
by pressing Shift+F4.
2. Zone In the first field, enter the date in which user wishes to open the zone. (Zone can
be opened in future dates too.) In the second field, enter the Zone Code in which user
wishes to lodge the instruments or user can select zone code from the list. Different zone
codes have been created at the Data Centre for different purposes like MICR, High Value,
Interbank, LDD etc. Zone codes starting with EC are created for Extension Counters.
Some zones codes are created for Non-MICR instruments. Latency period means the
number of days taken to release the zone to shadow balance from the date of opening the
zone i.e. the balance credited in the account but can not be withdrawn as it is under
clearing (Unclear Balance). E.g. one day latency means if the zone is opened on
17.09.2003, then it shall be released to shadow balance on 18.09.2003 (if its a working
day). Press F4. If the zone is already in opened state, system shall display the message
Record already exists.
3. System shall display the zone details as per the zone code. System shall display the
Transaction ID for the zone, which may be noted for further references.
4. Press F10 to commit. Once the zone is opened, users can lodge instruments in the zone.

Page 163 of 294

B. LODGE INSTRUMENTS
Instruments can only be lodged when the zone is in open state.
Menu option OCTM (Outward Clearing Transaction Mainenance)
The screen is divided into 4 parts.
1st Function block. 2nd Credit voucher or pay-in-slip block, 3rd Instrument details block
and 4th status block.
There are four types of scenarios those can be handled in Finacle.

Single A/c credit with single instrument

Single A/c credit with multiple instruments
Multiple A/cs credit with single instrument.

1. Function Code A (Add).

2. Zone In the first field, enter zone date; and in the next field, enter the zone code.
Press F4. The cursor shall appear in Account Number field of credit voucher block.
IMPORTANT After pressing F4 key, system shall activate credit voucher block and at the
same time, it shall allot a Set Num (please see set num field below the function code field
in function block). User shall note set number on credit voucher, for further
references/verification.

Screen 2
3. Account Number (Mandatory) Enter the A/c No. to which the instrument is to be
credited.
4. Amount (Mandatory) Enter the amount by which the account is to be credited.
IMPORTANT In case of crediting of a single instrument to multiple accounts, user shall
press Down Arrow of the keyboard in the credit voucher block and the system shall bring a
new credit voucher block, follow the steps (3 & 4) as mentioned above. System shall not
Page 164 of 294

allow the user to press down arrow to enter another credit voucher, if it finds any error in the
a/c last entered, like A/c frozen, A/c closed etc.
5. After entering all the credit vouchers, Press F6 to go to Instrument Block. System shall
not allow the user to go to instrument block, if it finds any error in the a/c last entered,
like A/c frozen, A/c closed etc. At any point of time, if user wishes to go from instrument
block to pay-in-slip block (i.e. credit voucher block), he shall press F12.
6. Instrument No (Mandatory) Enter the Instrument No., which is available on the
instrument.
7. Sort Code (Mandatory) Enter nine digit sort code, which may be readily available on
the instrument, otherwise use can press F2 for the list and select combination of centre,
bank and branch code from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
8. Trn Code e.g. user can enter 10 for SF, 11 for CA, 13 for CC cheque etc. or can select
the same from the list.
9. Amount (Mandatory) Enter the cheque amount. System automatically displays cheque
amount equivalent to total of amounts of all credit vouchers. User can change amount
as needed.
10. Shadow Balance Code User can select it from the list. This may be useful to take
decision while allowing debits against clearing in the a/c.
11. If more than one cheque is to be lodged, user shall press down arrow of keyboard to
go to next record and follow steps 6 to 10. System allots Inst. Sl. No., displayed on
extreme left hand side of the record, which may be noted for further references.
12. After lodging all the instruments, user shall press F10 to commit/save the details. After
pressing F10, system shall check the total of all amounts of credit voucher(s) and total
of all amount(s) of instrument(s) and if it is not tallied, it shall display a message Part
tran amt & instrument amt not equal <COMMIT> to proceed else <QUIT>. If the user
again presses F10, the details shall be saved with unbalanced amounts. If user presses
F3, system shall allow user to enter/modify the details. The user shall check the details
in status block like number of credit vouchers and their total, number of instruments &
their total.
Note
i.
After pressing F10, system may display list of warnings/exceptions; user can press
F4 to save details with exceptions or can press F3 to quit. In case
ii.
If at any point of time, user wishes to go from instruments block to credit voucher
block, he shall press F12.
iii.
If user wishes to delete a particular entry in credit voucher block, he shall enter Y in
Del Flg.
iv.
If user wishes to delete a particular instrument record, he shall enter Y in Del field
(extreme right hand side of the record).
v.
After entering the relevant values in function block of OCTM and pressing F4,
system allots a set number before lodging the instruments. If the user quits from the
menu option OCTM without lodging any instrument, the set number remains
unutilized.
C. HOW TO MODIFY DETAILS OF ALREADY SAVED SET
Set details can be modified if it is not already verified.
Menu option OCTM
1.
2.
3.
4.

Function M (Modify)
Zone Enter date and zone code
Set Num Enter the set number which is to be modified. Press F4.
Modify the set details as discussed earlier and press F10 to commit.
Page 165 of 294

D. HOW TO DELETE A SET

Menu option OCTM. Set can be deleted if it is not already verified.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Function D (Delete)
Zone Enter date and zone code
Set Num Enter the set number which is to be deleted. Press F4.
Press F10 to commit. System shall display a warning Press <COMMIT> if you really
want to DELETE the set, else press <EXIT>. Press F10 to delete the set or press F3 to
quit without deleting the set.

E. HOW TO VERIFY INSTRUMENTS LODGED IN OUTWARD CLEARING

Menu option OCTM
1. Function V (Verify)
2. Zone Enter date and zone code.
3. Set Num Enter set number which is to be verified. Press F4. (Note - If the total of
amounts of credit voucher(s) and total of amounts of instrument(s) is not tallied/equal
while lodging the instruments, system shall not allow the user to proceed for verification
of set and display a message Part-tran and instrument amount are not equal for the
set.)
4. System shall display set details. If number of credit vouchers is more than one, user
shall use up/down arrow within the credit voucher block to scroll through different
accounts being credited.
5. If number of instruments is more than two, then the user shall press F6 to go to
instrument details block and use up/down arrow to view instrument details.
6. User shall press F10 to commit. System may display list of warnings/exceptions; if the
user is authorized to override the warnings/exceptions, he can press F4 to verify the set,
else can press F3 to quit without saving.
7. Follow the above process to verify all the sets.
Alternate method
User shall take print of a report of instruments lodged in the outward clearing. Physically
verify the details in sets like a/c no, amounts in pay in slip, inst. details etc. and then mass
verify all the sets.
Menu option - VCHL (Verification Check List)
This menu option may be used to generate a report of instruments lodged in outward
clearing.
1. Report to (Mandatory) Free text field. E.g enter Manager
2. Zone dt/code Enter date in the first field and zone code in the next field.
3. Set No. from and to If the user wishes to see details of all the sets, then the fields shall
be left blank, else user can enter set numbers in these fields.
4. Press F4. System shall bring Print Parameter Acceptance form. Enter F in
Fore/Background and N in Print Required (If printer is not physically connected to the
PC). Press F10.
5. View/print the report through menu option PR. Physically verify all the sets i.e. details of
credit vouchers and instruments.
Menu option OCTV (Clearing Transaction Verification)
Page 166 of 294

This menu option may be used to mass verify all the sets. All the fields are mandatory. This
menu option can only be used when the zone is in suspended state (discussed in
paragraph G).
1. Zone date/code Enter zone date and code respectively.
2. Start Set Num. Enter the set number from where the user wishes to pick up sets for
verification.
3. End Set Num - Enter the set number up to which the user wishes to pick up sets for
verification.
4. Press F10. System shall display status of each set.
Please note that the maker and checker concept is applicable in verification of outward
clearing, i.e. same user can not verify the instruments lodged by him. Please note that
system does not pass any voucher after the verification of instruments through OCTM or
OCTV.
In ACCBAL, the total amount of instruments lodged but not yet released to shadow balance
shall reflect under Float Balance.
F. HOW TO SEE STATUS OF SETS (VERIFIED / UNVERIFIED / UNTALLIED)?
This menu option may be used to get total view of the zone (like whether all the sets are
verified) before proceeding to further operations on the zone.
Menu Option IOCLS (Inquire on Clearing Transaction Sets)
1. Zone Set Id (mandatory) Automatically users SOL ID is displayed.
2. Zone Date/Code (mandatory) Enter zone date and zone code in the fields
respectively.
3. Start set Num Enter the set no. from where user wishes to see the list.
4. End set Num Enter the set num up to which user wishes to see the list. If no values
are entered in both the fields, system shall select all the sets for listing.
5. vfd status Enter Y if only verified sets are to be listed, N for unverified sets, should be
left blank entered for listing of verified and unverified sets together.
6. Tally sets Enter Y for listing tallied sets only, N for un tallied sets only, should be left
blank for listing both tallied and un tallied sets together.
7. If no values are entered in fields 3 to 6, system shall list all the sets.
8. Press F4. System shall display all the sets in ascending order of set num, along with
their status on extreme right side of the record. System shall not list unutilized/deleted
sets. System shall display (from left) set number, number of credit vouchers, sol id, total
amount of all credit vouchers, number of credit vouchers verified, total number of
instruments, total amount of all instruments, number of instruments verified and overall
status of the set. If total amount of credit vouchers and total amount of instruments is not
equal, then the system shall display status as un Tallied. User can press Control+E
(Explode) on individual record to see the set details.

Page 167 of 294

Screen 3
G. SUSPEND ZONE
Once all the cheques are lodged and verified, user shall suspend the zone. Once the zone
is suspended, no further addition/modification/deletion is allowed in the zone.
Menu option MCLZOH
1.
2.
3.
4.

Function S (Suspend)
Zone Enter date and zone code in the two fields respectively.
Press F4.
Press F10 to commit.

H. REVOKE SUSPENSION
As regards, once the zone is suspended, no addition/modification/deletion is allowed in the
zone. In case, user wishes to lodge instruments or modify/delete unverified sets in the
zone, he shall revoke suspension.
Menu option MCLZOH
1.
2.
3.
4.

Function V (Revoke Suspension)

Zone Enter date and zone code in the two fields respectively.
Press F4.
Press F10 to commit.

I. RELEASE SHADOW BALANCE

This is a mandatory process for outward clearing. The clearing incharge (preferably official
having work class of manager and above) shall invoke menu option MCLZOH and release
the zone to shadow balance. The zones like Interbank, local area or zones having zero
latency periods (like high value) shall be released on the same day of opening the zone.
Zones having 1 day latency period shall be released in the next day morning; e.g if the zone
is opened on 17.09.2003, then it should be released to shadow balance on 18.09.2003 (if
its a working day). Please ensure that ILINKWEB is running in the background,
otherwise the system shall terminate the session with fatal error, although the system shall
release the zone to shadow balance.
Menu option MCLZOH
1. Function R (Release Shadow Balance)
2. Zone Enter date and zone code in the two fields respectively.
Page 168 of 294

3. Press F4.
4. Press F10 to commit. System may raise warnings/exceptions, if the user is authorized to
override the same, then he shall press F4 to proceed.
System creates following transaction
Dr. Clearing Imprest A/c

Cr. Customer Account

As the system validates passing power while passing the entries, if the user having work
class below manager releases the zone to shadow balance, the system shall create the
transaction in Entered state,. The concerned official/manager needs to post/verify
transaction through menu option TM.
As per the present setup, system credits individual instrument amount to customers
account. To facilitate consolidated credit to customers account (i.e. total of all instruments),
user needs to lodge such instruments in LDD-C1, MICR-C0, MICR-C1 zones.
After releasing the zone to shadow balance, user can see that in the ledger of a customer
(e.g menu option ACLI), the total amount of instruments sent in outward clearing reflects
under Funds in Clearing head. In TM also, the total amount of instruments sent in outward
clearing shall reflect under Shadow Balance. In ACCBAL menu option, system shall
display such amount under Funds in Clearing.
J. MARK PENDING
The system has a provision to mark instruments as pending on account of some reasons
like the bank on which the instruments are drawn is not participating in the clearing etc.
User shall mark such instruments pending, before regularizing the zone.
E.g. If the zone having 1 day latency period is opened on 17.09.2003, the zone is to be
released to shadow balance on 18.09.2003 (if its a working day) & is to be regularized on
19.09.2003 (if its a working day). If the bank on which the instruments are drawn did not
participate in clearing on 18.09.2003, or any reason thereof like delay in clearing etc, and
as the zone is to be regularized 19.09.2003, then on 19.09.2003 before regularizing the
zone, the user shall mark such instruments as pending with the zone date as 17.09.2003.
Menu option MARKPEND

Screen 4
1. Zone Enter zone date and zone code in the two fields respectively.
2. Set# - If a particular set is to be marked pending, the same shall be entered.
3. Inst# - If a particular instrument is to be marked pending, the same shall be
entered.

Page 169 of 294

4. Bank Code If the instrument(s) sent to a particular bank are to be marked

pending, then enter the bank code. If the bank code is not known to the user, he
shall press F2 and select bank code by pressing Shift+F4.
5. After entering the criteria, press F4.
6. System shall list all the instruments falling under the criteria entered by the user.
User shall press Shift+F4 on every such record/instrument which has to be
marked as pending. Ensure that * sign appears on extreme left side of the record,
this means that the instrument is selected for marking as pending. To deselect
instrument from marking as pending, user shall press Shift+F4 and ensure that *
sign is not appearing on left side of the record.
7. Press F10 to commit. The user may need to do the above exercise for all the
zones for a particular Bank, as the users branch might have sent instruments
through other zones as well to the bank. To get information about the zones
through which instruments have been sent to the bank, user shall use menu
option OIQ, which is discussed in next part of this document.
K. REGULARIZE ZONE
This is a mandatory process for every outward clearing zone. Zone must be in Released to
Shadow Balance status before executing this option. As regards, after releasing the zone
to shadow balance, the total amount of instruments credited to customer accounts ledger is
called as Shadow Balance or Funds in Clearing or Unclear Balance. After running the
regularization option, system updates status of such entries to clear balance. Before
running this process, user shall ensure that outward rejects, if any, have been lodged in the
Non-MICR inward clearing zone for the day.
Menu option MCLZOH
1.
2.
3.
4.

Function G (Regularize Shadow Balance)

Zone Enter date and zone code in the two fields respectively.
Press F4.
Press F10 to commit.

After running this process, if the user inquires about the zone through menu option
MCLZOH, then he will see that the system has updated status of the Zone as C (Closed
Zone). If some instruments are marked as pending, then system shall display zone status
as Partially Regularized.
L. REVOKE PENDING
If some instruments in outward clearing zone have been marked as pending (menu option
MARKPEND), then the authorized official shall revoke pending of such instruments for
further action like regularizing the instruments or marking them as outward rejects in inward
clearing.
Menu option REVPEND. The steps are similar to menu option MARKPEND.
After revoking the pending, if the instruments have to be regularized, then the user shall
again run regularization process for the zone through which instruments were sent in
outward clearing.
M. HOW TO MODIFY/DELETE DETAILS IN SETS EVEN AFTER VERIFICATION OF
SETS & BEFORE RELEASING THE ZONE TO SHADOW BALANCE?
The system has a provision to modify/delete details in sets (like a/c no, amount, inst. No,
inst amount, sort code etc) which have been already verified. This should be done before
Page 170 of 294

releasing the zone to shadow balance. Following process shall be followed very
meticulously.
We will discuss this process through an example. There are set num 1 to 4 in the zone
MICR-04 opened in 17.09.2003 date. All the sets are in verified state. User needs to modify
details in set number 3 & 4.
1. If the zone is in suspended state, then the user has to revoke suspension
Menu option - MCLZOH function V (Revoke Suspension).
In our example zone is MICR-04 dated 17.09.2003.
2. Open a similar zone in future date
Menu option - MCLZOH function O (Open Zone).
In our example MICR-04 dated 18.09.2003 (say its a working day). This may not be
necessary if any equivalent zone is in open state in todays date.
3. Transfer those sets which need modification/deletion, from one zone to other.
Menu option - MCLZOH function T (Transfer Sets) or TROFSETS (Transfer of Sets).
In our example, we need to enter date as 17.09.2003 and zone code as MICR-04.
Press F4. The system shall display screen equivalent to the following screen.

Screen 5
Enter the set numbers in set num ranging from and to fields. Under Transfer to Zone
section, enter zone date and zone code to which the sets are to be transferred. In our
example values are 18.09.2003 & MICR-04 respectively. Press F10. The system shall
bring a new screen and shall display old set numbers (in our example 3 & 4) and new
set numbers allotted by it after transferring the sets to the other zone. Please note old
and new set numbers.
4. Retransfer the sets back to todays zone.
Menu option MCLZOH function T or TROFSETS.
In our example, we need to enter date as 18.09.2003 and zone code as MICR-04.
Press F4.
Enter new set numbers as allotted by the system earlier, in set num ranging from and
to. Under Transfer to Zone section, enter zone date and zone code to which the sets
are to be transferred. In our example values are 17.09.2003 & MICR-04 respectively.
Press F10. The system shall bring a new screen and shall display old set numbers and
new set numbers allotted by it after transferring the sets back to todays zone. Please
note new set numbers.

Page 171 of 294

5. The sets are brought back to todays date in entered state. Modify/delete set details as
per requirement using menu option OCTM. If the set details are modified, the same
have to be got verified by other authorized user.
N. INQUIRIES AND REPORTS
a. Menu option OIQ (Outward Clearing Instruments Inquiry)
Example 1 - Customer inquires about the fate/status of his instruments sent in local
clearing.
In our example, we will assume that the customer provides limited information like
the date on which he has presented the instrument and his account number. User
may enter date of clearing in Outward Clearing Zone Date (2nd from top) and
customers A/c No. in the last field. Press F4. The system shall all the records fitting
in the criteria entered by user. User can press Control+E (Explode) on a record to
know status (last field in the screen) of the instrument.
If the customer knows instrument num and bank, the user shall enter respective
values in Instrument Id and Bank code fields and press F4 to get result.
Example 2 One of the banks did not participate in the clearing and the user wants
to know all the zones through which instruments have been sent to the bank, so that
those instruments can be marked as pending before regularizing the zones.
In menu option OIQ, user needs to enter values in Outward Clearing zone Date and
Bank Code. Press F4. Note the zone codes. Use menu option MARKPEND to mark
pending the instrument as per the zone details noted.
Alternatively, user can use menu option OPQ (Outward Clg Part Tran Inquiry) for
inquiring status of instruments sent in outward clearing.
b. Menu option REJREP (Rejected Instruments Report/Advice)
This menu option may be used to send advices to the customers who have
presented instruments in Outward Clearing and are returned unpaid.

Screen 6

Page 172 of 294

1. Report To (mandatory) Free text field. E.g. enter Manager

2. Start Date (mandatory) Enter the date as per requirement. Generally date of
opening of outward clearing zone.
3. End Date (mandatory) Enter end date as per requirement. Generally date of
opening of outward clearing zone.
4. Zone Sol ID By default users sol id appears in this field.
5. Clg type Enter O for printing outward reject advices
6. Zone Date/Code (mandatory) Enter zone date and zone code in respective
fields.
7. Print Reqd Enter A (Advices). Press F4. System shall activate print parameter
acceptance form.
8. Fore/Background Enter F. Print Required Enter N (if printer is not attached to
PC). Press F10. System shall generate a report. Please wait until the progress
indicator turns back to green.
9. View/print the report through menu option PR.
This menu option can also be used to generate summary of returned instruments;
user shall enter R in Print Reqd field. Enter B in Print Reqd field if both advices and
summary are to be printed.
c. Menu option PNBRPT
All the daily reports of outward clearing can be generated through menu option
PNBRPT.
Lets take an example. User wishes to generate outward clearing register for a
zone.
1. Type PNBREP in menu option field and press enter key.
2. Main Menu shall appear on the screen.
3. Ensure that the cursor is blinking in the field available at the bottom of the Main
Menu list, if not, user shall click left button of mouse in the field. Type 12 (i.e.
Clearing). Press F4.
4. Various reports applicable for clearing are listed in the submenu.
5. User shall see which report is to be generated and enter its sl.no in the field and
press F4.
In our example, as the user wishes to generate outward clearing register for a
zone, he shall enter 2 in the field and press F4.
6. System may require some input values from the user. After entering the
required values, user shall press F4.
In our example, system shall ask service outlet code, the user shall enter six
digit service outlet code, say 417700 and press F4. System then shall ask
date(dd/mm/yyyy), user shall enter the date in the same format as the system
has displayed. In our example, say 17/09/2003 and press F4. System then
shall ask zone code. In our example say MICR-04 and press F4.
7. After accepting all the required values, system shall start the process of
generating the report. Please wait until the progress indicator turns back to green.
8. Once the report is generated, the progress indicator shall turn to green.
9. User can type QQ and press F4 to quit from PNBRPT menu option.
(Alternatively, he can type Q and press F4 to go back to main menu. If user
wishes to quit from main menu as well, then he shall type Q and press F4. The
system shall come out of PNBRPT.)
10. Please view/print the through menu option PR.

Page 173 of 294

O. GUIDELINES FOR EXTENSION COUNTERS

1. The procedure as discussed above for outward clearing is same for extension
counters.
2. Extension counters shall use zone codes starting with EC for lodging outward
clearing instruments.
3. As per the setup of zones starting with EC, system shall credit customers
account to the debit of Imprest A/c Parent Branch.
4. While marking outward reject through inward clearing, system shall debit
customers account to the credit of Imprest A/c Parent Branch.
5. The parent branch, on receipt of outward clearing instruments from Extension
counters, shall credit Imprest Accounts of respective extension counters and
credit Imprest Account of RCC/Clearing House through menu option TM. The
branch shall mention ECs name in particulars field of credit part tran. to
distinguish the transaction from others.
6. On receipt of outward rejects instruments, the parent branch shall debit imprest
account of respective extension counters and credit imprest account of
RCC/Clearing House and then send instruments to EC.
7. EC shall lodging outward reject, EC shall open Non-MICR inward clearing zone
starting/prefixed by EC.
Please refer to the IT Division, HO manual for further references.
INWARD CLEARING
A. OPEN ZONE
The authorized official shall open inward clearing zone using menu option MICZ. It may be
noted that all inward clearing zones must be closed on the day they are opened; otherwise
system shall not allow the user to do the day end of the day.
Menu option MICZ
1. Function O (Open Zone)
2. Zone Enter the zone code in the first field, or select it from the list. Zone codes
prefixed by EC are defined by data centre only for extension counters & branches shall
not open these zones for lodging inward clearing. Branches shall open MICR zones for
lodging MICR instruments. Branches shall open non-MICR zones for lodging outward
reject instruments i.e. instruments presented in outward clearing but returned unpaid. In
the field next to zone code, system automatically displays todays date (i.e. BOD date).
System does not allow to open inward clearing zones in future dates. Press F4. The
system shall activate zone details block.

Page 174 of 294

Screen 7
3. BA(R) Num/Date Enter the bar number as per the details available on the inward
clearing schedule. In the next field, enter the date of inward clearing schedule.
4. Tot Inst BAR Enter total number of instruments as listed in the inward clearing
schedule.
5. Tot Amt BAR Enter total amount as claimed by clearing house vide inward clearing
schedule.
6. Press F4. The cursor shall appear in the Option field. Press F10 to commit. Press F3 to
quit.
B. LODGE INSTRUMENTS
Menu option ICTM (Inward Clearing Transaction Maintenance)
1. Function A (Add)
2. Zone Enter the zone code or user can press F2 and select the zone code from the
list. System shall not allow the user to lodge instrument in a zone, if the zone is not in
open status. Press F4. System shall activate instrument details block.

Page 175 of 294

Screen 8
3. A/c Num Enter the A/c No. If the user presses F4 or F11, system shall display A/c
holders name, SOL id where the user is maintaining a/c and Available balance. This
may be useful for the user to take appropriate decision. (Signature viewing is discussed
in later part of this document.)
4. Instrument No. In case of customers cheque, enter printed serial number of the
cheque. (Lodgment of Pay/Cash Order in ICTM is discussed in later part of this
document.)
5. Instrument Amount Enter the amount.
6. Transaction Particulars (optional) Free text field. E.g. user can enter payee name.
7. Inst. Date (optional) User shall enter instrument date.
8. Press F4 or down arrow of keyboard to lodge next instrument.
9. If the user presses F4 key a. System may move up the current record and bring a blank record, if it does not
come across any warnings/exceptions/errors. User can lodge next instrument.
b. System may raise warnings/exceptions like Cheque Cautioned < Manager> if
the cheque is marked as cautioned in the system, Chq. Unusable <Manager> if
the cheque is marked as destroyed in the system, Chq. Not Issued <Manager> if
the cheque is not issued to the customer through the system etc. There are two
possibilities
i. If the user wishes to pass the instrument with warnings/exceptions, he can
press F4 to proceed. System shall move up the current record and bring a
blank record. User can lodge further instruments.
ii. If the user does not wish to pass the instrument, then user shall press F3
in the warnings/exceptions list and take appropriate action like returning
the instrument etc. Procedure to return the cheque is discussed in later
part of this document.
c. System shall not allow the user to press down arrow to lodge next instrument, if it
comes across any error in the account or instrument like Account is closed,
Chq. Stopped, Account Frozen, Chq. Already Passed etc. User shall press F3
in the exceptions list and take appropriate decision like returning the instrument
etc. Procedure to return the cheque is discussed in later part of this document.
10. If the user presses Down Arrow of the keyboard, and if the system comes across any
exception/warning, although the system shall move up current record and bring a blank
record, but at the same time it shall display a message Scheme level exceptions
exist. If at this stage user wishes to return the instrument, then he shall press Up
arrow of the keyboard to bring previous record and take necessary action. If the system
comes across any errors in the account or instrument, then it shall not move up the
current record and shall display a message Could not carve as there are scheme
errors.
11. Note There are three display fields at the bottom of the menu option Avail means the available balance in the account.
Carved means the amount marked as reserved on account of instruments lodged in
the inward clearing.
Deficit means if the account balance in the account is insufficient, then it shall display
shortfall amount.
12. After lodging all the instruments user shall press F10 to commit.
C. MARK INSTRUMENT AS RETURNED (INWARD REJECT)
If the instrument is drawn on us and is required to be returned due to the reasons like
instrument is marked as stopped, instrument is marked as cautioned, a/c is frozen,
insufficient available balance in the account etc., then the following steps may be followed
for marking the instrument as rejected.
Page 176 of 294

a. After entering the instrument details, if the user presses F4 and if the system
comes across any exception/error, it shall display the same on the computer. If
the instrument is to be returned, then the user shall press F3 and follow following
steps to mark the instrument as rejected.
b. After entering the instrument details, if the user presses down arrow and if the
system comes across any exception, it shall display a message Scheme level
exceptions exist and shall move up the current record. If the instrument is to
be returned, the user shall press up arrow to bring the record & press F4. The
system shall display a list of warnings/exceptions. If the instrument is to be
returned, the user shall press F3 and follow following steps to mark the
instrument as rejected.
c. After entering the instrument details, if the user presses down arrow & if the
system comes across any errors, it shall display a message Could not carve as
there are scheme errors and shall not move up the current record. User shall
press F4 & the system shall display a list of warnings/exceptions/errors. If the
instrument is to be returned, the user shall press F3 and follow following steps to
mark the instrument as rejected.

Screen 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Carving N (No)
Rejection Type I (Inward)
Press F6. Screen equivalent to Screen 10 shall appear on the desktop.
Inst. Alpha User may enter instruments alpha series code.
Pres Bk/Br Code (mandatory) In the first field, enter the presenting bank code (two
digit) & in the next field enter branch code (six digit i.e. combination of city & branch
code). Alternatively, user shall type three digit sort code of the bank in the first field and
enter city code (e.g. for Mumbai enter 400, Delhi enter 110 etc.) in the next field and
press F2. System shall list all the branches of the bank within the city code. Select the
branch code by pressing shift+F4.
6. Press F6. Screen equivalent to Screen 11 shall appear.
7. Reject Code1 (mandatory) Press F2 for list and select rejection code by pressing
shift+F4. If there are more than one reason to reject the instrument, then user shall
enter the same in next 4 fields.

Screen 10

Page 177 of 294

Screen 11
8. Press F4. System shall display inward clearing rejection charges screen as shown in
screen 12.
9. If the user wishes to change the charges, he can modify the same. Press F4.

Screen 12
10. Press F6. The system shall come back to instrument details screen of ICTM. User can
press down arrow of keyboard to lodge further instruments.
D. MARK INSTRUMENT AS RETURNED (OUTWARD REJECT)
Instruments presented by the branch in the outward clearing but return unpaid by the
drawee bank shall be marked as outward reject in the system. Marking of outward rejects
must be done before regularization of the outward clearing zone, through which the
instruments were lodged and presented to the clearing house.
1. Enter A/c No, instrument number & amount.
2. Carving N (No).
3. Rejection type O (Outward). Press F6. System shall display instrument details. Please
ensure that presenting bank and branch codes automatically appear in the field Pres
Bk/Br Code. Generally, it shall be same as 9 digit sort code printed on the instrument. If
these details are not automatically displayed by the system, then the user shall invoke
menu option OIQ and inquire about the lodgment of the instrument by entering zone
code, zone date and amount; user shall then note instrument details and lodge it
accordingly.
4. Press F6.
5. Reject Code 1 Press F2 and select the reject reason code by pressing Shift+F4.
6. Press F4. System shall display outward clearing returned charges and outward clearing
returned postage charges. User can change the charges if necessary.
7. Press F4 to accept these charges. Press F6. The system shall come back to lodgment
screen of ICTM. User can press down arrow of keyboard to lodge further instruments.
Page 178 of 294

E. GRANT INSTANT TOD

User can grant instant TOD while lodging the instrument through ICTM. Before granting
TOD, the user shall take formal sanction/permission from the competent authority.
1. Carving Y (Yes).
2. TOD? Y (Yes).

Screen 13
3. Press Control+E (Explode) in TOD field. Screen equivalent to screen 14 shall appear.
4. System shall display available amount in the account and advance amount i.e. TOD
amount.
5. Expiry date By default system shall display todays date (BOD date). This is the date
on which TOD is going to expire.
6. Penalty date By default system shall display todays date (BOD date). This is the date
from which system shall start charging penal interest on TOD bring granted.
7. System displays Advance type as S (Single) transaction and Advance category as C
(Clean).
8. Permitted by (mandatory) User shall enter Finacle user ID of the permitting
authority.
9. Remarks (optional) Enter remarks of TOD, if any.
10. Press F4. System shall come back to lodgment screen and move up the current record.

Screen 14
User shall take TOD register from the system before the Day End; menu option for printing
of TOD register is TODRP. The report/register shall be signed by the competent authority
and shall be preserved in era file.

Page 179 of 294

F. PAY ORDER
1. Account No Type PO.
2. Instrument No Enter running serial number of PO and press F11. System shall
automatically display all the particulars of pay order like amount, particulars, instrument
date etc.
3. Press F6.
4. Ref. Num (mandatory) Enter 9 digit printed number of the pay order, i.e. first 3 digit
alpha and next 6 digit numeric. System shall validate this number with Hot Items list
being updated centrally. Press down arrow key. The system shall move up the current
record.
5. If the pay order is stale or the system comes across any warning/exception, then it shall
display a message Scheme level warning/exception exists. User shall press up arrow
to bring the last record and press F4. If the pay order is stale, then it shall display
appropriate message. User then shall modify the account number to 3111511 and lodge
the pay order.
G. VALIDATION RUN
After lodging the instruments in inward clearing, the authorized official shall run validation
run process before verification of ICTM. The report generated through validation run
process shall be presented to the incumbent incharge for taking necessary action like
returning instruments, allowing TODs etc. After getting necessary instructions from the
incumbent, the user shall get into modify mode of ICTM and do necessary changes in the
instruments like marking returning, granting TODs etc.
Menu option MICZ
1. Function V (Validation Run)
2. Zone Enter zone code in the first field. Press F4. Ensure that template file is displayed
automatically by the system as iclg_val.mrt.
3. Press F4.
4. System shall display print parameter acceptance form. Enter F in Fore/Background and
N in print required (if printer is not physically connected). Press F10.
5. The report generated may be viewed / printed through menu option PR.
6. The report generated shall consist of status each instrument like insufficient avail
balance, chq. Not issued, chq stopped, already carved, instrument rejected etc. The
report shall help the user to take necessary action like marking instrument as rejected,
granting TOD in the account etc.
7. User then shall do the necessary modification (if necessary) in the instruments through
menu option ICTM using modify function.
H. VERIFICATION OF INWARD CLEARING
After lodging all the instruments and marking returning, granting TODs etc., the authorized
official shall verify the lodging.
Menu option ICTM
1. Function V (Verify)
2. Zone Enter zone code in the first field. Press F4. System shall display selection
criteria as shown in screen 15.

Page 180 of 294

Screen 15
3. User can enter criteria to list the instruments for verification like if he wishes to list/verify
only SF instruments, then he can enter 10 in start tran code and end tran code fields. If
the user wishes to verify only pay orders, then enter PO in start and end account fields.
4. Press F4.
5. System shall list all the instruments falling under the criteria entered as shown in Screen
16.
6. User can select or deselect instrument for verification by pressing Shift+F4.
7. Press F10 to commit. No financial transactions are passed by the system.
System allows user to modify instrument details even after verification. In that case, if the
zone is in suspended state, then the suspension has to be revoked, using menu option
MICZ & function R (revoke suspension). Then the user shall invoke ICTM in modify mode,
enter zone code, press F4, enter Y in Select Verified field and press F4.

Screen 16
I. CHECK ZONE STATISTICS BEFORE SUSPENDING THE ZONE
Before suspending the zone, the authorized official shall check the statistics of the zone by
invoking menu option MICZ.
Menu option MICZ
1.
2.
3.
4.

Function I (inquire)
Zone Enter zone code in the first field. Press F4.
Option S (Statistics). Press F4.
System shall display number of instruments lodged, total amount of instruments etc. on
the computer as shown in screen 17.
Page 181 of 294

5. After noting the figures of excess claim, short claim if any and other figures likes inward
reject, outward reject etc., user shall press F4 or F3 key to come back to option field.
6. The official shall check the figures with inward clearing schedule and the details entered
in the current zone like BAR amount, no. of instruments etc. If necessary, the user shall
modify the zone details by invoking same menu option using modify function or modify
instrument details using menu option ICTM in modify mode.

Screen 17
J. SUSPEND ZONE
After verification of the instruments through ICTM, the authorized official shall suspend the
zone. No further lodgment is allowed in the zone once it is suspended. If the user wishes to
lodge further instruments in suspended zone, the authorized official shall revoke
suspension first using menu option MICZ.
Menu option MICZ
1. Function S (Suspend)
2. Zone Enter zone code in the first field.
3. Press F4. System shall display zone details and the cursor shall appear in option field. If
BAR amount, no. of instruments etc. is not entered in the zone, system shall display a
message accordingly.
4. User can press F10. Or if the user wishes to enter total amount, no. of instruments etc.
as per the inward clearing schedule, he shall press F3 to abandon suspension of zone
and modify zone details through the same menu option, using modify function.
K. POST ZONE
After confirming zone statistics and doing necessary modifications in the zone, user shall
post the zone. The zone must be in suspended state before proceeding for posting the
zone. Posting means, the system shall pass necessary financial transactions. Ensure that
ILINKWEB is running in the background. Before proceeding for posting the zone, the user
shall segregate the instrument that are beyond his passing powers and shall handover the
same to next higher authority for passing the same. The next higher authority shall invoke
ICTM and shall satisfy himself about whether the instrument is to be passed or not.
Accordingly, he shall sign on the face of the instrument indicating that the instrument is
passed.
During posting the zone, system creates transactions like Dr. Customer/Office accounts
and Cr. Sundry Account Consolidated. If the number of instruments lodged in the zone is
Page 182 of 294

250 or more, system creates more than one transaction, each transaction having maximum
250 part trans. System does not check passing powers during posting the zone, but the
user initiating the posting has work class less than the minimum work class defined for
various schemes, the posting of the zone will fail and the transaction shall
Menu option MICZ
1. Function P (Post)
2. Zone Enter zone code in the first field. Press F4. The cursor shall appear in option
field. The official shall ensure that validation status is V COMPLETE.
3. Option Press F10.
4. Please wait until the progress indicator turns back to green. (Note - System shall not
allow the user to press F10 if inward clearing schedule details are entered in BAR
number/date, Tot inst BAR , Tot amt BAR fields.)
5. System shall display the status of transaction like whether the transaction posting is
failed or otherwise. Please note the transaction Id.
6. If the posting of transaction is failed, the user shall invoke menu option TM in modify
mode and post all the part trans.
7. While posting the transaction in TM, user may find that some of the part trans are in
verified state. System shall not post/verify part trans while posting the zone if comes
across any warning/exception/errors. User shall individually post all such unposted part
trans (within his passing powers). User shall check that after pressing F10 in TM, the
number of credit and debit entries in entered state shall be equal to number of credit &
debit entries in posted state.
L. CLOSE ZONE
Please note that all the inward clearing zones opened on todays date (BOD date) must be
closed on the same day; otherwise system shall not allow the DBA to do the Day End.
Before initiating the closing of zone, please ensure that the all the part trans initiated during
posting the zone are posted. ILINKWEB shall be running in the background.
Menu option MICZ
1. Function Z (Close)
2. Zone Enter zone code in the first field. Press F4. The cursor shall appear in option
field.
3. Option Press F10. Please wait until the progress indicator turns back to green.
This process shall debit sundry consolidated account and credit clearing imprest account.
The user shall check ledger of sundry consolidated account (3171117) for transaction and
can also press Control+E (Explode) to see other part tran details. The system shall create
transactions of debit to the accounts in which instruments have been returned (provided
that the charges are accepted during lodging the instruments), with the inward clearing
reject charges. System may not post the transactions in account of customers with the
inward clearing reject charges if the balance in the account if sufficient balance is not
available in the account.
The user can print all the vouchers like clearing imprest, sundry consolidated account,
suspense clearing, sundry clearing, customers account debit and inward clearing reject
charges etc. from the system, either by using menu option VCHR or TM in modify mode
and sub option Z in specify option field.

Page 183 of 294

M. SIGNATURE VIEWING
System allows viewing the signatures of customer while lodging the instruments through
ICTM as also while verifying instruments through ICTM.
After entering the account number in ICTM user shall press F9 to view the signature.
(While verifying the instruments through ICTM, user shall bring the cursor to the required
account number by pressing up/down arrow key & press F9). To quit from the signature,
user can press back button of finacle (not of Internet Explorer), available below the
progress indicator. Or alternatively, user can click left button of mouse in signature window,
press Alt+F4, click on transmit button and press F3 to quit from the signature window. While
viewing the signature, user shall check name of the account holder, mode of operation (if
available in signature window) etc. System shall not allow the user to view the deleted
signature if the user is not given the access to view it by DBA.
N. GUIDELINES FOR EXTENSION COUNTER (EC)
1. The parent branch, on receipt of inward clearing shall segregate the instruments drawn
on EC and shall physically total the amount of these instruments.
2. It shall then debit Imprest A/c of concerned EC with the total amount arrived and credit
Imprest A/c RCC/Clearing House.
3. It shall then send the instruments to EC.
4. EC shall lodge instruments in inward clearing zone prefixed by EC.
5. The system will debit customers/office accounts and credit the Imprest A/c of parent
branch.
O. INQUIRIES AND REPORTS
a. INQACHQ (Inquire Account number for a Cheque)
If the account number on the cheque is not clear, user can inquire about the account
number on the basis of cheque number, provided the cheque book is issued through
Finacle.
1. Cheq. Num Enter 6 digit printed serial number of the cheque.
2. Service Outlet Enter the six digit service outlet code of the issuing branch.
Press F4.
3. If the cheque book is issued to the customer through the system, it shall display
account number on extreme left of the list.
b. REJREP (Rejected Instruments Report/Advice)
User can generate advices to the customers intimating about returning of cheque
presented in inward clearing. Already discussed in paragraph N of outward clearing.
c. ACCBAL Components of Account Balance Inquiry)
User can enter customers account number and press F4. System shall display total
amount reserved by the system on account of inward clearing against the field System
Reserved Amount.
d. User can use ICTM, function I to inquire on instruments.
e. To inquire on statistics, transaction ID generated while posting the zone, user can use
MICZ. Function I, enter zone code, press F4 and in option field, enter S and press F4 to
see statistics. In option field type T and press F4 to see transaction ID; user can press
Control+E (Explode) on it to see individual part tran details.
Please refer to the IT Division, HO manual for further references.
Page 184 of 294

Prepared by: Makarand B Kedare

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
CASH CREDIT / OVERDRAFT ACCOUNTS
Cash Credit accounts are opened under scheme codes defined under scheme type CCA.
Likewise, Overdraft accounts are opened under scheme codes defined scheme type ODA.
A. CC/OD ACCOUNT OPENING
Mandatory information to be entered in CC/OD account opening is

G General Details
S Scheme Details
H Limit Details
V MIS Codes

Other information which is not mandatory but may be required to enter is

A Related party details (like joint a/c holder, Power of Attorney, Authorized Signatory,
Guarantor etc)

Menu option OAAC (Open an Account)

Screen 1
1. Function O (Open)
2. Customer Id Enter the customer id.
3. Scheme Code User can type CC in this field and press F2. System shall display a list of
valid scheme codes starting with CC characters. User can select the scheme code by
pressing Shift+F4. While selecting the scheme code, user shall also ensure the GL
Subhead Code under which he wishes to open the a/c. Alternatively, user can type scheme
code in this field; system shall automatically select GL Subhead code as 61100. In this
example, we will open an a/c under CCOTH scheme code. Press F4. System shall bring
General Details screen.

Page 185 of 294

Screen 2
GENERAL DETAILS
4. Acct Name - System shall automatically display customers name (as per the CUMM
details). System allows the user to change acct name, but during account verification,
system shall raise an exception Account Name Change Excp <Officer>.
5. Acct Short Name System shall automatically display customers short name (as per
CUMM details). System allows the user to change acct short name.
6. Mode of Operation (Mandatory) Press F2 and select appropriate code by pressing
Shift+F4.
7. Location Code - Press F2 and select appropriate code by pressing Shift+F4
8. Account Mgr System shall automatically display this field as per CUMM details. Finacle
user id of the user who is attached to this account can be selected from the list.
9. Cash Exception limit Dr. System automatically displays maximum amount in this field (as
set by the Data Centre for the scheme). This means, if the cash debit transaction in the a/c
being opened exceeds the limit as set in this field, system shall raise an exception. Same
concept is applicable for Cash Exception limit Cr., Clg. Exception Limit Dr./Cr & Xfer
Exception Limit Dr./Cr.
10. Remarks Free text field.
11. Collect Charges System automatically displays Y in this field; which means system shall
collect Ledger Folio and Account Maintenance Charges as and when applicable. User can
change it to N, if no charges are to be collected.
12. Turnover Details - System automatically displays Y in this field; which means system shall
generate turnover details for the account; this value should not be changed. A/c turnover
details can be inquired through menu option ACTI.
13. Relative to staff Change the value to Y if the customer is relative to any staff member.
14. Relative Staff Id If the above field is set to Y, then it is mandatory to enter staff id in this
field. User can press F2 and select staff id by pressing Shift+F4. This means, system shall
not allow the staff whose staff id is entered this field to enter any transaction in this account.
15. Press F6.

Page 186 of 294

Screen 3
16. Passbook/Statement (Mandatory) Enter P for Passbook, S for Statement or B for both PB
& Stmt.
17. Statement Frequency If S (Statement) or B (Both PB & Stmt) is entered in the above field,
then statement frequency is mandatory.
18. Despatch Mode If S or B value is entered in Passbook/Statement field, then this field is
mandatory. Valid values are
A - Post and Email
B Spl Delivery and Email
C Collect by person
D Courier & Email
P Only Post
Q Courier
S Special Delivery
19. Download to PBF Default value is N. If the ATM/Debit Card is to be issued for this a/c,
then Y shall be entered.
20. Pay Interest Default value is Y which should be retained (not to be changed to N); as
keeping this value Y will facilitate to refund interest in the account by the system due to any
reason like change of interest rate from backdate.
21. Collect Interest Default is Y, which shall not be changed.
22. Customer Pref. Interest (Cr) and Account Pref. Interest (Cr) should be left blank.
23. Account Pref. Interest (Dr) If the account preferential interest over or below is to be
charged, the same shall be entered in this field. E.g. If 2% is to be charged over and above
prevailing rate of interest as entered in Int. Rate Code field, then 2 may be entered in this
field; -2 may be entered in this field if 2% less is to be charged than the prevailing rate of
interest.
24. Interest Cr A/c Flag Default is S, which may not be changed.
25. Interest Dr A/c Flag (Mandatory) Generally S (Original A/c) itself i.e. interest shall be
debited from the a/c which is being opened.
26. Int. Rate Code (Mandatory) By default, system shall display ZERO as Int. Rate Code,
which shall be changed. User shall modify this field, which is discussed below. Lets
assume that we are opening a traders CC account to whom we are granting a limit for
working capital trading advances above Rs. 2 Lacs
a. Int. Rate Code Delete ZERO by pressing Control+F or delete key on keyboard.
b. Press F2.

Page 187 of 294

c. Interest Table Code Type WC and press F2. System shall display all the interest
table codes starting with WC.
d. Using Up/Down arrow key of keyboard go to WCTA interest table code. Press
Shift+F4 to select the code. Press F4.
e. System shall display various versions created by the Data Centre from time to time.
f. (Optional) To know actual rate of interest that the system would be charging in this
account, press Control+E on the version which user wishes to select for this a/c.
While selecting/exploring on the version, user shall ensure the start date from which
the interest table code is effective. Note the base int. pcnt if any.
g. Option Type D (Debit Slabs) and press F4.
h. Note the value appearing below Ind. Normal. Add this value in base int. pcnt to arrive
at the net interest that would be charged in the account being opened. Press F3
thrice.
i. The system shall come back to interest table version list. Select the proper version by
pressing Shift+F4.
27. After selecting proper Int. Rate Code, Press F4. System shall validate values entered in the
fields, as also it shall check that valid values are entered in mandatory fields and then the
cursor shall appear in Option Code field.
SCHEME DETAILS
28. Option Code Delete G and enter S (Scheme Details). Press F4.

Screen 4
29. Dr. Balance Limit Default value is 99999999999999.99, which should be retained.
30. Max. Allowable Limit Enter the amount of sanctioned limit. System shall not allow the
user to enter/modify amount in sanctioned limit (H details) field, more than the amount
entered in this field.
31. Credit File No. Enter credit file No. if any.
32. Debt Acknowledgement Date Enter the Date of last acknowledgement of debt (BC letter).
This date can also be filled up after the verification of account; to do so use the menu option
ACM.
33. Chqs Allowed Default value is Y. System shall not allow the user to issue cheque book in
the a/c, if N is entered in this field.
34. Charge for Cheque Issue Default value is Y, which shall not be changed.
35. Press F6 or F4.
36. A/c Health Code (Mandatory) Press F2 and select appropriate code by pressing Shift+F4.
37. Press F4. System shall bring the cursor to Option Code field.
Page 188 of 294

LIMIT DETAILS
38. Option Code Delete S and enter H (Limit History Details). Press F4.

Screen 5
39. Limit Level Interest Default value is N i.e. the system shall charge the interest as per the
Interest Rate Code entered in the G (General Details) option.
40. Sanction Limit Enter amount of sanctioned limit. Please note that system shall not
allow the user to enter amount more than the Max. Allowable Limit as entered in Scheme
Details. Press F4.
41. Sanction Date (mandatory) Enter the date of sanction of existing limit.
42. Expiry Date (mandatory) Enter the date of expiry of existing limit.
43. Penal Int. From Enter the number of months/days from the date of expiry of the limit after
which the system shall charge penal interest. If nothing is entered in these fields, system
shall charge penal interest from the date of expiry of the limit.
44. Document Date (mandatory) Enter the date of documentation in the account.
45. Review Date Enter the date of review of limit of this account, if any. This date must be at
least one day prior to the date of expiry of limit.
46. Security Description Enter the description of security in this account.
47. Remarks Free text field.
48. Sanction Level (Mandatory) Press F2 for list and select appropriate code by pressing
Shift+F4.
49. Sanction Auth (Mandatory) - Press F2 for list and select appropriate code by pressing
Shift+F4.
50. Sanction Ref# (Mandatory) Enter the sanction reference No.
51. Press F4.
52. Drawing Power Indicator (mandatory) Valid values are D Derived from Security, E
Equal to Sanction Limit, M Maintained, P Parent.
a. If D is entered in this field, then it becomes mandatory to attach security to this account
through the menu option SRM, otherwise the system shall always show DP as 0 (Zero).
b. If E is entered in this field, then system shall show DP as equal to Sanctioned Limit.
c. If M is entered in this field, then the user has to enter value of DP in the Drawing Power
field.
d. If P is entered in this field, then the system shall derive the DP from Limit Node. Please
refer to chapter on Limit Node Maintenance for creation of limit nodes/tree.
Page 189 of 294

53. Drawing Power % - This field is mandatory if DP Indicator is P (Parent).

54. Limit Id - This field is mandatory if DP Indicator is P (Parent).
55. Drawing Power In case the DP indicator is entered as M (Maintained), then the user shall
enter the amount of DP. In all other case, system shall derive the DP as per the DP
indicator.
56. DACC Limit Absolute Debit Against Clearing Credit limit is sanctioned as a part of the
main limit, if any. Same can be entered in absolute value in the first field and/or in
percentage term in the next field. If both Absolute and Percentage are entered, then the
system shall allow DACC limit from either of the limits, whichever is lower.
57. A/c Recalled (Mandatory) Valid values are Y or N.
58. Press F4. System shall validate the values and shall also check that whether the values in
mandatory fields have been entered. On success, it shall bring the cursor to Option Code
field.
MIS CODES
In all loan accounts, entering MIS details has been made mandatory. The quality of
reports/MIS is directly related to the details entered in this option. User shall meticulously enter
valid values in these fields.
59. Option Code Delete H and enter V (MIS Codes). Press F4.
60. In every field, the facility of list is available. User can press F2 for the list and select
appropriate code by pressing Shift+F4.

Screen 6
61. After entering appropriate codes in the concerned fields, user shall press F4. The system
shall bring the cursor to Option Code field.
62. Option Code We have so far entered G (General), S (Scheme), H (Limit) and V (MIS)
details. These details are mandatory for CC/OD a/c. User can press F10 to commit/save
account details. But, as the case may be, user may require to enter Authorized Signatory,
Power of Attorney, Guarantor, Joint A/c holders details while opening the account. These
details can be entered through option A (Related Party Details).
RELATED PARTY DETAILS
63. Option Code Delete V and enter A. Press F4.
64. The first screen displays details of Main Account Holder. To enter authorized signatory,
power attorney, joint account holders etc. details, press Down Arrow of keyboard.
65. Relation Type (Mandatory) Press F1 for help. The help displays various values for
relation codes. P (Power of Attorney), A (Authorised Signatory), L (letter of Authority), J
(Joint Holder), G (Guarantor) etc. Press Enter on OK button or click mouse on it. Enter the
value in this field.
Page 190 of 294

66. Relation Code Press F2 and select the code from the list by pressing Shift+F4.
67. Dispatch Mode If the account is enabled for statement, system gives user the option to
send the statement to related parties added through this option. Press F1 for help. Enter the
dispatch mode in this field.
68. Designation Code Press F2 for list and select the code by pressing Shift+F4.
69. Customer ID If the related party (joint A/c holder etc.) has a valid cust_id in finacle, enter
the same here. In that case other details of the party like address, city, pin code etc. need
not be entered.
70. Name (Mandatory) Enter name of the related party. If the cust_id is entered in the above
field, then the system automatically displays partys name in this field and does not allow to
modify.
71. If the cust_id of related party is not entered, Address, City, State, Country, Postal Code etc.
of the related party need to be filled in.
72. If user wishes to enter more related party details, press Down Arrow and follow the steps 65
to 71.
73. After entering all related party details, Press F4 to go to Enter option field.
74. If no other details are to be entered, then Press F10 to commit. System will display 16digit account number. Please note it, as it needs verification. Sometimes system may not
display all 16 digits account on the screen.
Account No. consists of following information. E.g. account no. generated by system is
4177008700008336.
417700
SOL id(6)

87
0000833
6
Product code(2)
Account No.(7) Check digit(1)

Check digit is also a part of account no. User need not remember all 16 digits. Whenever user
accesses this account, he can simply enter 878336, system will automatically expand it to 16
digits. This facility is provided only when user accesses customers accounts of users own
branch/SOL. User shall enter all 16 digits in account no. field for accounts of customers of
other branch/SOL.
B. VERIFICATION OF NEWLY OPENED A/C
Please note
4. The user who has opened the account through OAAC can not verify the account; as Maker
and Checker concept is applicable in Finacle.
5. During verification of account, no details can be changed, as all the fields are write
protected.
6. To modify account details of newly opened account (but not verified), use menu option
OAACAU function M (Modify).
Menu option OAACAU
1. Function V.
2. Temporary A/c No. Enter the A/C No which is to be verified. User need not enter all
16 digits of account; user can enter short account no. of the account to be verified. If
user forgot to note account no. after committing OAAC, user can retrieve it by
pressing F2 in this field; select the account to be verified by pressing Shift+F4.
3. Permanent A/c No. must not be entered. Press F4 to bring account details.
System shall display General Details of the account. Press F11 twice (Or click twice
on Transmit button) to visit next page. Similarly, visit the 3rd page. When the user is
in 3rd page, press F4 to go to option code field.
Page 191 of 294

4. Option Code type S and press F4 to visit scheme details. After verifying scheme
details, press F4 to come back to option code field.
5. Option Code Delete S and type H. Press F4 to visit limit details. Press F4 to see
DP Indicator/DACC limit details. Press F4 come back to option code field.
6. Option Code Delete H and type V. Press F4 to visit MIS details. After verifying MIS
codes, press F4 come back to option code field.
7. Option Code - delete V & type A. Press F4 to visit Related Party Details. Press
Up/Down arrow to scroll through the records. Press F4 to come back to option code
field.
8. Press F10 to commit.
Note : System may display warnings or/and exceptions. If the verifying official has sufficient
work class to override the exceptions, he can press F4. If the user presses F4 and accept,
then only system shall verify the a/c. If the user presses F3, system shall not verify the
account.
Some of the Exceptions raised by the system are
1. DFLT INT PARM CHNG <OFFICER> - If Interest rate code and/or Preferential Interest in
General Details (2nd Page) are changed/entered.
2. INTRODUCER NOT CUSTOMER <SPL. ASSTT.> - In customer ID details (menu option
CUMM), the introducer has not a valid customer id in finacle.
3. ACCOUNT NAME CHANGE EXCP (OFFICER) If name of the account has been changed
while opening the a/c, with respect to the name as entered in customer Id details.
4. OVERRIDE DEF. CHK <OFFICER> - System automatically displays values in Cash
exception limit (Dr/Cr), Clg. Exception Limit (Dr/Cr) & Xfer exception Limit (Dr/Cr) in General
Details, 1st page, as applicable to the scheme. If user changes all or any of the values in
these fields, system raises this exception.
C. FURTHER MODIFICATIONS IN CC/OD A/C
After the account is opened and subsequently verified, user shall use menu option ACM to
change any of the details in the a/c. The modifications done in the account shall be verified by
another authorized user using the same menu option i.e. ACM.
Please note that Interest Rate Code, Sanctioned Limit details and DP indicator, TOD details
can not be changed through menu option ACM.
D. ATTACH SECURITY TO AN ACCOUNT
After opening and verification of an account, user shall create/attach primary and collateral
securities to the account. Please refer to chapter on Security Register Maintenance (SRM).
E. CHECK THE CORRECTNESS OF SANCTION LIMIT AND DP
After verification of CC/OD a/c and attaching primary security to it, it is always advisable to
check sanctioned limit and DP through menu option ACCBAL.
In ACCBAL menu option, enter A/c No. & press F4. System shall display all the details like
Sanc. Limit, DP, Available Amt, Secured & Clean limits, lien, overdue liability etc of the account
as on the time user invokes this menu option.

Page 192 of 294

Screen 7
F. ISSUE OF CHEQUE BOOK
After opening & verification of an account, user shall issue cheque book (if applicable) to
the account holder, through the menu option ICHB. Please refer to chapter on Cheque Book
Maintenance.
G. CHANGE OF INTEREST RATE
During the migration of CC/OD accounts from TBA/PBA packages to CBS, the system places
the rate of interest applicable in the account in Account Pref. Interest (Dr) field & for all such
migrated accounts, the value in Int. Rate Code field is ZERO. This means if user does not
change interest rate, then the account shall always carry absolute rate of interest and any
changes in PLR/BPLR or any other interest component done by the Date Centre shall not be
automatically made applicable in all such accounts by the system.
Therefore, it becomes mandatory for the branch to change Int. Rate Code & Account Pref.
Interest (Dr) of all such accounts. The menu option to change Interest Rate Code and
Account/Customer Pref. Interest details is INTTM. Change of interest rate facility is not
available in menu option ACM.
Also, after opening and subsequent verification of an account, if the user wishes to change
interest rate in the a/c, he shall use menu option INTTM.

Screen 8
Page 193 of 294

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Function M (Modify)
A/c / Bill / Disb A (Account)
A/c No / Bills / Disb Id Enter A/c No.
Press F4. System shall display existing interest parameters.
Interest Table Code Enter appropriate interest table code. Please refer to point No. 26 of
A/c opening.
6. Customer Preferential Interest (Cr) and Account Preferential Interest (Cr) Not applicable
for CC/OD A/c. Values in these fields shall be 0 (zero).
7. Account Preferential Interest (Dr) If any preferential interest over and above the prevailing
rate of interest is to be charged, then enter the same in this field. If any concession is to be
given, then enter the value preceded with minus (- sign).
8. Is Interest Pegged By default, system displays N in this field, which means that as and
when new version of interest rate code is released the Data Centre, the same shall be
automatically made applicable in this account.
9. Start Date Enter the date from which the above mentioned interest rate shall be
applicable.
10. End Date Enter the date up to which the above mentioned interest rate shall be
applicable.
Multiple interest rates with different start/end dates can be entered in an account. User shall
press Down Arrow of keyboard to add next interest record.
Another authorized user shall verify the modifications done in INTTM, using the same
menu option i.e. INTTM, Function V.
H. TRANSACTION IN CC/OD A/C
Cash & Transfer transactions in CC/OD A/c shall be entered through the menu option TM.
Inward Clearing related transactions shall be entered through menu option ICTM. Outward
Clearing related transactions shall be entered through menu option OCTM. Please refer to
related chapters for all these type of transactions.
I. GRANTING OF TOD THROUGH TM
This has already been discussed in the section H & I of chapter on TM (Transaction Maint.).
We will discuss the same in brief in this section.
Menu option - TM
Lets assume that the user is debiting the a/c either by cash or by transfer. After entering the
transaction particulars like A/c No, Amt, Part tran type, transaction particulars, instrument type,
user shall press F4. The system shall display Eff. Avail. Amt on the right-bottom side of the
screen. By comparing the transaction amount and Eff. Avail. Amt, user can make out that
whether there is a shortfall of any amount in the a/c.
If there is a shortfall in the account and if the user wants to grant instant TOD in the a/c for this
particular transaction, he shall type N (Instant TOD Details) in Specify option field and press
F4. The system shall display Instant TOD details screen. System shall display TOD amount
against the display field Advance Amount. User shall not change Expiry & Penalty date. In the
Permitted By field, user shall enter (or select from the list) finacle user id of the official who
has granted this Instant TOD. Press F4.

Page 194 of 294

Screen 9
J. GRANTING OF TOD IN INWARD CLEARING
After entering instrument details, user shall change TOD? Flag to Y and press Control+E.
System shall display the same screen as shown above. In the Permitted by field, user shall
enter finacle user Id of the officials who has permitted instant TOD in this account for this
transaction. Press F4.
The total of Instant TODs granted through various menu options are called as Event based
TODs and total amount of such TODs can be seen through menu option ACCBAL against the
field Overdue Liab. It is mandatory for the branch to take TOD register before the Day End,
through the menu option TODRP (TOD Register Printing). Details of individual TODs can be
inquired through menu options ACTODM, TODM or ACTODI using function I (Inquire).
K. GRANTING OF SPECIFIC TOD OR ADHOC LIMIT IN CC/OD A/C
TODs for future dates can be granted in an A/c using menu options ACTODM or TODM.

Screen 10
1. Function M (Modify)
2. A/c No. Enter A/c No. in which TOD (adhoc limit)is to be granted. Press F4.

Page 195 of 294

3. System shall display earlier TODs (if any) granted in this a/c. Press F4. The cursor shall
appear in Option field.
4. Option Type A (Add). Press F4. System shall display TOD details screen.

Screen 11
5. Grant Date Enter the date on which TOD (adhoc limit) has been granted.
6. Advance Amount Enter the amount of TOD (adhoc limit).
7. TOD level Int Flag Default is N, which should not be changed so that the system shall
calculate A/c level interest. Press F4.The cursor shall appear in next block.
8. Expiry Date Enter the date up to which this TOD (or adhoc limit) is available in the
account. If the TOD (or adhoc limit) is not used before this date, it shall expire
automatically.
9. Penalty Date System automatically displays grant date in this field, which need not be
changed so as to allow the system to apply penal interest from the date of granting this
TOD (or adhoc limit).
10. Advance Type Enter S for granting TOD for Single transaction or A for granting Adhoc
limit.
11. Advance Catg Enter N (i.e. secured) if the TOD (or adhoc limit) is within the available DP
or enter C for clean TOD (or adhoc limit).
12. Normal Int. and Penal Int fields are protected if the TOD level Int Flag is N. If TOD level int.
Flag is set to Y, then values in these fields need to be entered.
13. Permitted By Enter the finacle user_id of the official who has permitted this TOD (or
adhoc limit).
14. Remarks Enter remarks if any. Press F4. The cursor shall appear in option field.
15. Option Press F10 to commit.
Granting of TOD (or adhoc limit) shall be verified by another authorized user.
Menu option - ACTODMAU or TODM
1. Function V (Verify).
2. A/c No Enter A/c No. Press F4. System shall display all the TODs (adhoc limits) granted
but not yet verified.
3. Press F4. The cursor shall appear in option field.
4. Option To ensure that the TOD details have been properly entered, enter I (Inquire) in this
field and press F4. After verifying the TOD details, press F3.
5. Option Press F10 to commit verification.

Page 196 of 294

Branch shall take all the necessary report related to TODs on day to day basis, through menu
option TODRP (TOD Register Printing).
It is always advisable to check that whether the Eff. Avail. Bal has been increased accordingly
after the granting of TOD (Adhoc limit). This can be checked through menu option ACCBAL.
Lets analyze the following ACCBAL screen.

Screen 12
We can see that an adhoc limit of Rs. 25,000/- has been granted in this account. This adhoc
limit is reflecting under Secured Limits, because while granting this adhoc limit through
ACTODM/TODM, user had entered N (secured) in Advance Catg field. As also, the Eff. Avail.
Amt is still 0.00. This is because although the adhoc limit (secured) has been granted but it is
beyond the DP. If the DP is being derived from security, then the SRM details need to be
added / modified accordingly to make the sufficient DP available in this account to
accommodate this adhoc limit. Had this adhoc limit been granted as Clean, it would have
reflected under Clean Limits in ACCBAL and the Eff. Avail. Amt. would have got included
Rs.25,000/-, without adding/modifying SRM details.
Conclusion
1. If the TOD (adhoc limit) is granted as N (Secured), it shall reflect under Secured limit in
ACCBAL. If the account is deriving DP from SRM, then to make this TOD (adhoc limit)
effective SRM record must be added/modified, otherwise Eff. Avail. Amt shall not include
this TOD (adhoc limit).
2. If the TOD (adhoc limit) is granted as C (Clean), it shall reflect under Clean limit in
ACCBAL. Even though if the account is deriving DP from SRM, Eff. Avail. Amt shall
automatically include this TOD (adhoc limit) even without adding/modifying SRM details.
L. RENEWAL/ENHANCEMENT/REDUCTION OF SANCTIONED LIMIT
In CC/OD accounts, modifications in sanctioned limit for an account need to be done at the
time of renewal/review or enhancement/reduction in sanctioned limit. Menu option to do such
changes in Sanction Limits is done through the menu option ACLHM (Account Limit History
Maintenance). As also, after opening and subsequent verification of CC/OD a/c, if user comes
to know that the sanctioned limit and/or DP Indicator were not properly entered, then he can
use ACLHM menu option to modify sanctioned limit details.
Page 197 of 294

If the limit is to be Enhanced i.e. if the new sanctioned limit is more than the current
sanctioned limit, then before invoking menu option ACLHM, user shall modify the value in
Max. Allowable Limit field in the account of which the limit is to be enhanced.
Menu option ACM
1. Function M (Modify)
2. A/c No Enter A/c No. Press F4.
3. Enter Option Type S (Scheme Details). Press F4.
4. Max. Allowable Limit Enter the amount equal to the enhanced sanctioned
limit. Press F4.
5. Press F10 to commit.
Another authorized user shall verify these modifications done in the account, using the same
menu option i.e. ACM, function V, enter a/c no, press F4, check whether the Max.
Allowable Limit is properly entered, press F10 to commit.
After completing the above exercise (applicable for enhancement of sanctioned limit), user
shall invoke menu option ACLHM for enhancing the sanctioned limit.

Screen 13
1. Function - M (Modify)
2. A/c No. Enter A/c No.
3. Operation S (Sanction Limit). Press F4. The system shall display all the sanctioned limits
available in the A/c. Using Up/Down arrow key go to the required sanctioned limit record.
4. Option Type M (Modify). Press F4.

Page 198 of 294

Screen 14
5.
6.
7.
8.

Applicable Date Enter the date from which the modified limit shall be applicable.
Sanction Limit Enter the new sanctioned limit.
Limit Level Interest Default value is N, which shall not be changed.
Supercede? This is a protected field in modification mode. If user uses A (Add) or C
(Copy) function, then this field automatically gets activated; if user enters Y in this field, then
the previous limit, if any, get superceded by the new sanctioned limit.
9. Press F4. System may display a message Sanction Limit exceeds the maximum allowable
limit specified for this account & shall not proceed to next block, if the above exercise
(modification of max. allowable limit field for limit enhancement) as discussed in the
beginning of this topic is not done before invoking this menu option.
10. Enter the details as applicable in appropriate fields. Please refer to Limit Details section of
A/c opening of this chapter.
11. After doing necessary modifications, press F4. The cursor shall appear in option field.
Press F10 to commit.
The addition/modification done through ACLHM shall be verified by another authorized
user using either the menu option ACLHMAU or ACLHM and Function V.
M. CHANGE OF DP INDICATOR / DACC LIMIT / A/C RECALLED
Lets take an example. The account is deriving the DP from the security attached to it. That is,
in the a/c, the DP indicator in H (Limit Details) is set to the D (Derived). As regards, in this case
SRM record must be created for this account to make the DP available.
Now, the party wants that the DP be derived from the corporate limit set for it and not from the
security. To make such facility in this account, user needs to change the DP indicator from D
(Derived) to P (Parent), provided the limit tree has already been created for the customer. This
change can not be done through menu option ACM (Customer Account Maintenance).
Menu option ACLHM (Account Limit History Maintenance)
1. Function M (Modify)
2. A/c No Enter A/c No. of which DP indicator is to be changed.
3. Operation D (Drawing Power /DACC limits/Recall Flag). Press F4.

Page 199 of 294

Screen 15
4. Option M (Modify). Press F4. The system shall display DP and DACC details screen.

Screen 16
5. Applicable Date Enter the date from which the DP shall be made effective in this account.
System accepts any date <=todays (BOD) date. Press F4.
6. Drawing Power Indicator Change the DP indicator as the case may be. Valid DP
indicators are D (Derived), E (Equal), M (Maintained) & P (Parent).
7. If the DP indicator is changed to P (parent), then Drawing Power% shall be entered
accordingly & Limit Id shall be entered.
8. If the DP indicator is changed to M (Maintained), then Drawing Power shall be entered. In
all other cases, (i.e. D, E & P), system shall automatically derive the DP.
9. Press F4. The cursor shall appear in option field.
10. Option Press F10 to commit.
Another authorized user shall verify the changes done as above through menu option
ACLHMAU or ACLHM, function V.
In the similar way, the same process shall be followed to change DACC limit or recalling the
A/c. The changes done in ACLHM shall be verified by another authorized user to bring them
into effect.

Page 200 of 294

N. ACCOUNT TURNOVER INQUIRY

User may like to see the turnover details of CC Account before taking further decisions. The
menu option to inquire the same is ACTI (Account Turnover Inquiry). System shall allow to
inquire about turnover details only if the Turnover details flag is set to Y in General Details (1st
page). If it is not set to Y while opening the account, user can change it through menu option
ACM.
Menu option ACTI

Screen 17
1. A/c No Enter the A/c No.
2. Start Date Enter the date from which user wishes to see turnover details.
3. End Date - Enter the date up to which user wishes to see turnover details. If the user
wishes to see the turnover details from the date of opening (or the date of migration) till
date, both the date fields shall be left blank.
4. Press F4. System shall display month-wise turnover details in the account.
5. User shall press Control+E (Explode) on a record of which he wishes to see more details.
6. System shall display Credit & Debit details of the account for the selected period. These
details include total balances, total days, Avg. Balances, highest balances, minimum
balances, total number of transactions, total transaction amounts, Interest accruals, TOD
details, Inward & Outward clearing details along with returning etc.

Screen 18
Page 201 of 294

O. INTEREST APPLICATION IN CC/OD

In CC/OD accounts, interest application as and when required is done at Data Centre as a part
of Batch job. But in certain cases, it may be required to apply interest in an individual account
by the branch/SOL. User shall use menu option INTRUN (Interest Run for Individual Account)
or ACINT (Interest Run for Accounts).
1. Currency Code Enter the currency code of the account. User can select the code from
the list.
2. Account Number User shall enter account number in 16 digits.
3. From Date Enter the date from which the interest is to be applied/calculated. The valid
date formats are dd/mm/yyyy, dd.mm.yyyyy or dd-mm-yyyy.
4. To Date System shall automatically display todays (BOD) date.
5. Value Date for Trans - System shall automatically display todays (BOD) date.
6. Post Transaction? Enter Y if the system shall automatically post the transaction; enter N
for trial run.
7. Freq. Based Int Run Enter N.
8. Dr./Cr. Interest Enter D (Debit).
9. Adhoc mode Enter I for Interest Recalculation, or A (Adhoc) is actual interest calculation
is not to be done.
10. Report to (mandatory) Free Text field.
11. Press F4. The system shall display another screen. Press F4. The system shall display
print parameter acceptance form.
12. Fore/Background Enter F.
13. Print Reqd Enter N if printer is not physically connected to the computer. Press F10 to
commit.
14. Please check the interest calculation report through menu option PR.
P. CLOSURE OF CC/OD A/C
a.

Ensure that the Pay Interest flag is N in the account.

Menu option - ACM

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
b.

Function M (Modify)
A/c No. Enter A/c No. Press F4.
Enter Option Enter 0 (zero) i.e. General Details. Press F4. Press F6.
Pay Interest Delete Y and enter N. Press F4.
Enter Option Press F10 to commit.
Another authorized user shall verification this change through same menu option.
Ensure that all the securities are deleted through menu option SRM.

Menu option SRM

1. Function M (Modify)
2. Linkage type A (Account). Press F4.
3. A/c No. Enter A/c No. Press F4. System shall display all the securities attached to
the account.
4. Press Shift+F4 to select the security record to be deleted. System shall display
security details & the cursor shall appear in Enter Option field.
5. Enter Option Enter D (Delete), press F4 and then Press F10.
6. Follow above steps if more than one security is attached to the account.
7. Another authorized user shall verify deletion of securities through SRM.
Page 202 of 294

c. Ensure that there are no Standing Instructions pending/outstanding on the account.

Menu option - SII (Standing Instructions Inquiry).
d. Ensure that there are no transactions in entered (but not posted/verified) state in the
account. Menu option FTI (Financial Transactions Inquiry).
e. Ensure that the cheque book(s) issued in the account are destroyed. Menu option
CHBM (Cheque Book Maintenance).
f. COLLECTION OF PENDING CHARGES AS A/C CLOSURE PROCESS

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Menu option CACC (Closure of Account Charge Collection). Before invoking this
menu option, please check that sufficient balance is available in the account to debit
the charges.
Function Z (Account Close)
Acct Number Enter A/c No.
Trial / Actual A (Actual). Press F4.
The system shall display a list of charges to be collected during closure of the
account. Press F10 to commit.
Another authorized user shall verify these charges collection through the same menu
option i.e. CACC, function-V.

Screen 19
6. While verifying (after pressing F10) the CACC, system shall automatically post the
transaction, provided there are no exceptions encountered by the system and the
user verifying CACC is authorized to post the transaction; otherwise system shall
create the transaction in entered state and shall display the tran_id. User shall view
OFTI POST REPORT through menu option PR. If the transaction is in entered state,
an authorized user shall post/verify the transaction through menu option TM.
g. INTEREST APPLICATION DURING CLOSURE OF ACCOUNT
Menu option CAAC (Close an Account)
1. Function Z (Close an Account)
2. A/c No Enter A/c No. Press F4.
3. If the interest calculation is not up to date, system shall display Y in Run Int. Calc.
Now. System shall also display other important information like Cust_id, A/c open
date, A/c balance, Interest rate code, Last interest date, pending authorization,
pending trans & amt, pending SI trans & amt (standing Instructions) etc.

Page 203 of 294

4. Press F4. The system shall calculate up-to-date interest and post the transaction (if
the user is authorized to post the transaction & there are no exceptions encountered
by the system during the process); otherwise system shall create the transaction in
entered state.
5. User shall press F3 and quit from CACC. Please check the reports through PR and
post/verify transaction through menu option TM.
h. CLOSURE OF CC/OD ACCOUNT
After the interest is applied as discussed above, system shall show the liability in the
account (menu option ACCBAL / ACLI). The account shall be credited with the amount
of debit balance through TM and post/verify transaction.
After ensuring that the a/c balance is zero, user shall again invoke menu option CAAC.
Manu option CAAC
a. Function Z (Close an Account)
b. A/c No Enter A/c No. Press F4.The system shall, by default display N in Run
Int. Calc. Now and the field will be in protected mode and shall also display a
message Interest calculation is up to date.
c. Press F4.
d. Remarks Enter remarks if any.
e. Close option press F10 to commit.
f. Another authorized user shall verify closure of account through menu option
CAACAU, function V.
Q. REPORTS
a. TODRP (TOD Register Printing)

Screen 20
This is a mandatory report to be taken on daily basis. This is a criteria based report, user
shall enter the criteria of his choice and the system shall generate the report as per the
inputs provided by the user. In this menu option, only Set id, report to and MRT file name
fields are mandatory.

Page 204 of 294

1. Set ID By default system shall display users SOL Id. User can change set id to other
sol/set, if he wishes to see TODRP of other sol/set.
2. Report to (mandatory) Free text field.
3. Currency code If user wishes to see TODs granted in a particular currency, the same
can be entered or selected from the list.
4. A/c No From & to Enter the range of accounts of which user wishes to see TODs.
5. Cust Id- if the user wishes to see TODs granted to a particular customer (all the
accounts of a particular customer), then user shall enter Cust_id.
6. Advance Type User can enter S (single transaction TOD), A (Adhoc limits) or R
(Running limit).
7. Event type If the user wishes to see TODs granted in a particular event (like clearing,
TM etc.) same can be entered or selected from the list.
8. Status Valid values are R (Regularized), U (Unregularised), E (Expired), I (interest
collected) and F (Future dated).
9. Age User can take agewise TODs report.
10. Permitted By user can enter finacle user id of the official who has permitted the TOD.
11. Authorized Id user can enter finacle user id of the official who has authorized the TOD.
12. Grant Date From/To If user wishes to see TODs granted between two dates, then he
can enter the dates in from and to fields.
13. MRT File name (Mandatory) Press F2 the list and select the valid code from it. The
system has a provision to generate TOD register for Non-Expired TODs, Expired TODs
and Event based TODs.
14. As regards, only Set Id, Report to and MRT file name fields are mandatory. User can
leave other fields as blank (as the case may be) & the system shall pick up all the
possible values in the fields which have not been entered by the user.
15. After entering the criteria, press F4.
16. System shall display print parameter acceptance form.
17. Fore/Background Enter F.
18. Print Reqd If the printer is physically connected to the PC, then enter Y; otherwise
enter N.
19. Press F10.
20. View/print the report through menu option PR (Print Reports).
b. PNBRPT
1. Menu option type PNBRPT and press Enter. The main menu shall appear.

Screen 21
Page 205 of 294

2. All the loans & advances related reports are available in option no. 3. User shall type 3
in the field available below the list of options. Press F4. System shall display submenu
of loans & advances.

3.
4.
5.
6.

7.

Screen 22
User shall type the serial number of report which he wishes to generate. E.g if the user
wishes to generate daily balances report for CCOTH, DLGEN, PCGEN, FOBN, FOBFD,
he shall type 7 in the field available below the list of options. Press F4.
Depending upon the type of report user wishes to generate, system may ask several
values which must be entered in the field provided below the list of options.
Please remember, in PNBRPT after typing/entering the value, user shall always
press F4 to proceed.
After entering the values as required by the system, it shall generate the report. During
this time, it shall change the color of progress indicator to Red. User shall not disturb the
system during this process. Once the progress indicator turns back to green (i.e. the
system is ready), user shall type QQ in the field and press F4 to quit from PNBRPT.
User shall view/print the report through menu option PR.

c. PNBREP
Similar to PNBRPT, some of the reports are also available in PNBREP.

Screen 23
For further references, user shall refer to CBS user manual developed by IT Division, HO
Page 206 of 294

Prepared By: Makarand B Kedare

Sr.Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
SECURITY REGISTER MAINTENANCE (SRM)
Security Register Maintenance is one of the most important activities to be performed for all loan
and advances accounts in Finacle. Both, Primary and Collateral security details need to be
captured in Finacle for all such accounts. Capturing security details shall also help the branch to
generate proper MIS.
Prerequisites
1. If the security is to be attached to an Account then the account should have been already
opened.
For an account, if the DP is to be derived from security, then the DP indicator, which is
available on 2nd page of H details should be D (Derived from Security). If it is not D, then
DP indicator can be changed to D through menu option ACLHM.
2. If the security is to be attached to a Limit Node, then the Limit Node should have been
created, through menu option LNM.
If the DP is to be derived from the security, then the DP indicator in LNM should be D
(Derived from Security). If it is not D, then it can be changed to D through the same
menu option i.e. LNM.
A. ATTACH SECURITY TO AN ACCOUNT
Menu option SRM
1. Function A (Add)
2. Linkage Type A (Account). Security can also be attached to a Limit Node; in that case
enter N (Limit Node) in this field. Press F4.
3. A/c No. Enter Account No. to which the security is to be attached. Press F4.

Screen 1
4. System shall display SRM details block, but the cursor shall appear in Enter Option field.
5. Enter Option Enter A (Add) to add security details and press F4. (For information - User
can press F2 for the list in this field and can select required value by pressing Shift+F4. The
values in the list are A (Add), M (Modify), D (Delete), S (Substitute), I (Inquire), C (Charge
Details), F (Follow up details), P (Inspection Details), N (Insurance Details) & T (Audit
Inquiry)).
Page 207 of 294

Screen 2
6. Security Code Press F2 for the list and select appropriate security code by pressing
Shift+F4. In this example, we will select STOCKS as security code.
7. Lien A/c id If the user selects BANKDEP as security code in the above field, then enter
the concerned FD/RD account number in the field.
8. Dnm No. In case, BANKDEP is selected as security code, then after entering lien a/c no.
in the above field, user shall press F2 in this field. System shall display face value and lien,
if any marked on the FDR. User shall select the FDR by pressing Shift+F4.
9. Security Group Press F2 and select appropriate code by pressing Shift+F4. Valid values
are DEMAT Demat Shares, FINS Financial Securities & OTH Others. In our
example, we will select OTH.
10. Security Class - Press F2 and select appropriate code by pressing Shift+F4. In our
example, we will select 009 STOCKS.
11. Ceiling Limit Enter the ceiling limit against the value of security. While debiting the
account, system shall check the sanctioned limit entered in the account, (Security valuemargin) & Ceiling limit entered in this field, whichever is lower. This means, even if the
sanctioned limit is entered as Rs. 5,00,000/-, Security Value is Rs. 10,00,000/-, Margin is
25%, if the user enters 3,00,000 in this field, system shall not allow to debit the account
more than Rs. 3,00,000/-. In our example, we will enter 300000 as ceiling limit which is
equal to sanctioned limit in the account.
12. Margin Percent System shall automatically displays the minimum margin required to be
maintained against a particular security. User can modify the margin as per the sanction, if
required.
13. Nature of Charge Press F2 and select appropriate code by pressing Shift+F4. In our
example, we will select 002 HYPOTHECATION.
14. Received Date Enter the date on which stock statement is received.
15. Due Date Enter the next due date on which stock statements is required to be submitted
by the customer.
16. Apply Penal Int? Enter Y to charge penal interest, in case the customer does not submit
stock statement on or before the due date.
17. Frequency Enter the frequency at which the customer shall submit the stock statement or
statement of Book Debts. E.g. if the stock statements are to be submitted by the customer
by 7th day of every month, then user shall enter M in the 1st field, 7 in the 4th field, and P in
the last field (i.e. if 7th is holiday then customer shall submit the stock statement on
previous day).
Page 208 of 294

18. Unit Value In case shares, debentures etc. are held as security then unit value is to be
entered in this field. As discussed above, in case, the user selects BANKDEP as security
code, then lien a/c no. needs to be entered; system shall automatically display value of
FD/RD in this field.
19. No. of Units Enter number of units of such shares, debentures etc.
20. Security Value Enter the total security value. As discussed above, in case, the user
selects BANKDEP as security code, then lien a/c no. needs to be entered; system shall
automatically display value of FD/RD in this field.
21. Primary/Collateral valid values are P (Primary) or C (Collateral). If the security is taken as
collateral then the security value would not be used for arriving at Drawing Power.
22. Remarks Free text field.
23. Press F4. The system shall check that whether the values in mandatory fields are entered,
as also it shall check and validate other values entered. If the values are properly entered in
the concerned fields, system shall bring the cursor in Enter Option field.
After entering security details, the user shall ensure that the cursor is blinking in Enter Option field
of main page of SRM. In this field, user shall press F10 to commit/save SRM details. System shall
not allow the user to commit/save SRM details, if Insurance Reqd. flag is Y and/or Charge Reqd
flag is Y and shall display a message Insurance Details must be entered and/or Charge Details
must be entered respectively.
If the Insurance Reqd is Y, user shall enter Insurance Details mandatorily.
1. Enter option N (Insurance Details). Press F4.

Screen 3
2. Option Code A (Add). Press F4. Insurance Details screen will appear.

Screen 4
Page 209 of 294

3. Insurance Type (mandatory) Press F2. Using Up/Down arrow, go to the type of
insurance which is to be selected and press Shift+F4.
4. Insurance Ref Number (mandatory) Enter Policy Number
5. Company Name & Addr Free Text. Enter Insurance Co.s name and give its address
6. Goods Insured Enter the details of goods for which insurance has been obtained
7. Policy Amount (mandatory) Enter the amount for which insurance has been obtained. If
the policy amount is less than Security Value, then the system shall raise an exception
Under Insurance For Security while verifying the security.
8. Risk Cover Start Date Enter the date from which insurance is effective
9. Risk Cover End Date Enter the date up to which insurance is effective.
10. After filling necessary fields, press F4. Cursor shall appear in the Option Code Field.
11. Enter option - delete A and enter S and press F4 to go back to the Security Details Screen.
12. Enter Option - Press F10 to commit.
If the Charge Reqd is Y, user shall enter Charge Details mandatorily.
Ensure that cursor is in the Enter option field of Security Details screen.
1. Enter Option type C (Charge Details). Press F4.
2. Option Code A (Add). Press F4. Charge Details screen shall appear on the screen

Screen 5
3. Charge Amount Enter the charge amount.
4. Date of Regn. Enter date of Registration of the charge.
5. Reg. Authority Enter the name of the authority with whom the charge has been created
e.g. Registrar of Companies, Regional Transport Authority etc.
6. Address Enter address of Reg. Authority
7. City Press F2 and select city code by pressing Shift+F4.
8. State Press F2. Select state code by pressing Shift+F4.
9. Pin Code Enter six digits Pin Code. No list is available in this field.
10. Charge Instmnt Free text. User can enter instrument details.
11. Charge Details Free text. User can enter other information related to charge.
12. Date of Filing Enter the date of filing of charge with Reg. Authority.
13. Date of Receipt Enter the date of receipt of the certificate of registration of charge from
registration authority.
14. After filling required fields, press F4. Cursor shall appear in Option Code Field.
15. Option Code - Delete A, type S and press F4 to go back to the Security Details Screen.
16. Enter Option Press F10 to commit.

System shall raise an exception Under insurance for Security<Manager> if the insurance
amount in Insurance Details screen is less than the value of Security. If the users work class
is sufficient (at least Manager), then he can press F4 to accept the SRM record with the
exception.
Page 210 of 294

INSPECTION DETAILS
User can enter inspection details in SRM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Enter Option P (Inspection Details). Press F4.

Option Code A (Add). Press F4.
Inspection Type Press F2 and select the code by pressing Shift+F4.
Address Enter the address of the party where the inspection is conducted.
City Press F2 and select city code by pressing Shift+F4. Alternatively, if the user knows
city code, it can be entered directly.
6. State - Press F2 and select state code by pressing Shift+F4. Alternatively, if the user
knows state code, it can be entered directly.
7. Pin Code Enter pin code.
8. Enter Phone Nos., Comments, Date of Insp, Stock Value.
9. Insp Emp Id/ Name If the inspecting official has a Finacle user id, the same can be
entered in this field or selected from the list; otherwise his name can be entered.
10. Free Text Enter appropriate remarks in this field. Press F4.
11. Option Code Delete A and enter S. Press F4.
B. VERIFICATION OF SRM ATTACHED TO AN ACCOUNT
The user who creates SRM details can not verify it. Another authorized user shall verify SRM
details.
Menu option SRM
1.
2.
3.
4.

Function V (Verify).
Linkage Type A (Account). Press F4
A/c No. Enter A/c No. of which Security Details are to be verified. Press F4.
The system will bring a list of all the securities attached to the account but not yet
unverified. Press Shift+F4 to select the record to be verified. The details of the Security
shall appear on the screen, with all the fields protected. Verify security details.
5. At Enter Option field, press F10 to commit. Please ensure that * appears on extreme
left hand side of security record. System shall not allow the user to press F10 if insurance
and/or charge details are not verified (as per the applicability) and shall display a message
Insurance Details should be visited before committing and Charge Details should be
visited before committing respectively.
Verification of Insurance Details (if applicable)
6.
7.
8.
9.

Enter Option Enter N (Insurance Details). Press F4.

Option Code I (Inquiry). Press F4. Verify insurance details. Press F4.
Option Code Delete I and enter S (Security Details). Press F4.
Ensure that the cursor is in Enter Option field of main page of Security Details screen.

Verification of Charge Details (if applicable)

10. Enter Option Type C (Charge Details). Press F4. The system shall activate Charge
Details screen. Verify charge details.
11. Enter Option - S (Security Details). Press F4.
12. Ensure that the cursor is in Enter Option field of main page of Security Details screen.
13. Enter Option Press F10 to commit.

Page 211 of 294

C. CHECK DP IN AN ACCOUNT
Generally, after the primary security record created and verified through SRM, user shall
ensure that whether the correct DP is available in the account
Menu option ACCBAL
Enter the account number and press F4. The system shall display all the details, like
Sanctioned Limit, Drawing Power and Available Amt in the account.

Screen 6
If the DP is to be derived from the Security in an account but if the user is not able to get
the correct DP in this inquiry, then some of the reasons could be (only indicative)
1. SRM record is not properly created and/or verified.
2. DP Indicator field is not set to D (Derived from Security) while opening the account. User
shall use menu option ACLHM to inquire and modify DP indicator.
3. If DP indicator is D in the account, then DP shall be equal to Sanction limit or Security
Value less Margin or Ceiling limit whichever is less.
D. FURTHER MAINTENANCE IN SRM
SRM maintenance includes modification of security details, insurance, charge, inspection
details etc.
Lets assume that in Cash Credit A/c, stock statements or statement of Book Debts is received
on monthly basis. As regards, if the DP indicator is set to D (Derived from Security) in the
Account, it becomes necessary to modify SRM record on monthly / quarterly basis (as the case
may be) as and when such statements are received. This shall help the branch to decide the
DP accordingly.
1. SUBSTITUTE THE EXISTING SRM RECORD
Menu option SRM
1. Function M (Modify)
2. Linkage Type A (Account). User shall enter N in this field if the security is attached to a
Limit Node. Press F4.
Page 212 of 294

3. Node Id If N is entered in the previous field, then the user shall enter Limit Node ID to
which the security is attached.
4. A/c No. If A is entered in the linkage Type, then the user shall enter the account number.
5. Press F4.
6. The system shall show all the existing SRM records. User shall select the record to be
modified by pressing Shift+F4.
7. Enter Option S (substitute). Press F4.
8. Received date User shall modify the date as per the date of receipt of stock statement.
Press F4.
9. Enter Option - Press F10 to commit.
10. Another authorized user shall verify SRM. This is already discussed in paragraph B.
2. MODIFY THE SUBSTITUTED SRM RECORD
Menu option SRM
Once the security is substituted, the system shall insert a new record with the same values as
that of old SRM record and update DP indicator as S (Substituted). And the new record in the
list shall have DP indicator as P (Provisional). This status is available at 2nd position from Right
Hand Side of the record.
1. Function M (Modify)
2. Linkage Type A (Account). User shall enter N in this field if the security is attached to a
Limit Node. Press F4.
3. Node Id If N is entered in the previous field, then the user shall enter Limit Node ID to
which the security is attached.
4. A/c No. If A is entered in the linkage Type, then the user shall enter the account number.
5. Press F4.
6. The system shall show all the existing SRM records. User shall select the new record
(having DP indicator as P) by pressing Shift+F4.
7. Enter Option M (Modify). Press F4.
8. Modify Security details as per the stock statement / statement of Book Debts in the
appropriate fields. After doing necessary modifications, press F4.
9. Enter Option Press F10 to commit.
10. Another authorized user shall verify the SRM record as discussed in paragraph B.
It is always advisable to confirm the DP through menu option ACCBAL.
IMPORTANT
1. As the System calculates Penal Interest for late submission of stock (or book debt)
statement, the users who are modifying and verifying SRM record shall ensure that the
correct date of receipt of statements is entered in Receipt Date field.
2. In case the value of security is not enough to cover the outstanding balance in the account
as on date of modification of SRM, the system shall grant a TOD automatically with event
type TODDL (TOD due to drop in Limit).
E. DELETION OF SRM RECORD
Menu option SRM
1. Function M (Modify)
2. Linkage Type A (Account). User shall enter N in this field if the security is attached to a
Limit Node. Press F4.
3. Node Id If N is entered in the previous field, then the user shall enter Limit Node ID to
which the security is attached.
Page 213 of 294

4. A/c No. If A is entered in the linkage Type, then the user shall enter the account number.
5. Press F4.
6. The system shall show all the existing SRM records. User shall select the record to be
deleted by pressing Shift+F4.
7. Enter option D (Delete). Press F4. Press F10.
8. Another authorized user shall verify the SRM record as discussed in paragraph B.
SECURITY CODES IN FINACLE FOR SRM
SNO SRM CODE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

IPMTG
CARS
BANKDEP
GOVTSEC
MFUNITS
SHAREDEB
LICPOLCY
BOOKDEBT
CLGINST
IMD-SBI
RRMTRGSB
BILLSDOC
COLDSTOR
PERSONAL
STOCKS
P&M
GOLD-22K
GOLD-14K
SILVER
TWOWHEEL
CON-DURA
LEASRENT
CROPS
LIVESTOK
BIO-GAS
COMBHARV
MACH
KTCHNGDN
CARTS
BEEKPG
FISHERIE
MIRRGN
POW-TLR
EQUPMENT
FEEDFERT
SOLARWH
COMPUTER
TRANSPT
DEPNFBR

SRM CODE DESCRIPTION

MORTGAGE OF IMMOVABLE PTY

CARS PUBLIC/STAFF
BANK DEPOSITS - FD/RD ETC
GOVERNMENT SECURITIES
MUTUAL FUND - UTI/LIC/PSU
SHARES/DEBENTURES
LIC/POSTAL LIFE POLICY
BOOK DEBTS
ADV.AGNST CLG INSTRUMENTS
INDIA MILLENNIUM DEP -SBI
RR/MTR/GOVT.SUP.BILLS ETC
DOCY BILLS- DEMAND/USANCE
COLD STORAGE RECEIPT
PERSONAL SECURITY
STOCK - RM/SIP/SFG/FG/SIT
PLANT & MACHINARY
22K GOLD & GOLD JEWELLERY
14K GOLD & GOLD JEWELLERY
SILVER (OF .999 PURITY )
M.C/SCO/MPD ETC STAFF/PUB
CONSUMER DURABLES
ASSIGNMENT OF LEASE RENT
CROP-WHEAT,PADDY,MAIZEETC
LIVESTOCK(CATTLE,PIG ETC)
BIO GAS PLANT
COMBINE HARVESTER
MACHINERY
KITCHEN GARDEN
ANIMAL DRIVEN CARTS
BEE-KEEPING (APICULTURE)
FISHERIES
MI-DIESEL ENG/PUMPSET ETC
POWER TILLERS TRACTOR ETC
EQUIPMENT-MED/ENGG ETC
FEED, FERTILIZERS ETC.
SOLAR WATER HEATER EQUIP.
COMPUTER, PERIPHERAL ETC.
TRANSPORT VEHICLES
NON-FINACLE BR DEPOSIT

Page 214 of 294

SECURITY INSURANCE CHARGE

TYPE
REQUIRED
DETAILS
REQUIRED
I
V
D
G
U
S
P
B
O
O
O
O
O
O
T
M
J
J
J
V
O
O
O
L
O
V
M
O
O
O
O
M
V
M
T
O
O
V
O

Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N

Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Y
N

Prepared By : Makarand B Kedare

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
LIMIT NODE MAINTENANCE
Concept Limit node maintenance allows the user to maintain the limits and control the drawing
power at account level, limit level etc. Limit nodes can be linked to accounts, bank guarantees,
documentary credits etc.
Purpose To monitor partys total exposure/liability for different types of head like fund, non-fund
etc.
Finacle provides feature of maintaining the limits in various currencies and in the same
limit tree also maintaining limits in different currencies are permitted to one level.
WE WILL TAKE HYPOTHETICAL EXAMPLE OF CREATING THE FOLLOWING TREE
Party Total Limit Rs.1,00,00,000.00
Fund based Limit 50% of party total exposure
Non-Fund Limit 50% of party total exposure
OUT OF FUND EXPOSURE 50% CC Limit 50% of Fund based exposure
TL Limit 50% of Fund based exposure
Out of Non-Fund Limit of 50% Inland Guarantee Limit 50% of Non-Fund based exposure
Letter of Credit Limit 50% of Non- Fund based exposure
The general procedure may be adopted as follows
1. Create parent Limit Node through LNM. Select Drawing Power ind as D-Derived from
Security. Verify LNM.
2. Create Security Register through SRM. Verify SRM.
Invoke Menu Option LNM (Limit Node Maintenance)
A Creation of Parent Limit ID
1. Function A (Add)
2. Limit ID This has two parts viz. Limit Prefix and Limit Suffix. Limit prefix is entered as a
part of creating the limit id. It is always advisable that the customer id is used as limit prefix
so that it is more beneficial from the point of usage. Limit Suffix is the code available in the
system for individual type of limit nodes which should be very carefully given.
Limit ID Prefix part D10052577. Suppose party name is Pantasys Computers.
Limit ID Suffix part, press F2. Go to the record PTEXP Party Total Exposure and press
Shift+F4. Press F4. The system will come to the data block where we have to enter details
for Limit Node - D10052577/PTEXP
Page 215 of 294

3. Description Free text. Generally Companys name is given followed by limit type. E.g.
Pantasys Party Total Exp.
4. Currency INR (once the currency given and limit node is verified, the same can not be
modified through LNM, so be careful while specifying currency)
5. Customer ID D10052577
6. Parent Limit ID we are creating parent limit id, so parent limit id will be blank for PTEXP.
7. Sanction Limit Enter the sanction limit. E.g. 10000000.00
8. Drawing Power Ind D (Derived from Security)
9. Drawing Power % - In case of parent limit id, leave it blank
10. DP/Margin retained in our case it is blank
11. Limit Sanct/exp date Enter todays date in the Sanction date and in exp date field enter
date of one year later
12. Sanction Level Code Press F2. Select the code by pressing Shift+F4. e.g. 001 Head
Office
13. Sanct. Auth. Code Press F2. Select the code by pressing Shift+F4.e.g. 002-CMD
14. Single Trans N. If this is Y, then once the DP is utilized up to the sanctioned limit, then
customer will not be able to utilize it again even if he has remitted the earlier amount used.
15. Remarks Free Text.
16. User Maintained Liab. Enter 0. The user can block part of the amount available in the limit
by entering a value in this field. The amount available will be reduced by this value. The DP
will be reduced by this value.
17. Press F10 to commit.
Verification of Limit Node
Menu Option LNM
1. Function V (Verify)
2. Limit id D10052577 / PTEXP. Press F4.
The system will display Limit Node Details. If everything acceptable, Press F10. The limit node
id is verified.
B - Attach Security to this Parent Limit ID
Menu Option SRM
1. Function A (Add)
2. Linkage Type N (Limit Node)
3. Node Id D10052577 / PTEXP. Press F4
Enter the details as explained in SRM topic.
Note if ceiling limit is more than (Security Value Margin), the system will assume
DP = Security Value Margin
Verification of SRM
1. Function V (Verify)
2. Linkage Type N (Limit Node)
3. Node Id D10052577 / PTEXP. Press F4
Verify the Security details as explained in SRM topic.

Page 216 of 294

C- How to See Limit Tree??

Invoke Menu Option LTL (Limit Tree Lookup)
1. Limit Id D10052577 / PTEXP. Press F4
The system will display only one node (D10052577/PTEXP) which we have recently
created. The fields as as
1.
2.
3.
4.

Limit Nodes D10052577/PTEXP

Desc Pantasys Party Total Exp.
Crncy INR
Limit 10000000.00 (this amount it takes from sanction limit mentioned in LNM.
If the sanction limit is more than DP/Margin retained, the system will take Limit =
DP/Margin retained.
5. Total Liability The system will display total liability under this limit node.
6. Level This will display position of this limit node under its parent.
D- HOW TO CREATE CHILD LIMIT NODE?
Now that you have created parent limit node, you can create child limit node, which can be
attached to the parent limit node. Lets take the above example to create Fund based limit
node under D10052577/PTEXP, which will be its parent limit node.
Invoke Menu option LNM
1.
2.
3.
4.

Function A (Add)
Limit Node D10052577 / FUND. Press F4. The cursor will appear in the data block
Enter description, Currency, Customer id (D10052577) as explained above.
Parent Limit Node D10052577 / PTEXP. This means D10052577/PTEXP will act as
its parent limit node.
5. Sanction Limit 5000000.00
6. Drawing Power P (Parent)
7. Drawing Power 50. This is percentage of D10052577/PTEXP which we would like to
allocate to the D10052577/FUND limit node.
8. DP/Marin retained this will automatically come. In our case, we have taken parent limit
node as D10052577/PTEXP which has sanction limit of Rs.10000000.00, so 50% of it
would be Rs.5000000.00 which is now allotted to this limit node.
9. Fill the remaining fields as explained in paragraph A.
10. After filling all the details, press F10 to commit.
Verification of Limit Node
Menu Option LNM
1. Function V (Verify)
2. Limit id D10052577 / FUND. Press F4.
The system will display Limit Node Details. If everything acceptable, Press F10. The limit
node id is verified.
Now, if you see LTL (Limit Tree Lookup) for D10052577/PTEXP, you will observe that one
limit node (D10052577/FUND) is added to the just one level below of it and its Limit is
Rs.5000000.00, with level 2.

Page 217 of 294

E How to add further child nodes to the limit node?

1. Follow the above process to create Non-Fund Limit Node (LNM). The limit node will be
D10052577/NFUND. Its parent Limit Node will be D10052577/PTEXP. The field
Drawing power ind will be P (Parent).Verify Limit Node (LNM). See LTL to confirm the
tree.
2. Create child Limit Node D10052577/CC (LNM). Its parent Limit Node will be
D10052577/FUND. The field Drawing power ind will be P (Parent). Verify Limit Node
(LNM). See LTL to confirm the tree. In LTL, the level of this limit node will be 3, as its
created under D10052577/FUND (level 2), which is created under D10052577/PTEXP
(level 1)
3. Create child Limit Node D10052577/TL (LNM). Its parent Limit Node will be
D10052577/FUND. The field Drawing power ind will be P (Parent). Limit Node (LNM).
See LTL to confirm the tree. In LTL, the level of this limit node will be 3, as its created
under D10052577/FUND (level 2), which is created under D10052577/PTEXP (level 1)
4. Create child Limit Node D10052577/ILG (LNM). Its parent Limit Node will be
D10052577/NFUND. The field Drawing power ind will be P (Parent). Verify Limit Node
(LNM). See LTL to confirm the tree. In LTL, the level of this limit node will be 3, as its
created under D10052577/NFUND (level 2), which is created under D10052577/PTEXP
(level 1)
5. Create child Limit Node D10052577/DC (LNM). Its parent Limit Node will be
D10052577/NFUND. The field Drawing power ind will be P (Parent). Verify Limit Node
(LNM). See LTL to confirm the tree. In LTL, the level of this limit node will be 3, as its
created under D10052577/NFUND (level 2), which is created under D10052577/PTEXP
(level 1)

Page 218 of 294

OPENING OF A LOAN ACCOUNT

Account opening for a loan account is similar to any other customer account. The menu option is
OAAC. The user can open an account for his branch or any other branch. In order to open an
account for another branch the user must be free and menu should be free. A captive user can
open accounts to which SOL he belongs.Verification of the account should be done using menu
OAACAU.
GENERAL DETAILS SUB OPTION G ( 3 SCREENS ) - MANDATORY
Many of the information is default populated based on scheme parameter set up and the customer
master.
Mode of operation: This is MANDATORY & only an information field. This is displayed in TM
Screen. Based on the value set up here and displayed during Transactions in TM the user can
take appropriate procedural steps.
Account Mgr: This is the user ID created using UPM menu. If any value is mentioned here, it
means that this account is looked after by that particular person. Many operations can be done
based on this value like interest calculation, statement printing, inquiries etc.
Note:
1. Customer preferential interest rates both debit and credit would be default populated if it is
mentioned at customer level and the parameter is set at scheme for default population. The
values can be over-ridden by the user.
2. Account Preferential is another field through which the users can specify special rates of
interest to the account.
3. Interest credit flag, Interest debit flag, Interest debit account, Interest credit account are not
applicable in this case
4. Interest table code is a mandatory field and must be changed from ZERO to applicable rate
code.
5. If the interest rate is fixed during the entire tenor of the account then value should be set as
Y for the field Account pegged?
6. If the value is set as Y for the above field, then the user can enter value for the fields
Pegging review date and Pegging Frequency(Mnths/Days) /
7. Tax details are not applicable for Loan Accounts.
SCHEME DETAILS SUB OPTION S (2 SCREENS ) - MANDATORY
1. Loan amount is the amount of loan sanctioned. The system validates whether the amount
indicated here is within the range mentioned at product level. Else an exception would be
raised based on the set up.
2. Loan period is the tenor of the loan. The system validates for this value also based on the
scheme level set up and appropriate exception would be raised.
3. If the value is set as Y for the field Hold In Oper A/c For Amount Due? then the user can
run LALIEN menu and mark lien on the operative account to the extent of demand in the
loan account
4. Value set for the field Repayment Method will decide how repayment will be made. If the
value is set as E, then system recovers what is available in the operative account. If the
value is T system creates a TOD and recovers the entire dues from the operative account.
If the value is N then no recovery would be done. If the value is set to either P Post
dated cheques or D Electronic clearing, then the user can get a report on such accounts
and all further processes is procedural.
5. If the value is set as Y for field Transfer in A/c, then the user has to enter additional
information in sub option U uncomputerised details.
Fields on the 2nd Screen relate to various information relating to the account with regard to
Refinance, Subsidy etc. No validations are done based on any of those fields.
Page 219 of 294

MISCELLANEOUS CODES SUB OPTON V - MANDATORY

The user must enter various codes for generation of accurate MIS here.
INTEREST DETAILS SUB OPTION I - MANDATORY
The system by default populate most of the values based on the set up done at scheme level. The
user can over ride these information. Intt. Demand Effective Date should be entered in case of
such Loan Accounts, where Intt. Becomes due after a particular period, e.g. Staff Loans on Simple
Intt., Education Loan etc.
Once the account is opened, then all these information will be the property of the account and
system will not look into the scheme level any further for future processing on the account.
REPAYMENT SCHEDULE SUB OPTON E - MANDATORY
The user can set up a repayment schedule for the loan sanctioned using this sub option.
1. Flow ID field can have value which is of Equated instalment demand, Principal demand or
Interest demand type. These flow IDs are created using flow code maintenance. If the
account is opened under equated instalment scheme then the system default populates the
flow id based on the set up done at scheme level. If it is equated instalment, system
populates the EI amount based on the number of instalments indicated and the user can
over ride it. An exception is also associated with this for doing necessary validations
2. Start date of the instalment should always be greater than the account open date
3. User has to enter the number of instalments to arrive at the instalment amount
4. Depending upon the parameter set at product level, user can enter the values for the field
number of instalments, and amount.
If the user is coming in modify mode, then the original repayment schedule can be modified. The
system does a validations if the number of instalments and the tenor of the loan does not match
and an exception would be raised.
DISBURSEMENT DETAILS SUB OPTION D - OPTIONAL
The user can optionally have a disbursement schedule and monitor the disbursement. The system
validates whenever a disbursement is made whether it is as per the disbursement schedule or not
and appropriate exception would be raised if set up is done. In absence of such schedule,
disbursements may be made in as many installments as required.
MESSAGE MAINTENANCE SUB OPTION M - OPTIONAL
As a part of account opening, the user can maintain information with regard to the account in the
form of messages. These messages can be in the form of free text or through a coded mode. User
can enter the messages without the help of codes also. In such cases, the user enters the
message directly into the text field.
UNCOMPUTERISED DETAILS SUB OPTION U MANDATORY FOR TRANSFER-IN
ACCOUNTS
This information is required only if the value for the field Transfer in A/c? is Y. This information
is stored till the account is verified and transactions are put through to the account and demands
are uploaded to the system. Normally these information are captured in case of accounts which
are transferred from another branch or when migration is done from one application to another
application or from the manual system to computerised system. The user should enter all the
relevant data during account opening itself as no further modification is possible once the account
is opened. Detailed procedure is given separately.
Page 220 of 294

LIMIT HISTORY DETAILS SUB OPTION H - MANDATORY

The user has to enter the details of the limits sanctioned and the drawing power using this sub
option. This sub option has details regarding limit and the drawing power. There are two
different screens to capture the details. By default once the user enters the details in the limits
screen and <accept> he would be taken to the drawing power details screen.
1. System by default populates the loan amount as sanctioned limit. The user can modify this
amount if he wants. The other two fields in the function block are not applicable for this
scheme type.
2. Interest details are not applicable for this scheme type
3. Penal interest can be from the date of expiry or beyond the expiry date. The user cannot
indicate a date which is earlier to expiry date
The drawing power indicator in this case should be mentioned as E equal to sanction limit as
other values are not valid for this scheme type.
Note: Please note that visit of sub option H is not mandatory during account opening. If the user
does not visit this sub option, system by default populates various values that are available and
puts into appropriate fields. The system will not populate values for all the mandatory fields. Even
then system will not halt the process of account opening. However, when the user goes in the
modification mode he will be forced to enter those unfilled mandatory information.
DISBURSEMENT DETAILS SUB OPTION 3 - OPTIONAL
The application provides a feature to disburse the loan amount as a part of the account
opening itself. The user can disburse the entire amount or a part of the amount based on his
requirement. However, margin cannot be collected from the borrower through this sub-option.
If the user wants to disburse the amount he has to invoke this sub option and furnish
information required for creation of transaction.
1. If the transaction type is cash , credit a/c number should not be entered
2. if the transaction type is Transfer, then the user has to enter the account number to which
the credit should be made.
On an <accept> from here the user is taken to sub option block from where he can give a
<commit>. Verification of the account opening will create the necessary transaction as shown
above.
Once the user enters all the relevant data, he can do a <commit> from the option block. The
system gives the user the account number, which has to be noted for verification.
In addition SRM record is to be created and verified for every TL/DL Account.
ACCOUNT MAINTENANCE
Once the account is opened and verified the usage of OAAC and OAACAU are over. For further
maintenance of the account user has to use the following menu options
GENERAL INFORMATION
The user will have to invoke menu ACM for modification of general information of the account
except Limit and Interest details.
In modification mode the user can modify the following details

Page 221 of 294

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

General details with sub option 0

Related party details with sub option A
Scheme details with sub option S
MIS codes with sub option V
Repayment schedule with option E
Disbursement schedule with option D
Message maintenance with option L

Once the use modifies any of the above information the modification needs to be verified. The
verification of any modification is to be done using the same menu option. The user will be taken
to the option block directly. From there he has to invoke the concerned sub options where
changes have been done and visit those information before giving a final <commit>.
INTEREST RELATED CHANGES
The user has to invoke a menu INTTM for changing any of the interest related parameters
including pegging and preferential interest rates.
After modifying the required information, he can give a <commit>. This modification requires
verification and to be done by the other person. The menu used for verification is same.
LIMIT DETAIL MAINTENANCE
It is possible for the user to modify the loan amount (sanctioned limit) for a loan account also. The
changes to the limits should be done through menu ACLHM. This menu has two operations
modifications to sanction limit and modification to drawing power details. In the ACLHM menu
option the user has to indicate operation as S or D depending upon what he is modifying.
Modification of the sanction limit will check whether the amount already disbursed will cover the
new sanction limit or not. The user can modify the limit. Supercede field is not accessible and
value will always be Y. After modifying the details user has to <accept> to come back to option
block from where a final <commit> would be done.
This modification requires verification by another user.
In order to modify the drawing power details the operation should be D in the first screen of
ACLHM menu option.
User has to accept from the function block to go to data block. After modifying the details he can
<accept> to go to option block and <commit> modifications. The modification requires verification
by another user.
REPHASEMENT OF A LOAN
Re-scheduling the loan can be done in two ways.
1. Re-schedule loan
2. Correcting the schedule already given.
This option is based on Rephasement ? Flag of ACM menu option. If the Rephasement Flag is
Y, then user has to choose option 1 otherwise the user chooses re-schedule option 2.
The rephasement of the loan has to be done individually for non EI type of loans using the ACM
Account maintenance option. The user has to come in modify mode and invoke sub option E
Repayment schedule. Once the user comes in the modify mode for this sub option, cursor will be
placed in the field Rephasement?.

Page 222 of 294

The user has to indicate a value Y here and <accept>. The user will be taken to repayment
schedule block and he can make necessary changes and commit. The user must ensure that the
total repayment amount is equal to the liability as on the date of rephasement. The start date for
repayment should be greater than BOD date. The system will not insist for up to date calculation
of interest and user has to take care of arriving at the actual liability before rephasing the loan.
This modification requires verification.
After verification the user can go in inquire mode and see the different repayment schedules for
the account. The system by default shows the latest repayment schedule and the cursor will be in
the dummy block of repayment schedule details. <explode> from that position will show the
previous repayment schedule. If there are more than 2 repayment schedules also the user can go
on <explode>ing from one schedule to another schedule till he goes to the original repayment
schedule.
INTEREST CALCULATION ON LOAN ACCOUNTS
Interest Calculation depends mainly on the set up done at Scheme Level. System calculates
interest which are of Normal, Penal and Additional. QIS and Stock statement interest are not
applicable for Loans scheme type.
Interest calculation is a process which is affected during the following events
- account opening to arrive at the EMI
-

rephasement of loan

demand creation (EMI type of accounts)

normal interest calculation through the menu option

upload of demands

account closure

Page 223 of 294

Prepared By : Makarand B Kedare

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
STANDING INSTRUCTIONS (SI)
In Finacle, standing instructions can be entered, modified, suspended or deleted, depending on
the necessity.
How to enter SI ?
Menu option SIM (Standing Instruction Maintenance)
Lets take an example Enter an SI which is requested by the customer (D10052288) to debit his
SB A/c (01929) by a fixed amount of Rs.5000/- to credit his CA A/c (21190) which are being
maintained at our SOL i.e. 417700. The SI should be executed on 20th day of every month. The SI
should be executed till 20.12.2003.
Steps 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Function Enter A (Add) and press F4. The cursor will appear in SI Class field.
SI Class Default value is C (Customer Induced). Press Tab or F11.
Cust ID D10052288
SOL Id 417700 (default populated)
SI Frequency As the above SI should be executed on 20th day of every month, the valid
values in SI frequency are M-Blank-Blank-20-N.
6. Execution Time Valid values are B (Day beginning), D (Anytime during day), A (After
Business Hours), E (Every Time). B means, SI will be automatically executed during Begin
of day process. D means, SI will be executed only once during the day whenever we run
SIE (Standing Instruction Execution) menu option first time, A means, SI will be executed
during ABH process, E means, SI will be executed every time whenever we run SIE menu
option. In our case we will take it as D i.e. Anytime during day.
7. Next Execution Date Enter the date on which the SI will be executed first time. Press
Ctrl+X to bring todays date.
8. Auto Post - Value is default Y, which means, whenever SI is executed, the system will post
the transactions automatically and user need not go to TM (Transaction Maint.) menu
option to post these transactions. If this is N, then the transactions created during execution
of this SI will remain in Entered state. User has to go into TM and post them.
9. End Date Enter the date on which SI to be ended.
10. Suspended Upto Enter the date upto which SI will not be executed. Means, suppose, if
the starting date is 20.11.2002 and End date is 20.11.2003 and on 01.02.2003, customer
comes and request to suspend the SI till 20.04.2003, then this date can be entered in this
field. This means, SI will not be executed on 20.02.2003 and 20.03.2003.
11. Accept Event Press F2. Select the event by pressing Shift+F4. This field is used to select
the charges to be levied on customer for requesting the SI.
12. Fail Event Press F2. Select the event id by pressing Shift+F4. This field is used to select
the charges to be levied on customer for if the SI fails.
13. Exec Event - Press F2. Select the event id by pressing Shift+F4. This field is used to select
the charges to be levied on customer for execution of SI.
14. Chrg Rate Default is NOR (i.e. Notional Rate).
15. Dr. Acct If any or all the above three events are entered, then give the account number
from where the charges will be deducted by the system automatically.
16. Delete tran if not posted Default is N. If the transaction is not posted due to any reason
and if this field is kept as N, the system will keep the transaction in Entered state,
otherwise, the transaction will be automatically deleted by the system on unsuccessful
execution of the SI.
Page 224 of 294

17. Carry Forward Default is Y.

18. Max times enter number of days. If the Carry Forward field is kept as Y and value for Max
times field is entered, the system will carry forward the SI for the number of days entered in
Max times field, if not successfully executed.
19. Remarks free text.
20. Closure Remarks free text.
Press F4.
The system will bring Sub Instruction screen. The cursor is in Option field. At the right-top side
Sub Instruction Serial No. 1 is displayed.
Debit part of SI 21. Option Enter E. Press F4.
22. Amount Ind Valid values are F-Fixed, V-Variable, C-Contra Balancing, T-Table Code. In
our example we have to debit SB A/c 01929 by Rs.5000/- i.e. we have to debit the a/c by
fixed amount, so in this field enter F.
23. Part Tran Type Valid values are C-Credit and D-Debit. In our example we have to debit
the a/c, so make it D.
24. Create Memo Pad Y.
25. Currency INR.
26. Fixed Amount This field will be mandatory as we have made Amount Ind field as F. Enter
Rs.5000/-. Press F4. System will bring part tran details screen.
27. Account Number Enter the account, which you want to debit. In our example its 01929.
Press Tab.
28. Amount Indicator Enter P (Percentage). Press Tab.
29. Percentage to be applied Enter 100. This is because, we want to debit full amount of
Rs.5000/- from only one account no. 01929. (In case, we want to debit 30% of Rs.5000/from one account and rest 70% (of Rs.5000/-) from another account, we need to enter 30 in
this field and press Down arrow, enter account no, press tab, enter P, press Tab and enter
70 in the percentage field).
30. Press F4.
31. The cursor will come back to Option field. We have only completed Debit part of SI. To
enter Credit part of SI, Enter E (which is already there in the field) and press F4.
Credit part of SI
32. Amount Ind C (Contra balancing). This is because, we are entering contra part of the SI.
33. Part tran Type C (Credit), because we want to credit Rs.5000/- to A/c No. 21190.
34. Create Memo Pad Y.
35. Currency INR. Press F4.
36. Account Number Enter the account, which you want to credit. In our example its 21190.
Press Tab.
37. Amount Indicator Enter P (Percentage). Press Tab.
38. Percentage to be applied Enter 100. This is because, we want to credit full amount of
Rs.5000/- to only one account no. 21190. (In case, we want to credit 30% of Rs.5000/- to
one account and rest 70% (of Rs.5000/-) to another account, we need to enter 30 in this
field and press Down arrow, enter account no, press tab, enter P, press Tab and enter 70 in
the percentage field).
39. Press F4.
40. The cursor will come back to Option field. Now that we have completed debit and credit
parts of SI, we can save the SI. Press F10 to Commit/Save.
41. Note down the SI Serial No. and press F3 twice. You back in the main menu.
HOW TO VERIFY SI CREATION?
Page 225 of 294

Menu Option SIM (Standing Instruction Maintenance)

Steps
1. Function V (Verify). Press Tab.
2. SI Srl.No. Enter SI Serila No. which you wish to verify. If you forgot to note the SI Serial
No., you can press F2 to get the list of unverified SIs, select the one which you wish to
verify. Press F4. The general details will appear on the screen. Check the details. Press
F4. The cursor will appear on Option field with the Debit part of the SI on your screen.
Check it.
3. Option Enter P. Press F4. Check the account and other details. Press F3.
4. Option Press Down Arrow. The system will display credit details of SI. Press P (which is
already displayed in the field) and F4. Check the account and other information. Press F3.
5. Option Press F10 to commit/save. The SI is verified. Press F3 to come out of the
menu option.
How to enter SI for Draft ?
Menu Option SIM
Example Enter SI, to prepare a draft of Rs.500/- (drawn on BO: Bhagya Nagar, Aurangabad,
favoring Anant Jadhav) on the 1st day of every month, by debiting A/c 01929 (customer ID
D10052288).
Steps
1. Function A (Add). Press F4.
2. SI Class C (Customer Induced)
3. Cust id D10052288
4. SI Frequency M-Blank-Blank-1-N
5. Execution time D (Anytime During Day)
6. Next Execution Date 01-12-2002 (enter appropriate date). Press F4.
To Enter DD related transaction details 7. Option E (Enter). Press F4.
8. Amount Ind F (Fixed)
9. Part tran Type C (Credit)
10. Create Memo Pad Y
11. Currency INR
12. Fixed Amount 500. Press F4.
13. Account Number DD. Press F4.
14. Amount Ind P (Percentage)
15. Percentage 100. Press F6. The system will bring Issue of DD screen. Leave City Name
as blank.
16. Drawn on Bank Code 024. Branch Code 1005.
17. Payee Name Anant Jadhav
18. Purchase A/c No. 01929.
19. Purchaser Name This will automatically appear.
20. Print Option I (Immediate). Press F4. The cursor will appear in the A/c No. field of
previous screen. Press F4. The cursor will appear in Option field.
To enter commission on DD related transaction
21. Option E(Enter). Press F4.
22. Amount Ind T (Table Code)
23. Part tran type C (Credit)
24. Create Memo Pad Y
Page 226 of 294

25. Currency INR

26. Fixed Amount 500. Go to the Amount Table Code field by pressing Tab.
27. Amount Table Code Press F2. Go to list item DDCOM (Commision on DD/MT/TT).
Select it by pressing Shift+F4.Press F4.
28. Account No. Type COMM, press F2. Go to INC COMM ON DRAFTS & TRANSFERS,
select it by pressing Shift+F4.
29. Amount Ind P (Percentage)
30. Percentage to be applied 100. Press F4. The cursor will appear in Option field.
To enter debit account details
31. Option E (Enter). Press F4.
32. Amount Ind C (Contra Balancing)
33. Part tran type D (Debit)
34. Create Memo Pad Y
35. Currency INR. Press F4.
36. Account No. 01929
37. Amount Ind P (Percentage)
38. Percentage 100. Press F4.The cursor will come back to option field. Press F10 to
Commit/Save the SI.
Verify the SI as explained in How to verify SI paragraph.
When do SIs get executed ?
a. SIs which have been marked as B (Day Beginning) in Execution Time will be automatically
executed during BOD process.
b. SIs which have been marked as A (After Business Hours) in Execution Time will be
automatically executed during EOD process.
c. SIs which have been marked as D (Anytime During day) will be executed when when we
run SIE (Standing Instruction Execution) menu option first time during the day.
d. SIs which have been marked as E (Every Time) will be executed as many times as we run
SIE menu option.
HOW TO EXECUTE SI??
Menu option SIE
1. Execution Time Enter D or E. Press F4.
2. System will bring Print parameter acceptance form.
3. Fore/Background Enter F.
4. Print Required N. Press F10. Wait till until progress indicator (which is on the bottom-right
corner of the screen) comes back to green. Press F3. The system generates execution
report for all the SIs selected of the type mentioned in steps 1. Please see the report.
Menu option PR (Print Report)
Make sure the > cursor appears before Standing Instruction Execution Report. Type T and
press F10. The report will appear on the screen. If the status of the SI is Submitted for Post
means, SI is successfully posted. Otherwise, note the transaction id (e.g. SD1176706)
generated for the SI. Type Q in the green bar which appears below the report and Press F4.
Press F3. Even if the status of SI is Submitted for Post or anything, please check the
transaction in TM and if it is not posted by the system, please post it.
Reports & Inquiries
SII Standing Instruction Inquiry,
SIETR SIs Executed Today Report
SIRP Standing Instruction Register Printing.
Page 227 of 294

PREPARED BY - Anil K Aggarwal,

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
INLAND BILLS
Bills are the integral part of the Banking Activities irrespective of the fact whether they are Inland
Bills or Foreign Bills.
The Bills can be classified in following two categories:
i.

Bills for Collection, whether clean or documentary, sight or usance, (where the lodgers
account is credited on realization of proceeds of bills) &

ii.

Bills for Purchase or Discounted, clean or documentary, sight or usance, (where the
lodgers account is credited before the realization of proceeds of bills)

Further, the above mentioned bill types can be Outward or Inward. Finacle supports all types of
bills mentioned above. The following activities relating to bills can be undertaken through Finacle.

The Bills can be lodged for Collection/Purchase/Discounted.

The Bills can be Purchased/Discounted subsequently, they are lodged.
The Bills can be transferred from collection to purchase or vice versa.
The Bills can be Realised, already sent for collection or purchased or discounted.
The Bills can be marked protested, if the same has been returned unpaid.

As regards charging of commission, Bank/Other charges & Interest calculation (in case of
purchase of Bills) is concerned, system automatically prepares the related transactions which can
be modified in case of need.
Various types of Bills Registers depending upon the type of bills have been defined in the system.
While lodging a bills a user has to select a Register type and then sub register type under which
the bill is to be lodged.
1. The list of these Registers Types & Sub Register Type is mentioned below:
Register
Type
ABC
ABC
IBD
IDBC
IDBC
IDBC
IDBCP
IDBCP
IDBCP
IDD
IDD
IUBC

Description

Sub
Register
Type
Advance Bills for Collection ABC
Advance Bills for Collection AUBC
IBD Register (Documentary IBD
Usance)
IDBC Branches
C-NCC
IDBC Branches
C-Oth
IDBC Branches
DBILL
IDBC Parties
C-NCC
IDBC Parties
C-Oth
IDBC Parties
DBILL
IDD Register (Clean & BILLS
Docy)
IDD Register (Clean & CHQUE
Docy)
Inward Usnace Bills for UBILL
collection

Description
Advance against Bills for Collection
Advance against Usance Bills for Collection
IBD Sub type Usance Bills
Cheques NCC
Cheques Others
Demand Bills
Cheques NCC
Cheques Others
Demand Bills
IDD Subtype Bills Register
IDD Subtype Cheque Register
Usance Bills

Page 228 of 294

IUBCP
OBD
OBD
OBD
ODBC
ODBC
ODBC
ODD
ODD
ODD
ODD
ODD
ODD
ODD
OUBC
RPA

Inward Usance Bills for

Coll/Par
OBD Bills Discounted Reg
OBD Bills Discounted Reg
OBD Bills Discounted Reg
Outward Bills for Collection
Outward Bills for Collection
Outward Bills for Collection
ODD
Bills/Cheques
Register
ODD
Bills/Cheques
Register
ODD
Bills/Cheques
Register
ODD
Bills/Cheques
Register
ODD
Bills/Cheques
Register
ODD
Bills/Cheques
Register
ODD
Bills/Cheques
Register
OUTWD Usance Bills for
Collection
Refund Payment Account

UBILL

Usance Bills

OBDLC
OLD
Usace
C-NCC
C-OTH
DBILL

OBD- Subtype Letter of Creditt

Old ODD/OBD bills with no rebate intt.
OBD subtype Usance Regiser
Cheques-NCC
Cheques-Others
Demand Bills
ODD subtype bills Register
ODD subtype cheques Register
ODD instant credit sub register
ODD Local cheques purchased Reg.
ODD subtype National Clg. Reg.
ODD subtype LC (sight) Register
Old ODD/OBD Bills with no rebate intt.

UBILL

Usance Bills

RPA

Refund Payable Account

Using these registers and sub registers user can handle Inward as well as Outward bills like Clean
Bills (Cheques/DD), Documentary Bills, Sight or Usance. All Bills are required to be lodged and
then depending upon the type of bills they can be purchased, discounted or negotiated.
1. Invoking the Option
Type BM in the menu option field and press Enter, the following screen will appear:

Screen No. 1

Page 229 of 294

Press F2 to see the different functions that can be carried out through this menu option. The list
will display the various functions that can be performed through this menu option. These functions
are as follows:
Function
G Lodge
T Transfer
F Free Delivery
R
N
Q
E

Realise
Dishonour
Protest
Proceeds
received

S
O
Z
U
D
M
C
V
X
I
P

Release Margin
Recovery
Close a bill
Interest Run
Delete
Modify
Copy
Verify
Cancel
Inquire
Purchase

Description
Lodging a Bill
Transfer a Bill for purchase to Collection & vice versa
No realization will come. Proceeds have been adjusted between the
parties.
Realisation of Bills lodged.
Dishonour a Bill that means the Bill has been returned unpaid.
To mark a bill as Protested.
If intimation is received about realisation from branch or bank that the
proceeds of bill has been received by them but the actual proceeds have
yet to be received at ours.
If the margin is to be released before realization of bill.
If recovery is to be made in the bill which has been dishonoured.
To mark a bill as closed after recovery.
Periodical interest run on purchased bills before its realization or recovery.
Delete a bill which has been lodged but not verified.
Modify a bill.
Copy the details of another lodged bill.
Verify the previous process.
Cancel the changes of previous process before their verification.
Inquire a bill.
Purchase/Discount the bill.

screen no. 2
As each bill is required to be lodged first, here below we will explain how to lodge a bill. While
lodging a bill we have to go through three screens which are having various fields related to
different type of bills. Some fields are protected and some are activated depending upon the type
of bill we are lodging. We are explaining all the fields and where they are applicable in different
type of bill.
Page 230 of 294

2. HOW TO LODGE AN ODBC BILL

Step Action
1.
Invoke menu option BM and press Enter key.
2.
Enter Function. Select a function i.e. G for lodging a bill and press Tab key three times,
the cursor will appear at the Reg. Type field.
3.
Enter Register Type in which the bill is to be lodged. Or select the Register Type from
the list which appears by pressing F2 and then press Shift+F4 key for selection. Here let
us select Reg. Type as ODBC. Press Tab or Enter key to go on to next field i.e. Reg
Sub Type.
4.
Enter Reg Sub Type as DBILL or select the Reg. Sub Type from the list & Press F4 to
go on to next block.
5.
As soon as F4 key is pressed the cursor will go on to Lodger A/c field and system shall
also display Bill id No. duly generated. If at this stage if Bills detail has not been entered
and the user comes out of the screen this Bill id shall go waste. System shall generate a
new Bill id no. if the user again starts to lodge the bill.
Enter Lodger A/c number (in which the proceeds of the bill shall be credited on realization
of ODBC) and press F11. The system shall display the customer id and the name of
account holder and the cursor will appear at the Bill Amt.

clipping no. 1
If the account number is not available or a new account shall be opened after realization
of ODBC proceeds, then Lodger A/c field and next field can be left blank and in third field
shown against the Lodger A/c, the name of the customer can be entered which the system
shall accept as shown in clipping no. 2.

clipping no. 2
6.
7.
8.
9.

Enter Bill Amt and press Tab to go on to the Date field.

Enter date of the bill being lodged and press Tab, the cursor will go on Drawee field.
Enter the drawee name in the last field and address in the fields provided and press Tab to
go to the next field i.e. Coll. Br.
Coll. Br. This is the field where the Bank, Branch & Name of the Bank where the bill is
being sent for collection is to be entered. Enter Banks Code as 024 for PNB, 001 for RBI,
002 for SBI etc. and Branch Distinctive Number of the branch where the bill is being sent
for collection. The detail of the Bank Code & Branch Code can be selected from the list
which is available by press F2. Further, if such detail is not available then the name of the
bank can be entered in the last field. Press Tab and enter the Address of the collecting
Page 231 of 294

Bank, Branch. Both type of data entry can be seen from the clipping no. 3 & clipping no. 4
as shown below. Press F4 to go to the field Drawer.

clipping no. 3

10.

11.
12.

13.
14.
15.
16.

17.

18.

clipping no. 4
Generally, the drawers name shall be picked by the system from the Lodger A/c, but in
case the drawer of the bill is different from the said account name then name & address of
the drawer can be entered in the fields provided. Press Tab, the cursor will appear at the
Lodger Ref. Field.
Enter Lodger Ref. i.e. customer reference number, if any, in the Lodger Ref. Field & press
Tab to go on to the Field Carrier Code.
Enter Transporter Operator Code in Carrier Code field, from the list which can be seen by
pressing F2. Carrier Code is the Goods Transport Co. Code, through which the drawer has
sent the goods to the drawee. Press F6 to go on to next page & the cursor will appear at
the field on Transit Period.
Transit Period: this is the normal transit period within which the proceeds should be
realized if the period is more, then the same can be modified. Press Tab to go on to the
next field i.e. Grace Period.
By default the grace period is given 3 days if the same is required to be modified that can be
done. Press Tab to go on to the next field.
Tenor Desc is the field for displaying the usance period if the bill not otherwise payable
than on demand, then sight is tenor which will appear here. Press Tab the cursor will move
on to the Due Date field.
Due Date is the date within which the bill should be realized. This is calculated on the basis
of number of days of Transit Period plus Grace Period added to the Lodge Date. In case of
Usance Bill this date shall be the date of tenor plus grace period. Press Tab to go on to the
next field i.e. DC/DPG/Co-Acpt?
DC/DPG/Co-Acpt? This field is applicable in case the documents are presented under
Documentary Credited of which the detail has been captured under IDCM in case of
outward bill. In such case L can be entered for the documents presented under LC
otherwise N is to remain. Press Tab for next field.
Bill Group Code: select the appropriate code from the list if the bill is Clean, Documentary,
Page 232 of 294

19.
20.
21.

22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.

for ATM entries, Cheques for RCC. Press Tab to go on to next field.
Comm. Tbl. Code: Select the appropriate table code for charging the commission from the
list which is available by pressing F2 Key & press Tab to go on to the next field TBR?
TBR? Enter Y if the bill is under Trade Bill Rediscounting scheme which is not relevant
here. Press Tab to on to the field Non Pay/Acpt Dt.
Non Pay/Acpt Dt.: this field is applicable in case of usance bills only when the bill not
accepted or has not been paid then the date of non acceptance or non payment is entered
here under modification mode under the menu option BM only. Press Tab to go to the next
field i.e. Invoice Dt.
Invoice Dt.: Enter the date of Invoice if submitted alongwith the bill. Press Tab for the next
field Transport Dt.
Transport Dt.: Enter the date of GR or RR i.e. the date on which the goods have been
transported to the Drawee. Press F6 to go on to the next page, the cursor will appear at the
Doc List Field.
Doc. List: Enter the detail of documents. If the documents are more which require more
space to enter then Press Ctrl E the system will display 6 more lines to enter the detail.
Press F4 and then Tab, the cursor will appear at OD Intr % field.
OD Intr.% : Enter OD interest chargeable to the party, if any. Press Tab, the cursor will
appear at the next field i.e. Free Code 1
Free Code 1, 2 & 3 fields can be entered if applicable from the list available by pressing F2.
Press Tab to go the field Rebate Date
Rebate Date enter the date upto which the rebate is to be allowed. Press Tab to go to
Rebate % field.
Rebate % Enter the percentage of which the rebate is to be allowed. Press Tab to go to
Rebate Amount Field.
Rebate Amount : Enter the amount if the rebate amount is absolute instead of percentage
as explained in the previous field. Press Tab to go to Health Code field.
Health Code: Enter the applicable code from the list. The next two fields are not required
to be entered in case of ODBC. Press F6 to come on to the first page of General Details of
Bill. Press F4 to go to the Option Field.
Press F10 to commit & note down the Bill id no. in full.
Verify the Bill.

3. Verification of ODBC (Bill Lodged)

Verification of Bill Lodged can also be done through the menu option BM by the user other than
who has lodged it.
How to verify a Bill Lodged.
1. Invoke menu option BM.
2. Enter V in the Function Field and press Tab 3 times to go to the Bill Id Field.
3. Enter Bill Id number & Press F4, the cursor will appear at the Option Field as shown
below.

clipping 5
Page 233 of 294

4.

5.
6.

Enter M in the Option field and Press F4, the cursor will appear above the name of the
Lodger A/c field. See below in clipping 6.

clipping 6
Press F6 three times to visit the other screens of General Details of Bill & then Press F4 to
come on to the Option field. Finally Press F10 to save/commit the verification.
Press F3 to come out of the BM screen.

3. LODGING OF CHEQUE IN ODBC

To describe the procedure please look at the steps described above under the head 2. HOW TO
LODGE AN ODBC BILL above. The applicable steps have been described hereunder.
Steps Action
1.
Repeat
2.
3.
4.
Enter Reg Sub Type as C-OTH or select the Reg. Sub Type from the list & Press F4 to
go on to next block.
5.
Follow the procedure as described at Step No. 5 above. However, in place of Bill
amount we have to enter the Cheque Amount.
6.
Repeat procedure as described at Step No. 6 however in place of Date of Bill, here it will
be the date of cheque.
7.
Repeat procedure as described at Step No. 7 above.
8.
Repeat procedure as described at Step No. 8, however, in place of Drawee, the name
shall be the Banks name on which the cheque is drawn.
9.
Follow the procedure as described at no. 9, 10, 11 under the head HOW TO LODGE
AN ODBC BILL.
10.
11.
12.
Field for Carrier Code. This is not applicable here.
13.
Normal Transit Period in which the proceeds should be realized is displayed by the
system. If required, this period can be changed.
24.
Go to step no. 24 and enter the cheque no. and other details of cheque.
30.
Press F6 to come on to the first page of General Detail & press F4 to come on to the
Field.
31.
Repeat
32.
REALISATION OF ODBC BILL
(Realisation proceeds received from our Banks Branch)
For realizing a bill, we have to execute menu option BM.
1. Execute menu option BM.
2. Enter R in the Function field and Press Tab key three times or Press F4 once, the
cursor will appear on Bill ID field.
Page 234 of 294

3. Enter Bill ID of the bill to be realized & Press F4, a new screen will appear and the
cursor will appear on the Tran Type field as shown below:

screen1
System by default will show the Bill Amount and Transaction Amount. Press Tab key 3 times to
bring the cursor on the Other Bank Charge field. This field is applicable in case the proceeds
have been received from other bank and they have deducted some charges, then the amount of
charges can be entered here. This field is having (-) Minus Sign so System will automatically
deduct charges, entered in this field, from the proceeds to be credited to the lodgers account.
Press Tab to go on the field Rebate.
4. Like Other Bank Charge, Rebate is also minus field, that means any amount entered
here will be deducted from the proceeds of ODBC Bill to be credited to the Lodgers
Account. So if Rebate has been allowed to the Drawee of the Bill then that amount
can be entered here. Press Tab key to go to OD Int Charged/Recd field.
5. In both the cases whether OD Int Charged or Received from the partys party that
will be an additional amount of bill. So system adds the amount charged/received on
account of OD Interest. A Plus (+) sign is predefined before this field. Press Tab to
go to the next field.
6. C Form Amount: Enter any amount received on account of non submission of C
Form and in lieu there of some amount (as per drawers instructions) has been paid
by the partys party. This is a Plus field. Any amount entered in this field will be
added to the Bills Amount. Press Tab to go to the next field.
7. Misc Amount: This is the field provided for the amount, if any, either less or more
received then the Bills Amount, for any reason. Enter that amount which can be
either added to the Bills Amount or deducted from the bills amount, by modifying the
Minus or Plus Sign displayed in the field, as shown below, to be credited to the
Lodgers Account.

screen 2

Page 235 of 294

Press F4, the system will display the transaction screen displaying the system generated
Transaction ID, as shown below:
Note down this Transaction Id.

screen 3
8. Enter L in the Option field and Press F4, the system shall display list of all the Part
Trans it has generated as shown below:

screen4
Press F3 to come out of this page, the cursor will blink at Option Field. Press Down
Arrow Key 9 times, the part tran screen will keep on changing and new screen for
Debit part tran of Balance with Head Office (PNB) will appear.
9. Modify this part tran by inserting M in the Option Field and Press F4, the cursor will
appear at the Account field. Press Tab or ENTER key 8 times to go to Visit Screen
field or click by mouse on the Visit Screen Field. Press F1 to see the valid values
which can be entered. The following window will appear showing the values.

Page 236 of 294

screen 5
10. Press F3 to come out of this window and Enter R in the Visit Screen Field for
responding Head Office Entry as the Realisation Proceeds are received either in the
form of TPO or Advice. Press F4, the cursor will again appear at the Option field.
11. Enter S (for Additional Detail) in the Option Field and Press F4. The following
screen will appear and on pressing F2 at the Category Code field another window
as displayed below will appear showing list of all category codes.

screen 6
12. Either Select from the list MT by pressing Shift+F4 or enter MT in the Category
Code Field if realization is received through TPO or enter or select from the list
BCADV BC/FOBC RELISATION ADVICE in case the realization is received through
Advice & Press F4. The following screen will appear:

Page 237 of 294

screen 7
13. Bank Code & Branch Code by default will be picked up by the system from the
General Details of the Bill where we had entered Collecting Bank Branch. Enter
TPO No. i.e. Branch Serial No. of TPO in the Advice No. field or you may give an
advice no. for the Advice received.
14. Enter TPO issue date/Advice Issue date in the Field Advice Date. Extn. Cntr.
Code will remain 00.
15. Enter Duplicate Advice? as N if the TPO or Advice is not duplicate one.
16. Enter TPO Printed Serial No. of 9 Digits (like POY852741) by deleting Bill no.
already populated by the system (see screen 8). But in case of Advice the Bill no.
will not be changed. Press F4, the cursor will come back to the Option field of the
the HO Part Tran.

screen 8
17. Enter A in the Option Field for Accept & Quit, & Press F4.
18. The cursor will appear at the Option field of General Details of Bill. Press F10 to
commit or save.
19. Verify this Realisation through other user.

Page 238 of 294

VERIFICATION OF BILLS REALISATION

1. Execute menu option BM.
2. Enter V in Function Field and Press F4 once or Tab key 3 times the cursor will appear at
BILL ID field.
3. Enter Bill Id. Of the bill REALISATION OF which is to be verified and Press F4. All the
particulars entered in General Detail of the bill will appear and cursor will appear at the
Option Field.
4. Enter R in Option Field and Press F4, the system shall display the screen of Transaction
Type and Bill Amount, Transaction Amt, Charges etc. Press F4 again the Transaction Part
Tran screen will appear and cursor at the Option Field. If you want to visit all the part
trans then press down arrow key and go to next part tran. Keep on doing that the user can
visit all the part trans. Also he can see the list of transactions on entering L in the Option
field and by pressing F4.
5. Having seen all the part trans the user can Accept the transactions by inserting A in the
Option Field and pressing F4, the system shall display the cursor in the Option Field on
the First Screen of General Details of Bill.
6. Press F10, to commit. The Bill stands verified.
NOTE: THE USER MUST SEE THE STATUS OF TRANSACTION WHETHER THE SAME
HAS BEEN POSTED BY THE SYTEM OR NOT. THE SYSTEM SHALL NOT POST THE
TRANSACTION IN CASE IT ENCOUNTERS ANY EXCEPTION IN THE ACCOUNT IN SUCH
SCENERIO THE LODGERS ACCOUNT WILL NOT BE POSTED WITH THE PROCEEDS OF
THE BILL.
REPORTS & INQUIRIES
REPORTS FOR TAKING OUTSTANDING OF BILLS.
for all type of Collection Bills Outward & Inward Both
BRCR
for all type of Purchase & Discounted Bills Outward & Inward Both
BRBPR
PNBRPT
Option No. 8 sub option as follows:
1. Inland Bill Return Schedule
2. Inward Bills Realisation Advice
3. Intimation of Bill Receipt to Drawee
4. Intimation of Bill Acceptance to Presenting Bank/Party
5. Bill Forwading Schedule of OBD
6. For Sending Bank Intimating Realisation
7. IDBC(BRANCES) for Cheques
8. Forwading of ODBC OUBC
9. Intimation Schedule of Drawee
10.Forwading Schedule For ODD
11.Forwarding Letter to ILC(AMEDMENTS)
12.Intimation of Dishonour IDBC(P)/Branches
13.Realisation Adv For Parties / Other Bank
14.Reminder For Fate of Bills
15.Forwading of ODBC/OUBC for RCC
16.Forwading of ODD for RCC
PNBREP
Option No. 8 sub option as follows:
1. Statement of Drawee Bills
2. Unauthorised Demand Draft Purchased
Page 239 of 294

BI
BP
BEHI
BLIP
BRRCR
BRRBPR
CABR
DRDBR
LCDDR
LCDMR
BILLR
FI

for Bills Inquiry

for Printing of Bills Inquiry (BI)
for Bills Events History Inquiry
for payment of Over Due Interest on delayed realization
Bills Register Reports Collections
Bills Register Reports Bills Purchased
Co-accepted Bills
Drawee wise Dishonoured Bills Report
Large Amount Cheque Discounted Daily Reporting
Large Amount Cheque Discounted Monthly Reporting
Outward Bills Reminders
Fate Inquiry

Page 240 of 294

Prepared By : Anil Kumar Aggarwal

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
VIEWING, PRINTING, DOWNLOADING OF REPORT
Finacle has provision that any report generated which appear in PR menu can be viewed on the
Monitor, can be printed, can be downloaded on PC or any other media and of course can also be
deleted if required. How to View, Print, Download and Delete a report is explained below:
Viewing of Report
STEPS ACTION
1.
Invoke PR Menu Option and bring the cursor against the report to be viewed by
pressing down arrow key or up arrow key.
2.
Enter T in the square provided as shown below and press F10.

3.

4.

5.

An other screen will appear displaying the report opted for viewing. Press F4 to go to
next page of the report and type and press F4 to view previous page of the report. If
you want to go on to the particular number of page of the report then enter page
number and press F4 the system shall display that page of the report.
Enter Q in the option bar, as shown below, and press F4 to come out of the report
window.

If more than one report is to be viewed one after the other then bring the cursor against
the report to be viewed, enter T in the square as shown above in step no. 2 and press
down arrow key or up arrow key for bringing the cursor against other report and
again enter T in the square and press F10 to view. Thus more than one report can be
selected to view on the monitor.

Page 241 of 294

Printing a Report
STEPS ACTION
1. Start ILinkweb, short cut/icon may be available on desktop and ensure that Listening on
port : 9999 appear on the screen, as shown below, minimize it by clicking on (minimize)
sign.

2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

7.

Invoke PR Menu Option and bring the cursor against the report to be printed by
pressing down arrow key or up arrow key.
Press Ctrl E key to explode, the system shall show the following screen:

Enter the number of copies to be printed and press Tab to come on to the next field.
If the file is not to be deleted after printing then change the flag Y to N and press F4,
the system will take to the PR menu screen.
Enter P in the field provided and press F10 for printing of report.

If the printing command for more than one report is to be given then repeat step no. 3
for the reports to be printed and then enter P in the square & press down arrow key or
up arrow key for bringing the cursor against the next report & again enter P in the
square as shown below:

Page 242 of 294

Press F10 to print these reports.

Deletion of Report
Step
1.

Action
Invoke PR Menu Option and bring the cursor against the report to be deleted by
pressing down arrow key or up arrow key. As shown below, the cursor is against the
report Statement of Accounts.

2.

Enter D in the field and press F10, the report will stand deleted. Similarly, if more than
one report is to be deleted in one stroke then enter D in the field as shown above for the
report (against which the cursor is) & press down arrow key or up arrow key to bring
the cursor against another report to be deleted. Repeat the step for deletion of more
reports and then press F10. All the reports against which D will appear (as shown
below) will stand deleted.

3.

Press F3 to come on to the main menu.

Page 243 of 294

Downloading of Report
Step Action
1.

Start ILinkweb, short cut/icon may be available on desktop and ensure that Listening on
port : 9999 appear on the screen, as shown below, minimize it by clicking on
(minimize) sign.

2.

Invoke PR Menu Option and bring the cursor against the report to be downloaded by
pressing down arrow key or up arrow key.
Press Ctrl E key to explode, the system shall show the following screen:

3.

4.

5.

Note down the file name of the report. Make sure that the alphabet in capital should be
noted down in capital and small should be noted down in small alphabet. The file name
starts after the directory name. As shown In the above screen the file name is
TMPCAAY2aO0A.RPT. Press F3 to come back to the main menu.
Invoke menu option PTW and enter sub-option T and press F4, as shown below.

Page 244 of 294

The system will show the other screen, displaying Enter file name as shown below.
Enter the file name & Press F4.

The system will show the screen shown in Step No. 6 below:
6.

Enter destination Directory that means the directory where the report is to be down
loaded, if on Hard Disk then enter C:\ & directory name if any (as shown above) else, if
the report is to be downloaded on Floppy then enter A:\ & directory name, if any, as
required by the system in the field provided. Press F4.
The report stands
downloaded. Enter Q & Press F4 twice to go back to the main menu.
7.

Double click on My Computer Icon on your Desktop as shown below:

On double clicking on My Computer icon the following screen will appear. Click on (C:) if
the report is downloaded on C: drive or click on (A : ) if the report is downloaded on
Floppy.

Page 245 of 294

8.

On clicking on drive as shown in the step no. 7, Double click on the report name which has
been downloaded as shown below:

9.

System shall show the report downloaded as shown below:

Page 246 of 294

Prepared by: Makarand B Kedare

Sr. Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
DBA ACTIVITIES
On day to day basis, DBA has to perform various activities like Morning Arrangement, Signature
uploading and helping the users to log in if the user_id is locked etc. DBA shall also perform some
of the activities as the need may be like Marking holidays, Transferring A/Cs from Inoperative to
Operative and vice-e-versa, Transferring FDs to Overdue etc.
A. OPEN CASH AND TRANSFER TRANSACTIONS
Presently, the Data Centre does the Day Begin activity for all the SOLs. The DBA shall open cash
and transfer transactions for the day; otherwise the system shall not allow the users of the SOL to
enter any kind of transactions in Finacle.
a. OCST (Open Cash Transactions) DBA shall invoke this menu option and after
confirming the Service Outlet code, he shall press F10.
b. OXFT (Open Transfer Transactions) DBA shall invoke this menu option and after
confirming the Sol id, he shall press F10.
DBA shall view/print reports generated by the system through menu option PR.
MORNING ARRANGEMENT
B. INVENTORY MOVEMENT AUTHORIZERS FOR DOUBLE LOCK
Whenever inventory is moved in or out of the Double Lock (DL), while verifying the movement,
system asks the finacle user_ids & passwords of DL authorizers. As a part of morning
arrangement, DBA shall enter the finacle user_ids of the officials who will be authorizing the
movement in or out of the DL on the day. This shall be (generally) done before starting any
movement of inventory.
Menu option IMAUM (Inventory Movement Auth Maintenance)

Screen 1
1. Function M (Modify)
2. Inventory Location Class Enter DL (Double Lock). Press F4. System shall display
user_ids of officials who are presently authorizers for DL.
Page 247 of 294

3. DBA shall enter the user_id(s) of the official(s) who will be authorizing the movement of
inventory in our out of DL.
4. Work Class for Delete DBA shall enter the minimum work class required for authorizing
inventory movement in this field; list of work classes can be seen by pressing F2 in this
field. If the work class of both the user_ids specified in above two fields is less than the
work class specified in Work Class for Delete, then one more user having the work class
>= work class for delete has to enter his user_id and password to complete authorization of
inventory transaction.
E.g. Lets assume that the work class of Auth user_1 is 030 (Spl. Asstt.) and Auth user_2 is
040 (Officer). If the DBA enters Work class for delete as 060 (Manager), then while verifying
the movement of inventory in or out of the DL, the system shall not allow the verification
operation until and unless a user of work class >=060 enters his/her user_id and password.
5. After making necessary changes in the user_ids, DBA shall press F10 to commit.
Changes in IMAUM does not need any verification.
Note If any inventory movement transaction is entered (but not yet verified) in or out of DL,
and then if the DBA changes either or both Auth User_ids, the system shall ask user_ids and
passwords of users whose user_ids were available while entering the inventory movement
transaction of DL. Therefore, it is always advisable to enter user_id of authorizers through this
menu option before any IMC (inventory Movement) operation takes place.
C. USER PROFILE MAINTENANCE
Morning arrangement activities could be
a. Allowing the officials to officiate in the higher work class and accordingly changing
the passing powers.
b. Allowing the officials to post intersol transactions and accordingly changing the
passing powers for intersol transactions
c. Allowing the officials to proxy post transactions
d. Marking of leaves of officials
e. Allowing the officials to view even the deleted signatures
f. Removing any or all the above permissions given to the officials etc.
All these permissions can be given to the officials by the DBA using menu option UPM (User
Profile Maintenance).
Menu option UPM
1. Function M (Modify). Please note that the DBA can not add a new user.
2. User Id Enter the user id of the officials whose user profile is to be modified. Press F4.
System shall display user profile of the user_id under consideration, provided the record is
not in deleted state.
3. Sol Id By default system displays sol id of the user. DBA can not change sol id.
4. Emp id - By default system displays employee_id of the user. DBA can not change emp id.
5. User Tenor Valid values are C (Captive) and F (Free). If the user is to be allowed to enter
as also post intersol transactions, then the DBA shall enter F in this field. If the value is C
(Captive) in this field, the system shall not allow the user even to enter intersol transactions.
6. Remote Access Default is N, shall not be changed.

Page 248 of 294

Screen 2
7. Auth User This field contains user_id of the official who will be authorizing the inventory
movement in the absence of the user_id under consideration.
Example i.

On yesterday a Demand Drafts (DD25) booklet with alpha series XYZ and printed
Serial No. 123001 to 123025 was moved/issued to the employee having emp id
79710 for issuing DDs.
ii. Today, the above employee (i.e. 79710) is absent and another employee with emp id
12345 is handling DD issue.
iii. As regards, the inventory (DDs) must be available at employee 12345s location for
printing the DDs. So the inventory unutilized by 79710 need to be issued/moved to
the user with employee id 12345.
iv. As regards, if the inventory is to be moved from one employee location to another
employee location, the system asks user_id and password of both the employees.
v. But, the employee 79710 is absent. Under such circumstances, the user whose
user_id is entered in Auth. User field can enter his own user_id and password to
authorize the movement of inventory from 79710s location to 12345s location.
8. Appl. Names System does not allow the DBA to change value in this field. This field is
used to define the activities of the user. E.g. if the user is performing general activities (like
opening a/c, transactions etc.) then this field shall have GU as the value, in the similar way
IN is for Inspectors/Auditors, DB for System Incharge of branches, UP for upload users etc.
9. Work Class As per the designation of the user, DBA shall enter work class of the user or
select the same from the list. If the official is promoted and posted in the same branch, then
DBA shall change the work class as per the designation of the user. E.g. if the official is
Senior Manager, DBA shall enter 070 in this field.
10. Temp Work Class This field is need is to be entered for allowing the user to officiate in
higher work class (designation) for a certain period. E.g. If a Special Assistant is officiating
as an Officer in the branch then DBA shall enter work class of officer (i.e. 040) in this field.
11. Effective up to Mandatory if Temp. Work Class is entered. If the user is officiating in the
higher work class (designation), then DBA shall enter the date up to which the user will be
officiating.
12. Login Time Low/High If the user is to be restricted for working in finacle between specific
time period the same can be entered in hours : minutes : seconds in these two fields.

Page 249 of 294

13. Max. Inactive Time If the user does not operate any menu option for the minutes entered
in this field, then the system shall automatically terminate users session.
14. Proxy Post Alwd Enter Y if the user is to be allowed for proxy posting, otherwise enter N
in this field.
15. Acct. Expy Date Enter the date up to which the user id shall be active. System shall
automatically delete the user_id after the date as entered in this field.
16. User Disabled Upto If the user is going on leave (or not coming to the office), DBA shall
enter the date up to which the user id is to be disabled. If the user joins before the date as
entered in this field, the DBA shall delete the date entered in this field; otherwise, if the user
tries to login in the Finacle, the system shall display a message User Account has been
disabled and shall not allow the user to login.
17. User Password In case the user forgets his password, the same can be initialized by the
DBA through this field.
18. Next three fields i.e. User Lang Code, Virtual user id & Default Term id, need not be
changed for users.
19. There are some display fields available in this page
a. Tot Mod times system maintains a count of modifications done by the DBA in a
particular users profile.
b. Created By User Id of the official who has created the profile of user_id.
c. Created On Date on which the user profile was created.
d. Modified By User id of the official who has last modified the profile.
e. Modified On Date on which the profile was last modified.
f. New User This flag is automatically set to Y until the user logs in first time and
changes his password. This flag is also set to Y, in case the DBA reinitializes the
password of the user and until he logs in and changes his password.
g. User Logged on If the user is logged on, system shall display Y against this display
field.
h. Delete Flag If the users profile is deleted, system shall display Y against this
display field.
20. Press F6 to go to Next Page.

Screen 3
21. System displays Scheme Type-wise Read / Write access given to the user.
22. If the Access Type is W then it means that the user is permitted to add/modify/delete
records/transactions in the scheme type. If the Access Type is R (Read Only) then it means
that the user is permitted to only inquire or take reports in the scheme type. E.g In case of
Inspectors/Auditors, for all the 14 scheme types, the permission is set to R (Read Only).
23. Press F6 to go to the Next Page.

Screen 4
Page 250 of 294

24. This page is about the permissions given to the user for viewing signatures. If the Image
Access Code is
a. AL - the user is allowed to view active accounts signatures.
b. DE - the user is allowed to view deleted signatures
c. IN the user is allowed to view Inoperative accounts signatures.
25. If the user is to be permitted to view Deleted signatures, the DBA shall type DE in the
Image Access Code field and press Down / Up arrow. Similar method should be followed
for giving access to view Inoperative Accounts signatures.
26. E.g. If the user was allowed to view Inoperative Signatures and now if the permission is to
be revoked, then the DBA shall type Y in Del field against the IN image access code and
press down/up arrow.
27. Press F6 to go to the Next Page.

Screen 5
28. The passing powers of the user shall be entered in this page.
29. The DBA shall enter currency code in the first field, for which the passing powers are to be
given.
30. In the next three fields, passing powers for Cash, Transfer and Clearing transactions of
users own branchs A/Cs respectively.
31. If the user tenor is Free, then the Intersol passing powers for Cash, Transfer & Clearing
transactions shall be entered in the next three fields respectively.
32. To enter passing powers for another currency, DBA shall press Down arrow. The system
shall bring blank record. DBA shall follow steps 29 to 31 for giving the passing powers for
the currency.
33. After doing necessary modifications, DBA shall Press F10 (commit) to make the
changes effective.
CASE STUDY 1 - If a user attempts to login into Finacle for more than 3 times with wrong
password.
1. The system deletes users profile.
2. DBA shall undelete users profile.
a. Menu option UPM
b. Function U (Undelete)
c. User Id Enter the user id. Press F4. Press F10 (commit).
3. DBA shall reinitialize users password.
a. Menu option UPM
b. Function M (Modify)
c. User Id Enter the user id. Press F4.
d. System shall display users profile.
e. User Password - DBA shall enter new password for the user. Press F10 (commit)
4. DBA shall ask the user to login with the new password.
Page 251 of 294

5. When the user enters his user id, new password and clicks on Login button, system
shall display an Alert message You are a new user hence please change your password.
6. User shall click mouse on OK button. System shall display two more fields.
7. New Password User shall click mouse in the field and enter new password.
8. Confirm New Password User shall re-enter the same password as entered in the
previous field.
CASE STUDY 2 - Allowing the user to officiate in higher designation (work class).
Example - Changes to be done in UPM for allowing a Special Assistant to officiate as Officer.
DBA shall invoke menu option UPM.
1. Menu option UPM
2. Function M (Modify)
3. User Id Enter the user Id whose user profile is to be changed. Press F4. System shall
display first page of users profile.
4. User Tenor (optional) If the user is to be enabled for entering/posting Intersol
transactions, the change this flag to F (Free)
5. Temp Work Class Enter the work class (designation) in which the user is to be enabled
to officiate. Alternatively, DBA can press F2 for the list and select the work class by
pressing Shift+F4. In our example we will enter 040 (Officer).
6. Effective upto Enter the date up to which the user is to be allowed to officiate temporarily
in the higher designation (work class).
7. Press F6 three times to come to Passing Powers screen.
8. Change the passing powers of the user as applicable for higher work class (designation)
in which the user is to be enabled for officiating. In our example, we will enter passing
powers as applicable for Officer Work Class.
9. Press F10 (commit) to save changes done.
System shall automatically restrict the user from officiating in the higher work class after the
date as entered in Effective Upto. BUT, system shall not automatically modify the passing
powers back to the users actual (permanent) work class. DBA shall change the passing
powers of the user as per his actual (permanent) work class, once the officiating is over;
otherwise the user will enjoy passing powers of higher work class although he is not
officiating in the higher work class.
D. SAC (User Login Maintenance)
Sometimes DBA need to delete (terminate) users current session, as because sometimes
system displays a message User has already logged on when the user tries to login into
Finacle.

Screen 6
1. Function Type D (Delete)
2. Users/Batches/Daemons Type U (Users)
Page 252 of 294

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

User id Enter user id of the user whose session is to be deleted/terminated.

Press F4.
System shall display users current session.
Press Shift+F4 to select the record.
Press F10.
The user shall then try to login.

E. SOLSTAT - SERVICE OUTLET STATUS INQUIRY

After every stage like BOD & before proceeding & after completion of ABH, SOLEOD
operations, DBA shall always check the status of his or other SOL through this menu option.
After invoking this menu option, enter the service outlet code of SOL and press F4. System
shall display Today date, Next Date and Status of the SOL(s). While checking the status, DBA
shall always check Today and Next Dates carefully. If the status is
ISOLOP is Completed means the BOD is done.
CSOLOP is completed means EOD is done.
Central BOD is completed- means Data Centre has done its BOD, but users
branchs SOLBOD is not done.
Central EOD is completed - means Data Centre has done its EOD.
ABH is completed means ABH has been successfully done.
F. ABH AFTER BUSINESS HOURS
After completing all the jobs of the day, DBA shall run ABH menu option. ILINKWEB must be
running in the background.
Before invoking this menu option, DBA shall ensure that all the transactions are in verified
state, otherwise the system shall display a message There are trans in entered status for your
SOL. Plz post all trans first, and shall not allow to proceed further. System shall also not allow
the DBA to proceed, if TFDDHOC menu option (to be run by General User having work class
as 060 Manager and User Tenor as Free) has not run already.
After completion of ABH process, DBA shall check the status of SOL through SOLSTAT menu
option. System shall display status as ABH is Completed.
G. SOLEOD SERVICE OUTLET EOD
After completing ABH process, user shall again check that there are no transactions in
entered/posted but not verified state, using menu option FTI.
If the ABH is successfully done, DBA shall proceed with SOLEOD process. ILINKWEB must be
running in the background.
After completion of SOLEOD process, DBA shall check the status of SOL through SOLSTAT
menu option. System shall display status as CSOLOP is Completed.
H. LDIMG IMAGE UPLOAD UTILITY
DBA shall use menu option LDIMG to upload signatures from PC to the Data Centre. Before
invoking this menu option, DBA shall ensure that the ILINKWEB is up and running in the
background. After the completion of upload process, DBA shall view/print status of upload
report through menu option PR.

Page 253 of 294

I. CTM (CALENDAR TABLE MAINTENANCE)

Menu option CTM shall be used to add/modify/delete month-wise calendar of his own SOL.
Add Calendar
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

7.
8.

Function A (Add)
Calendar Type 3 (Branch)
Service Outlet Enter service outlet code.
Mon & year e.g. if the calendar for the month of August2004 is to be added, then enter
082004, likewise for other months. Press F4. If the calendar already exists in the system, it
shall display a message Record already exists, otherwise it shall activate the calendar.
System shall display days and dates. Next to every record, it shall display two fields.
In the first field, DBA shall
a. enter Y, if it is to be marked as holiday and in the next field he shall enter the text of
holiday e.g. Republic Day etc.
b. enter C, if it is to be marked as cautioned holiday and in the next field he shall enter
the text of holiday e.g. Idul Fitr etc.
c. leave the field blank, if the date is not to be marked as holiday.
User shall press F6 to go to next page of the calendar.
After adding the calendar, user shall press F10 to save the calendar.

If the calendar record already exists and any holiday is to be added/removed, user shall use
function M to do so.
J. TRANSFER TERM DEPOSITS TO OVERDUE
Before proceeding for the Day End of the SOL, DBA shall transfer the Term Deposits matured
today but not renewed/closed by the customers to Overdue GL Subhead using menu option
TXOD.
System shall transfer only such Term Deposits to Overdue GL subhead in which Interest &
TDS (if applicable) calculations are up to date.
System shall also create transactions in verified state of debiting and crediting back the same
Fixed Deposit A/c. System shall change the GL Subhead of FD from 10100 to 03152 (C/A
Overdue). After executing TXOD menu option, DBA shall view/print the report through menu
option PR.
K. INOPACTF TRANSFER ACCOUNTS TO INOPERATIVE CATEGORY
On the last working day of every calendar year, after the Begin of Day (BOD), DBA shall invoke
menu option INOPACTF to transfer accounts in which customer induced transactions have not
taken place in the last three years to Inoperative category.
This option changes GL Subhead of A/c from Operative category (GL Subhead 05100 for SF &
03100 for CA) to Inoperative Category (GL Subhead 03404 for SF & 03405 for CA below 10
years) and Account status from Active to Dormant (Inoperative in banking terminology).
If an account remains Inoperative others category for 7 years & above, this option transfers
such accounts to Inoperative over 10 years category (GL Subhead 03304 for SF & 03305 for
CA).
The system creates a transaction debiting and crediting back the same account with the
balance outstanding. Please use menu option FTI & enter above GL Subhead codes and press
F4. System shall display transaction Id. Please note the transaction id. User shall take print of
Page 254 of 294

transaction id through menu option FTR for keeping the same for record purpose. User can
check status of individual accounts through menu option ACI.
L. TACBSH TRANSFER ACCOUNTS BETWEEN SUB-HEADS
This menu can be invoked by DBA and the other users having work class 060 (Manager). This
menu option shall be used to transfer SB/CA accounts from Inoperative to Active GL subhead.
General user shall first change the status of account from Inactive/dormant to Active, using
menu option ACM (function - M) & in scheme details. The modifications done in ACM shall be
verified by another authorized user, using the same (ACM) menu option.
The DBA then shall invoke TACBSH menu option and change GL subhead from inoperative
(03404 for SF & 03405 for CA) to operative (05100 for SF & 03100 for CA).
M. UCS UPDATE CHEQUE STATUS
When any transaction is posted using a personal cheque of the customer, system updates
status of the cheque from Unused to Passed. Lets discuss the use of UCS through an
example.
A customer has been issued a cheque book SB10 bearing alpha series LKK and printed Nos.
from 123100 123109. One of the cheques has come through the clearing or TM, say 123002.
But the branch has passed the transaction with wrong cheque No. say 123003. Next time,
when the original cheque (i.e. 123003) is presented, system shall not allow to pass the cheque
and shall raise an error message Cheque Already Paid.
Under these circumstances, DBA can change the status of cheque No. 123003 from Passed
to Unused using this menu option. As also, DBA shall change the status of Cheque No.
123002 from Unused to Passed.

Screen 7
1. A/c No. Enter the A/c No.
2. Instrument No. Enter alpha series code in the first field and printed No. in the next field.
Press F4. System shall display Present Status of the instrument.
3. Update Instrument to DBA shall enter P if the status is to be updated to passed, or enter
U if the status is to be updated to Unused.
4. Press F10 to commit.

Page 255 of 294

Please note that UCS does not need any verification, therefore DBA shall use this menu option
meticulously.
N. BCCALC BATCH CHARGES CALCULATION
Menu option BCCALC shall be used to apply Ledger Folio Charges in SB & CA types of
accounts. Generally, this menu option needs to be run on half yearly frequency.
The DBA shall enter the criteria as per requirement.

Screen 8
1. Enter the criteria like Report to (mandatory), To Date (mandatory), Value date, Account
Nos. from/to, Scheme Code (mandatory), Scheme type, GL subhead from/to etc.
2. Ledger Folio Charges Y. Press F4.
3. System shall display print parameter acceptance form.
4. Fore/Background Enter F.
5. Print Required Enter N, if the printer is not physically connected to the terminal. Press
F10.
6. During this process, if the sufficient balance is available in the account, system shall debit
the charges in the account. System shall create such part-tran in verified state. The
accounts in which sufficient balances are not available, system shall create the part-trans
as also entire transaction in entered state. System allots one transaction id to entire batch
process.
7. DBA shall proxy-post such part trans of accounts; system automatically marks lien on such
accounts in which charge part trans are proxy posted.
8. Proxy posted transaction need to be reversed through menu option SPTM (by general
user), may be by debiting income-misc account.
9. DBA shall take the print of Ledger Folio Charges report through menu option PR. He shall
mark the accounts in which charges could not be debited. He shall then handover the list of
such accounts to respective section incharge, for recovery of charges as soon as the
balance is available in the account.
O. MBAL MINIMUM BALANCE CHARGES
This menu option is used to recover minimum balance charges from the SB & CA accounts
(including inoperative accounts). This menu option need to be separately run for each scheme
code e.g. SBGEN, CAGEN etc.

Page 256 of 294

Screen 9
1. Type appropriate option No. (as applicable to the status of branch). Press F4.
2. DBA shall enter the values as per the requirement of the system, like scheme code, SOL id
& date upto which the charges to be levied. After entering every value, DBA shall press F4
to proceed.
3. DBA shall invoke menu option PR.
4. Press Control+E (Explode) on the Minimum Balance Charges report and note the file name.
Please ensure to note the file name as per the case of the character. The file can also
be printed / viewed.
5. DBA then shall invoke menu option TTUM (Transfer Transaction Upload Maintenance)

Screen 10
6. Report to (Mandatory) Free text field e.g. Manager
7. Transaction sub type Enter BI (Bank Induced)
8. Upload File name enter the file name which was noted through PR. Please note that file
name is case sensitive. Otherwise, system shall display error message File does not exist
or has zero bytes.
9. Action Enter E for uploading the transaction in entered state, P for posted or V for verified
state.
10. Transaction Remarks Enter appropriate text .e.g Minimum Balance Charges.
11. Rename Input File After Upload Generally N.
12. Press F4.
13. Fore/Background F.
14. Print Required Enter N, if the printer is physically not connected to the terminal.
15. Press F10 to commit.
16. Please view/print the report through PR.

Page 257 of 294

Prepared By: Makarand B Kedare

Sr.Faculty, IT Centre, Faridabad
MEMO PAD LOOKUP & MAINTENANCE
Memo pad plays a very important role to make available additional information about a customer /
account to the users of all the SOLs on the CBS network as and when the account is accessed.
There are two types of memo pads in Finacle

System generated
User created

A. SYSTEM GENERATED MEMO PAD

In certain situations, system on its own create a memo pad entry. For example

When any modification is done in CUMM, but not verified, then until the verification of
CUMM is done, system shall raise an exception Memo Pad Exist whenever account of the
customer is accessed in TM or any other menu option. Once the modification in CUMM is
verified / cancelled, system shall automatically remove memo pad entry.

Same is the case, when any modification is done in account using menu option ACM, but
not verified.
Lets take an example. In a particular a/c, the mode of operation was SELF and now it is
changed to JOINT through menu option ACM. The modification done must be verified to
actually make it effective in the system. As regards, if it is not verified and during such
period a cheque with signature of only main a/c holder comes for payment, either at base
branch or at any other branch throughout the CBS network, how the user at the branch will
come to know that the mode of operation is changed to joint?
To make the user aware / caution about such modifications done but not verified, system
creates a memo pad entry.

Please note that the system created memo pad can not be deleted. System shall
automatically remove memo pad entry once the modifications done is either verified or
cancelled.
B. USER CREATED MEMO PAD
If a user wants to provide additional information about a particular customer / account, like
documentation incomplete or any such information / irregularity, he can create a memo pad
entry in the system on the account. System shall raise an exception Memo Pad Exist,
whenever the account is accessed at any of the CBS branches. Please refer to Adding a
Memo Pad Entry topic for further details.
C. MEMO PAD LOOKUP
As discussed earlier, if the system raises an exception Memo Pad Exist and if the user wants
to see the details of memo pad entry, he shall follow following steps 1. The system shall display exception as shown in Screen 1.
Page 258 of 294

Screen 1
2. User shall press Control+F9 to see memo pad details. System shall display Memo Pad
Lookup screen.
3. Function I (inquire). Press F4.
4. A/c No. Enter the A/c No. of which user wishes to inquire memo pad entry. Press F4.
System shall display list of memo pads like the one shown in Screen 2.

Screen 2
5. User can press Control+E (Explode) on the memo pad entry to further see the details.
System shall display details of memo pad like the one shown in Screen 3.

Page 259 of 294

Screen 3
6. From the topic and memo pad text, user can analyze the reason of memo pad. If the value
against the field Security is Y (System), then that means it is a system generated memo
pad.
7. If the user wants to know what modifications are done in the customer / account details, he
can press Control+E (Explode) on Audit Ref. No. field. System shall display table and key
values. User can press Control+E (Explode) on the record to further see the details of
modifications. System shall display the details of modifications like the one shown in Screen
4.

Screen 4
8. After analyzing the details of memo pad, user can press F3s until the system comes back
to the exception list.
9. If the user wishes to accept the exception, he can press F4; otherwise, he can press
F3.
D. ADDING A MEMO PAD ENTRY
User shall invoke any menu option (except PNBRPT, PNBREP, PTW etc.), if a memo pad is
required to be added in a particular a/c. User shall press Control+F9.
1. System shall activate memo pad lookup screen.
2. Function A (Add). Press F4. System shall activate Memo Pad Maintenance menu.

Page 260 of 294

Screen 5
3. Topic (mandatory) Enter appropriate text message of memo pad.
4. Function (mandatory) Enter the function code during which the memo pad exception
should be raised by the system. User can press F2 and select appropriate code by
pressing Shift+F4. If the user wants that the system should raise memo pad exception
during all kind of transactions, then he shall enter/select FT (Financial Transaction) in this
field.
5. Intent (mandatory) Enter the purpose of memo pad. User can select intent code from the
list. E.g. if the memo pad exception is to be raised by the system during all kind of
transactions (like cash, clearing & transfer), user shall enter G (General Transaction Alert)
in this field.
6. Security (mandatory) This field has four possible values
Type
security
O (Private)

of When memo pad exception

raised?
Only when the same user does
operations on A/c on which
memo pad is being created
P (Public)
Any user of any of the CBS
branches does operations on A/c
S
Any user of any of the CBS
(Semiprivate)
branches does operations on A/c
Y (System)
Any user of any of the CBS
branches does operations on A/c

Who can delete/modify

memo pad?
Same user and DBA
Any user
Same user and DBA
Nobody

System does not allow the user to enter security as Y (System), as this is reserved for system
created memo pad.
7. A/c No. Enter the A/c No. on which this memo pad entry is being created. If the user
forgets to enter account No., the whole exercise will go waste.
8. User can enter other details, as the case may be.
9. After entering the details, press F4.
10. System shall activate Enter Memo Text field. User shall enter appropriate text message of
memo pad.
11. Press F10 to commit. No verification is required for memo pad creation.

Page 261 of 294

E. DELETING A MEMO PAD ENTRY

As Regards, system does not allow any user to delete system created memo pad entries. User
shall verify/cancel necessary operation on the account.
System allows to delete only user created memo pad. In any menu option, user can press
Control+F9 to bring memo pad lookup screen. Lets take an example of deleting a memo pad
created on a particular account.
1. Function D (Delete). Press F4.
2. A/c No. Enter A/c No. Press F4.
3. System shall display all the memo pads which the user is allowed to delete. i.e. memo pads
created by other users having security as O (Private) and S (Semiprivate) are not displayed
by the system.
4. Press Control+E on the memo pad entry which is to be deleted.
5. Press F10 to commit.
6. System shall come back to memo pad list. But it shall also include the memo pad which is
deleted in the list; this is because system does not refresh the list.
------ * -----

Page 262 of 294

SIGNATURE CAPTURING
Working with SignCap
This chapter describes the using of SignCap right from the invoking of SignCap to using the
various options of SignCap.
Invoking SignCap :

Figure 1. Login window

When you have installed SignCap, the SignCap program is created in your Programs menu. To
invoke SignCap
1. Click on the Start menu and choose SignCap from the Programs group.
2. The login window is displayed. Enter a login name and a valid password as given by the
system administrator.
Users can be Admin users or Normal users. The login window is shown in Figure 1.
3. Click OK to run the application.
If you have entered the valid login name with a valid password, the SignCap Session Parameters
Window is displayed as shown in Figure 2.
Session Details window :
This window allows you to enter a new filename in the default directory or whichever directory
SignCap is loaded, by specifying the file name and path or choose the existing files from the
default path.

Page 263 of 294

Figure 2. Session Parameters window

1. Enter a service outlet code.
If the user logged in is of Admin type, then the Set as default button and the Scan
Parameters button will be enabled. If the user is of the Normal type, then these buttons are
disabled. You can set a directory as the default directory for saving all your images using the
Set As Default option and select the scanner settings for all the scanning operations using the
Scan Parameters button.
2. Clicking on Close will close the application. To continue scanning with default settings click
on Proceed or press Enter. Pressing Escape or Close shall close the application.
DPI, Dots Per Inch denotes the resolution for scanning.
SCAN PARAMETERS
The following screen appears when the Scan Parameters button is clicked

Figure 3. Scan Parameters dialog box

Page 264 of 294

Make the changes as per parameters given in the above figure.

SAVE SETTINGS
This option saves the new settings.
APPLY
If you click the Apply button the scanning parameters in this dialog box are applied to the current
scanning.
CLOSE
If you click on Close, the Session Details window appears. Click on Proceed. The Key Fields
window appears.
Click on the Select TWAIN Scanner button to select a scanner. You can choose the scanner as
the currently connected scanner or any other scanner
SELECTING THE TWAIN SCANNER
Click on the Select TWAIN scanner button in the Scan Parameters window. You can select the
type of the scanner that should be used.

Figure 4. Selecting the Scanner Source

Select the appropriate scanner drive from the Select Source dialog box.
Note:
TWAIN is an international standard for scanners. Any scanner that is TWAIN compatible is
supported by SignCap.
KEY FIELDS WINDOW
On this screen various key fields can be entered. By default, the cursor lies on the Serial No
field.

Page 265 of 294

Figure 5. Key Fields window

If a serial number already exists or the image has been already scanned, then the serial number
can be entered or the corresponding records message can be chosen from the drop down list
box. This enables all the other function keys like Modify, Delete, Previous Record, Next Record
etc. You can make use of these function keys as per your requirement.
The function key F6 allows you to view the signature. If a new image has to be captured, then
click on Enter
ADDING A NEW RECORD
1. For adding a new record, with a blank space in the Serial No field, click Enter. The serial
number is automatically generated.
2. Enter the Product Code
3. Enter the SOL ID
4. Enter the Account No .
IMPORTANT : Account number should always be followed by a zero.
This zero will be converted to check digit as per the program to be provided by Infosys.
e.g. If you are scanning the signatures of SF General a/c and the account number is 9834
and your Sol Id is 015300
Enter Product Code As
: 01 ( 01 is the product code for Saving Fund General)
Enter The Sol Id
: 015300
Enter A/c number as
: 98340 (i.e. 9834 followed by a 0)
Press Tab
You will see that a/c number field has changed to : 0153000100098340

Currency Code and Access Code are default populated as INR and AL respectively
IMPORTANT
Use IN as Access Code In Case Of Inoperative A/cs

Scan upto 100 signatures only in one file

Page 266 of 294

Use different files for different Product Codes

5. Enter the relevant details and click on SCAN or press F6. This takes you to the Scanner
Interface. The scanner interface screen is shown in the figure below.

Figure 6. Scanner Interface

Scan The Signatures as Required.
Figure 7. Signature scanning and saving window
Page 267 of 294

The Display window, which displays the scanned signature and a text box to enter a signature
message associated with that signature appear. Entering the signature message is
mandatory. This is one of the fields on which the signature will be retrieved.

Click the right-mouse button for options like Cut, Crop or Copy.
Click on F10 or on the Save & Close button to save the image and close.
If the size of the image scanned is bigger than that allocated by Signcap, you are prompted
to crop the signature and then save.
Select a portion of the image, using mouse and select the options to crop from the pop-up
menu (got by right clicking the mouse).

The Escape button closes this window without saving. Re-scanning the image is possible during
scanning.
VIEWING A RECORD
If the image is just scanned then pressing space bar refreshes the screen and clicking on the View
button (F6) allows you to view the image.
MODIFYING A RECORD
The field data can be changed. Press F2 to modify the record details.
Use F6 to view the signature. In the display window the signature can be edited. Click on F10 to
update the signature and the associated signature message.
DELETING A RECORD
A record can be deleted by clicking on F3 or the Delete button.
SCROLLING ACROSS RECORDS
By knowing the signature message for a particular record, it can be retrieved. To reach a
particular record, between records, either click on the drop-down
list box to select the messages or type the required serial number in the box provided.
Page Up & Page Down keys can be used to scroll up and down the records.
Click on F7 or << to go to the first record and click on >> or F8 to go to the last record.

Page 268 of 294

BRANCH IMPLEMENTATION CYCLE UNDER CBS

Key
Respo
nsibilit
y
1 Assessment of Bandwidth and RO/ZO
. arranging Leased and/or ISDB
line

Monitorin
g

Duration

ZO/ITD,
HO

42 days
1(Lead time 42
6 weeks)

1. Placement
of
order
for RO/ZO
Hardware/other peripherals and
UPS

ZO/ITD,
HO

140

Parallel
to
activity no. 1

2. Training of End users

RO/ZO
Identification of end users
category wise

ZO/ITD,
HO

40 days
(Lead time
for
supply)
40 Days
(To
be
done in at
least
4
batches of
10
days
duration
each)

140

Parallel
to
activity no. 1

ZO/ITD,
HO

40 Days

140

Parallel
to
activity no. 1

BO

ZO/ITD,
HO

40 days

140

Parallel
to
activity no. 1

BO

ZO/ITD,
HO

40 days

140

Parallel
to
activity no. 1

Activity

Training of end users

3. Signature Scanning for around

10000 signatures (App. 250
signatures per day using at flat
bed scanner)
Identification/Approval of
vendor
for
signature
capturing.
Capturing of signatures
4. Master Data Creation and its
verification for un-computerized
modules
Identification of data to be
captured in respect of
uncomputerised modules
Extraction of data on a
master sheet
Capture of data in-house
or through outside vendor
Checking of Master Data
and its verification
Rectification
of
errors/discrepancies
resulting from checking of
data
5. Cleaning of existing Data,
Tallying of balances if lying
unallied & compliance of premigration check points

Da
y

Predecessor
activity

RO/ZO
BO

Page 269 of 294

6. Site preparation
renovation

and branch BO

Arranging for power load.

Arranging backups (Gene
case of failure of power.
Uninterrupted Power Supply
Security of computer cabin
Computer cabin
Air conditioning of computer
UPS cabin
Earthing for computer syste
User Area installations
Terminal points/Electrical po
cabling/wiring/ducting
7. Installation of hardware/UPS BO
(lead time 1 week)

ZO/ITD,
HO

30 1days

130

Parallel
to
activity no. 1

ZO/ITD,
HO

7 days

4147

ZO/ITD,
HO/ICD,
HO

2 weeks

4862

After
completion of
activity 2 & 7
After
completion of
activity no. 1
to 8

ZO/ITD,
HO

7 days

6369

After
completion of
activity 9

ZO/ITD,
HO

1 day

70

After
completion of
activity 10

ZO/ITD,
HO

2 weeks

7184

After
completion of
activity 11

84

After
completion of
activity 12

8. Pre-Roll out
compliance

Audit

and

its Zonal
Implem
entation
team
leader
and
Branch
Concurr
ent
auditor
9. Pre-migration test upload and Zonal
data correction
Implem
entation
team
and BO
10Migration Activity
Zonal
Implem
entation
team
and BO
11Handling of Post Migration Implem
issues/Handholding Support
entation
team
and BO
12CBS Implementation Signoff
Implem
entation
leader
and
Branch
Incumb
ent
13Total Implementation cycle

ZO/ITD,
HO/ICD,
HO

Page 270 of 294

12 weeks

84

NETWORKING
The bandwidth requirement for the branch may be calculated on the basis of 6 kbps per
concurrent user. The bandwidth is available for a minimum of 64 kbps.
It is proposed to build redundancy of network through ISDN lines, Wireless connectivity,
VSAT etc., which will be decided on branch-to-branch basis.
The branches are advised to ascertain the availability of Roof Top rights for exercising the
option of Wireless as a communication link, as the same is required for installation of
Masts.
The branches are advised to take up with respective RO/ZO for applying for ISDN/Lease
line links.
GUIDELINES FOR THE LOCAL AREA NETWORK
The network installed should follow the international standards for Structural Cabling
System (SCS) as per the EIA/TIA Specifications. The SCS system should have provision
for add, move and changes by the use of patch panels / Jack panels.
Network documentation
Also each branch must ensure the SCS layout diagram and documentation (clearly
documenting which information outlet is connected to with horizontal cable and then to
which port on the patch panel). Cables and patch cords should be marked for identification.
The system integrator who installs the SCS, provides Documentation. Documentation will
help the branch administrator in case of any problem in the local area network. A cable fault
can be easily tracked and if need to be changed due to any unforeseen reason, can be
traced with the help of layout diagram. Also documentation helps when the AMC is awarded
to a vendor who was not the system integrator.
The network should be got audited through an outside agency, which may be approved by
the Zonal Office. Such agencies test each and every node in the network by the use of
scanners (exp Pentascanner or Fluke Meter). The report will have all the technical results
like resistance, impedance, next etc. The important thing that we can look into these reports
is as follows.

Test result of any node should not have failed. If shows failed it should be rectified by
the vendor who has done the cabling or Network integrator.

The length of the cable shown in the result should not be more than 100 Meters.

Test result should clearly show that all the cable pairs are terminated properly at
both ends (Information outlet and patch panel). The result is typically shown in the
following (correct) way.
1
I
1

2
I
2

3
I
3

4
I
4

5
I
5

6
I
6

Some of the wrong terminations are as follows.

Open connection (Wrong)
Page 271 of 294

7
I
7

8
I
8

1
I
1

2
I
2

3
I
3

4
I
4

5
I
5

6
I
6

7
I
7

8
I
8

4
I
4

5
I
5

6
I
6

Cross connection (Wrong)

1
I
1

2
I
2

3
I
3

The Integrator should immediately rectify any core of the cable if shown open or
cross-connected
Draft Format of the Documentation
A draft format of the documentation is shown below:

No.

Information
Outlet No.
Right
Left
Side
side

Patch Cord
No. (I/O
side)

Horizontal
Cable No.

Patch
Patch Cord No.
Panel Port (Between Patch Panel
No.
and Switch)

Switch
Port No.

1
2
3
4
5
The cable used for connecting the computers should be Cat-5 or above supporting at least 100
Mbps of bandwidth.
Structure Cabling Components
Following components should be used for the Structured cabling system in all the branches.
The SCS should follow the following schematic for connecting the end nodes (PCs, Printers etc)
to the Active network device (Switch)
Horizontal Cable 90 Mtrs
Ethernet Switch

Patch Panel /
Jack Panel

PC

Information
Outlet

Patch Cord 2.5 Mtrs

Total Length of the cable = Patch Cord (Between Ethernet Switch and Patch panel) + Horizontal Run (Cable between
Patch panel and Information Outlet) + Patch Cord (Between Information Outlet and PC)
Patch Cord 2.5 Mtrs

= < 100 Mtrs

PATCH PANELS OR JACK PANEL

This passive device is used for the termination of all the cables coming from the information
outlets. It has provision for the termination of all the four pairs of Cat-5 or above type cable on the
backside. Experienced and trained technician using standard tools should do the termination, so
Page 272 of 294

that the losses are minimum. On the front side it has RJ-45 Jacks, which are used for connecting
the patch cords.
HORIZONTAL RUN
This is the Cat-5 or above type cable used between Patch panel and Information outlet. This cable
should not run in parallel to electrical cables and in case of need a safe distance of 12 inches
should be maintained. The length of this cable should not be more than 90 Mtr. This cable is
terminated on Patch panel on one end and information outlet on the other end.
INFORMATION OUTLET
Information outlets are used for the termination of the Horizontal cables. It has provision for the
termination of the cable on the back side of it and has a RJ-45 Jack on the front side. The cable
should be terminated properly by a experienced and trained technician using standard tools, so
that the losses are minimum. The jack on the front side is used for connecting the PC or printer
using patch cord.
PATCH CORD
Patch cord have RJ-45 connector at both ends and come in various lengths like one meters, three
meters etc. Patch cords used should be of standard make and factory crimped, hand crimped
cables should not be used.
Patch cords should be used for connecting

PC or printer to the information outlet.

Patch panel and Ethernet Switch.

Active Devices
The active device used should be Ethernet Switch (SNMP Manageable). Hubs are not advised.
The switch should also be rack mounted ensuring security and protection from dust etc.
Racks
The rack should be provided with earth connection which should be separate from the electrical
earth. It is also advised that local branches ensure that the voltage between neutral and ground is
not more than 2 Volts.
The rack housing all the active and passive devices should be wall mounted or floor mounted (with
wheels). The rack should be placed under temperature control. Rack should also have fan tray
and power supply strip.
Power Supply
The branch should ensure uninterrupted power supply by the use of suitable UPS. The UPS
should be SNMP Manageable. In case the power availability is a problem at certain locations,
branch must ensure power through the use of Generators.

Page 273 of 294

PREMIGRATION AUDIT & IMPLEMENTATION SIGN OFF

Before roll out into Centralized Core Banking System, the branches are expected to
perform certain cleaning/verification of data, creation of signature scanning etc. but despite
clear instructions, there are gaps which came to notice after roll out took place in the pilot
branches. To plug these loopholes, it has been decided that a compulsory pre-rollout audit
of the branches shall be conducted by auditors from I&C Division and once the clear report
is given on the Pre Migration Audit Certificate, the roll out will take place.
Besides, many activities need to be monitored closely during migration phase so as to
ensure that there is a smooth functioning of the branch and proper controls are in place.
Certain updations are required to be made in the migrated data like checking of DP details,
Stop Payments, Standing Instructions, Beneficiaries account number in case of Special
Fixed Deposits, etc. Lack of such updations can lead to serious lapses and create problems
in handling transactions.

To ensure proper monitoring, it has been decided that in respect of any branch under going
CBS implementation, the Zonal Office shall designate a Implementation team leader who
shall monitor and coordinate the entire implementation in respect of that branch including all
pre-migration and post migration activities. Likewise branch will also designate an official
preferably Second in command as Coordinator who shall be responsible for ensuring the
smooth implementation of all pre-migration and post migration activities in the branch.
The Implementation Team Leader, branch coordinator and Incumbent In Charge shall
execute a SIGN OFF document in respect of having successfully concluded implementation
of CBS Project in the branch. This certificate shall be submitted to concerned Zonal Office,
I&C Division and IT Division. The SIGN OFF report should be placed before the Zonal
Manager within a fortnight from the date of implementation. Any deficiencies/outstanding
issues shall be closely monitored/followed till these are resolved and final closure certificate
is submitted in this respect to the concerned Zonal Office and the Zonal Office in turn will
confirm to I&C Division, HO for having addressed all the pending issues.

Page 274 of 294

PREMIGRATION AUDIT CERTIFICATE

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Name of the BO:

Name of the Incumbent In charge:
Name of Proposed Branch Coordinator:
Proposed date of implementation of CBS in the Branch:
It is hereby confirmed as under:
1. Signature Scanning is completed.
2. The Master Data Creation is completed and duly verified for all the modules which are
not computerized like; FD, Loans, Inoperative A/Cs etc.
3. All accounts with zero balance have been closed as per the procedure of the bank.
4. Details about Standing Instructions, Cheque Books Issued, Stop Payments,
Nominations etc. have been noted and are ready for upload.
5. Outstanding entries of Sundries/Suspense/Cash Order etc. are taken tallied with the GL.
6. The particulars relating to Sanction Limit, expiry date, Repayment period, Drawing
Power including insurance and charge details if any etc. have been set correctly in all
the loan accounts in the existing system (In the event of any errors in the above
information, the records shall not be uploaded in Finacle).
7. All balances are tallied.
8. All heads are tallied with corresponding GL heads.
9. TDS Details from the beginning of the financial year to migration date is ready.
10. All liens against deposits, Stop payment instructions, and Standing instructions have
been entered into the existing system and are ready for cross check in Finacle whether
all of them are uploaded or not.
11. All the identified End-users of the Branch have trained.
12. Valid MIS codes for each loan a/c have been finalised by the branch for entering the
same in Finacle after migration (List of valid MIS codes has been separately circulated
to the Zones).
13. The necessary Hardware (PCs, Printers and other peripherals)have been received and
installed.
14. The necessary Software (Signcap, Internet Explorer 5.5) have been installed in the PCs.
15. UPS of suitable capacity has been installed/available and checked up by Vendor
Engineer and certified as well conditioned.
16. Lease/ISDN Lines are installed and are working properly.
17. Sufficient load / Power is available and Backup for continous power supply is available.

BRANCH COORDINATOR

CONCURRENT AUDITOR

INCUMBENT IN CHARGE

Page 275 of 294

POST MIGRATION CHECK LIST

1. Check the Customer details for error / Omissions.
2. Check for the upload of Balances in the individual accounts as well as sum of Balance with
GL.
3. Check the maximum allowable limit in all accounts.
4. Check the DP account
5. Ensure that DACC limit Absolute is not set, where not required.
6. DP indicator to be set to D = Derived from securities for CCA & ODA type of a/cs.
7. All LAA type of A/Cs accounts are uploaded with the DP indicator as M = maintained by
user. Use option SRM to set up the security from all accounts.
8. The sector codes, sub-sector codes, etc. to be modified.
9. Charge details and insurance details are to be input manually in case where applicable.
10. Check the Title of the Customer and ensure its correctness.
11. Check whether all the Standing Instructions, Lien against deposits, Stop Payment
instructions are uploaded into Finacle or not.
12. Take note, whether all the migration account balances has become NIL or not. Otherwise,
we have to pass direct G.L. entries in conformity with the Transferor-Transferred mapping
schemes under the guidance of the migration team. Hard copies of these vouchers should
also be retained in branch records.
13. Pre-Migration and Post-Migration reports containing Account numbers, Account Names and
Balance to be tallied thoroughly and records to be preserved for subsequent audits.
14. Ensure that SRM records are created for all the loans a/cs including NPA & Protested.

Page 276 of 294

MIGRATION DAY
1. Clearing Balances. Inward, Outward are to be uploaded in the old server on the day before
the day end and should be a clear balance so that its accounted for uploads.
2. Ensure a list of all customer balances of SB/CA/CC/Loans are taken after day end. Also
prepare a list of outstanding ODBC/IDBC/POs/DDs, ex-advice/DD Payable/FIBC/LC
(Inland as well as Foreign), BG (Inland & Foreign) after the day end.
3. Ensure that all DDs are printed before day-end so that the PO/DD numbers are allotted
under the existing system.
4. The day end of the Branch should be completed by the time advised by Zonal Office.
5. Transferor source and Database backup is taken into Two DATs with proper label, sealed
and duly signed by Branch Head. One DAT to be sent to Data Center and another set to be
kept with the Branch.
Note: Application Backup can be taken earlier to migration day but database backup must be
taken at the day of migration before starting migration and we have to ensure that there is no
change of data after backup.
6. DAT backup should be read to ensure that Backup is taken properly and can be restored.
7. Availability of local hardware engineer for new and old hardware infrastructure, ATM
Maintenance Engineer and Electrical Engineer is to be ensured on the D-day.

Page 277 of 294

(The Certificate is to be submitted to Zonal Office/ICD/ITD with in a fortnight from the date of
implementation)
CBS IMPLEMENTATION SIGN OFF CERTIFICATE
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Name of the BO:

Name of the Incumbent In charge:
Name of Branch Coordinator:
Name of Implementation Team Leader:
Date of implementation of CBS in the Branch:
It is hereby confirmed as under:
1. All Signatures relating to SF, CA, CC, OD, FD RD have been uploaded and duly verified (it
may be noted in the absence of proper verification of signature in Finacle the same are not
available for retrieval).
Module
No. of A/cs
No. of Signature
No. of Signature
Uploaded
verified

SF
CA
CC
OD
FD
RD
2. The uploaded balances in the individual A/cs have been checked and tallied with the premigration balance reports including tallying with GL heads.
3. All the standing instructions, Lien against deposits, Stop Payment instructions have been
checked in the uploaded a/cs in Finacle.
4. Confirmed that in FD accounts (where the interest is paid periodically) the relevant credit
account numbers have been entered/verified. (The same have not been migrated in some
cases. In the absence of this interest will be credited to sundries account by the system).
5. It is confirmed that the entire upload A/c balances have been made Nil. Exceptions, if any,
are reported separately with proper justification (These need to be monitored and followed
up closely till the same are made nil).
6. All pre-migration and Post-migration reports containing Account Numbers, Account Names
and Balance have been checked and tallied thoroughly and records have been preserved
for subsequent audits.
7. The sector codes, sub-sector codes etc. have been entered in all Loans & CC/OD a/cs
(please note that in case these details are not entered, MIS of the branch cannot be
generated).
8. Charge details and insurance details have been incorporated in all a/cs where applicable.
9. It is confirmed that the DP indicator has been set to D=Derived from securities for CC and
OD type of a/cs.
10. In all Loan type of A/cs uploaded with the DP indicator has been set as E=Equal to
Sanctioned Limit.
11. It is confirmed that SRM (Security Register Maintenance) records are created for the entire
loan A/cs including NPA and Protested (Please note that in case the records are not
created, it will not reflect the DP available in the A/c).
12. It is confirmed that the relevant Interest Codes have been entered in all the loan accounts
including NPA and PA accounts
and the values uploaded under the field Account
Preferential Interest (Dr.) have been deleted.
13. It is confirmed that all loan & other deposit a/cs which were required to be manually
captured in the system (a/cs which could not be migrated through migration tools) have
been captured in Finacle.
14. It is confirmed that all Bills/LCs/LGs have been captured in the system.
Page 278 of 294

15. All Day end reports including Cash Book/Long Books/Transfer Journals/Day
Book/Exception Reports etc. have been generated on a day-to-day basis during
implementation phase and checked.
16. It is confirmed that all system backups/application backups of the old system have been
taken and properly preserved in duplicate.
17. Ledger printouts of all accounts have been taken and properly preserved for future
reference

BRANCH COORDINATOR

IMPLEMENTATION TEAM LEADER

INCUMBENT IN CHARGE

Page 279 of 294

IMPORTANT INQUIRY AND REPORT OPTIONS IN FINACLE

Sl.
No.

Menu
Option

ACCBAL

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

ACI
ACLI
ACS
ACSBIO
ACSP
AFI
AFINQU
AFP
AINTRPT
AITINQ
BKTI
BR
BRTI
CTI
CUMI
CUS
EXCPRPT
FTI

20

FTR

21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

GSPI
IOGLT
IOT
ISTR
PNBREP
PNBRPT
PSP
RRCDI
SIETR
SII
SIRP
SPRG
TEI
TI
UNIVIEW

36

BDR

37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44

BEHI
BI
BICR
BINTRPT
BPMI
BRBPR
BRCR
BRRBPR

Menu Description
Components of Account Balance
Inquiry
Customer Accounts Inquiry
Account Ledger Inquiry
Account Selection
A/c Shadow Balance Inquiry
Account Selection Print
Audit File Inquiry
Audit File Inquiry
Audit File Print
Interest Report For Accounts
Account Interest Details Inquiry
Bank Table Inquiry
Balancing Report
Branch Table Inquiry
Calendar Table Inquiry
Customer Master Inquiry
Customer Selection
Exceptions Report
Financial Transactions Inquiry
Financial Transactions Inquiry &
Report
General Scheme Parameters Inquiry
Inquire on GL Transactions
Inquire on Transactions
Inter Sol Transaction Report
Customised Statements for PNB
Customised Reports for PNB
Pass Sheet Print
Reference Code Inquiry
SIs Executed Today Report
Standing Instructions Inquiry
Standing Instructions Register Printing
Stop Payment Register
Transactions Exceptions Inquiry
Transactions Inquiry
Unified View Of Accounts
Review of Pending And Dishonoured
Bills
Bills Events History Inquiry
Bills Inquiry
Bills Interest Collected Report
Interest Report For Bills
Bills Parameter Master Inquiry
Balancing Report - Bills Purchased
Balancing Report - Collection
Bills Register Report - Bills Purchased
Page 280 of 294

Module
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
BILLS
BILLS
BILLS
BILLS
BILLS
BILLS
BILLS
BILLS
BILLS

45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

BRRCR
CABR
CUBI
FBAIC
FBPADB
FI
ACTI
ACTODI
ATOR
CULI
LLIR
TODCS
TODRP
IMI
IMR
ISI
ISIA
ISR
ISRA
ITI

65

LNDI

66

LNHTIR

67

LNI

68

LTL

69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80

INTSI
INTTI
IOCLS
OIQ
REJREP
ASTI
DDIC
DDID
DDII
DDIP
HII
LAGI

81

LAODR

82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90

LAOPI
PARTINQ
PHINQ
CUIR
SRL
SRMRPTS
WIAAL
DEPINT
DEPMOD

91

FDOCD

92

GDET

Bills Register Report - Collection

Co-accepted Bills
Bills Inquiry
Advance Interest Calculated
List of Pending and Dishonored Bills
Fate Inquiry
Account Turnover Inquiry
Account TOD Inquiry
A/Cs Turnover Report
Customer Unutilised Limit Inquiry
Limit Liability Inquiry/Report
TOD Criteria and Selection
TOD Register Printing
Inventory Movement Inquiry
Inventory Movement Report
Inventory Inquiry, Split and Merge-EM
Inventory Inquiry, Split and Merge
Inventory Status Report-EM
Inventory Status Report
Instruments Table Inquiry

BILLS
BILLS
BILLS
BILLS
BILLS
BILLS
CC/OD
CC/OD
CC/OD
CC/OD
CC/OD
CC/OD
CC/OD
CC/OD/CA/SB
CC/OD/CA/SB
CC/OD/CA/SB
CC/OD/CA/SB
CC/OD/CA/SB
CC/OD/CA/SB
CC/OD/CA/SB
CC/OD/DL/TL/PC/BILLS
Limit Node Details Inquiry
etc
CC/OD/DL/TL/PC/BILLS
Limit Node History/Tran Inquiry/Report
etc
CC/OD/DL/TL/PC/BILLS
Limit Node Inquiry
etc
CC/OD/DL/TL/PC/BILLS
Limit Tree Lookup
etc
Interest Slab Inquiry
CC/OD/DL/TL/ PC ETC
Interest Table Inquiry
CC/OD/DL/TL/ PC ETC
Inquire On Clearing Transaction Sets
CLEARING
Outward Clearing Instruments Inquiry
CLEARING
Rejected Instruments Report/Advice
CLEARING
Amount-slab Table Inquiry
COMM/ CHARGES ETC
DD Credits Inquiry
DD
DD Debits Inquiry
DD
Specific DD Issued Inquiry
DD
Specific DD Paid Inquiry
DD
Hot Items Inquiry
DD/TPO ETC
Loans General Inquiry
DL/TL
Loans
Overdue
Demand DL/TL
Reminder/Report
Loans Overdue Position Inquiry
DL/TL
Inquiry on Partitioned Account
DL/TL
Inquiry on History of Partition A/c
DL/TL
Customer Interest Report
DL/TL/ CC/OD
Security Register Lookup
DL/TL/ CC/OD
Security Register Module Reports
DL/TL/ CC/OD
What If Analysis of Account Liability
DL/TL/ CC/OD
Interest calculator for deposits
FD
Deposit Modeling
FD
Fixed Deposits Opening Closure FD
Details
General Deposits Details
FD
Page 281 of 294

93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102

132
133
134
135
136

Maturity Periodwise Dist of Deposits

Account Balance Details
Deposit Transactions Report
Related Accounts Lookup For Deposits
Schemewise Distribution of Deposits
Cust-wise TDS Report(A/c Level Tax)
Term Deposits Interest Slabs Inquiry
Position Of Currency
ECM Purpose History Maintainance
Foreign Bills Balancing Register
FOREIGN
BILL
DISCREPANCY
FBDISCR
REPORT
FBDLNK
Foreign Bills to be Delinked Statement
FBEF
Bills of Entry Statement
FBENC
Foreign Bills ENC Statement
FBHI
Foreign Bills History Inquiry
FBI
Foreign Bills Inquiry
FBICS
Interest Collected on Foreign Bills
FBIR
Import Register Report
FBOIB
Statement of Overdue Import Bills
FBPMI
FEX Bills Parameter Master Inquiry
FBPS
Foreign Bills Purchased Subsidiary
FBRI
FEX Bills Register Inquiry
FBSNC
Foreign Bills SNC Statement
FBUBR
Undrawn Balance Register
Foreign Currency Purchase Sale
FCNPS
Report
FDD
Flow Amt-wise Distribution of Deposits
FWCLIAB
F/C Liability Register
FWCODLST List of overdue and matured F/Cs
FXPSRG
Purchase / Sale register printing
PLR
Partywise Liability Register
PRRTL
Ratelist Printing
RRETURN
R-Return and Schedules Statements
RTHQRY
Ratelist History Query
XOSSTMT
XOS Statement
FWCHI
Forward Contract History Inquiry
FWCQRY
Query on forward contracts
FWCRG
Forward booking register printing
GBM
Govt. Business Moudle
Report on Expiring Documentary
DCEXPLST
Credits
DCLIABRG Documentary Credits Liability Register
DCQRY
Query on Documentary Credits
DCREG
Documentary Credits Register Printing
DCRPTS
DC Reports and Advises
DCSTMT
Statement of Documentary Credit

137

ACLPOA

Office Account Ledgers Print

138
139
140

BGLIMIT
BGMARGIN
GI

141

GILR

Guarantee LIMIT
BG Margin Printing
Guarantee Inquiry
Guarantees Issued
Register

103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131

MDD
ACDET
DTR
RELACI
SDD
TDSREP
TVSI
CRNPOS
ECMHIS
FBBR

cum

FD
FD/RD
FD/RD
FD/RD
FD/RD
FD/RD
FD/RD
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FOREIGN BILLS
FWD CONTRACTS
FWD CONTRACTS
FWD CONTRACTS
GOVT BUSINESS
ILC/FLC

ILC/FLC
ILC/FLC
ILC/FLC
ILC/FLC
ILC/FLC
INC/EXP/SUND/SUSP
ETC
LG
LG
LG
Liabilty LG

Page 282 of 294

142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152

GPI
PRTCON
DEFPC
EXPRPT
FBER
FBERC
PCARPT
PCLIALST
POVDPC
CIPPRPT
RINTINQ

153

RINTRPT

154
155
156
157
158
159
160

RPCRPT
ABMR
SIMM
SIR
MSGOIRP
MSOIRP
MSTRP

Guarantee Parameters Inquiry

PRTCON : Print Consolidated Report
Default PC under WTPCG/PCG
Reports Of Export Orders
Export Register Report
Foreign Bills Export Claim Report
Reports Of PCA Accounts
Packing Credit Liability List
Partywise Overdue Packing Credits
Customer Interest Pref and Peg Report
Interest Inquiry For RPC Accounts
Interest
Report
For
RPC
Disbursements
Reports Of RPC Accounts
Report of Accounts Below Min Balance
StockInvest Maintenance
StockInvest Reports
Outstanding Items Report
Minor Subs Outstanding Items Rep
Minor Subsidiaries Transaction Report

Page 283 of 294

LG
P&L
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC
PC/CC/OD
RPC
RPC
RPC
SB/CA
STOCK INVEST
STOCK INVEST
SUNDRY/SUSP ETC
SUNDRY/SUSP ETC
SUNDRY/SUSP ETC

LIST SCHEME AND PRODUCT CODE

Schm
Code

CAEEF
CAESC
CAEXH
CAGEN
CANRE
CANRO
CAQ22
CARFC
CAVOS
CDEPD
CAREF
SBCGS
SBGEN
SBNRE
SBNRO
SBNRS
SBPEN
SBQ22
SBRFC
SBSAL
SBSTF
FANUS
FCNOA
FCNRA
FCNRB
FCNRO
FCNRS
FCNSA
FDANU
FDMB
FDMBS
FDOR
FDORS
FDSUG
FDSUH
FDSUM
FDSUQ
FDVAY
FMNRE
FMNRN
FMNRO
FMNRS
FNRE
FNRNR

Scheme Description

Product Default Upload A/c No.

code
GL
Subhead
DEPOSIT SCHEMES
CURRENT ACCOUNT EEFC
03
03100
UPL31111
CURRENT A/C ESCROW
03
03100
UPL31111
CURRENT ACCOUNTEXCHANGE
VO
03100
UPL31111
CURRENT ACCOUNT GENERAL
21
03100
UPL31111
CURRENT ACCOUNT NRE
23
03100
UPL31111
CURRENT ACCOUNT NRO
24
03100
UPL31111
CURRENT ACCOUNT QA22
25
03100
UPL31111
CURRENT ACCOUNT-RFC
RF
03100
UPL31111
CURRENT ACCOUNT-VOSTRO
VO
03100
UPL31111
CALL DEPOSIT - DEMAND
03
03200
UPL31113
REFUND PAYABLE
26
03500
UPL31116
SAVINGS FUND CAPITAL GAIN
10
05100
UPL31299
SAVINGS FUND GENERAL
01
05100
UPL31299
SAVINGS FUND -NRE
05
05100
UPL31299
SAVINGS FUND -NRO
06
05100
UPL31299
SAVINGS FUND NON RES. SPL
07
05100
UPL31299
SAVINGS FUND PENSION
03
05100
UPL31299
SAVINGS FUND QA 22
08
05100
UPL31299
SAVINGS FUND - RFC
05
05100
UPL31299
SAVINGS FUND SALARY
04
05100
UPL31299
SAVINGS FUND STAFF
02
05100
UPL31299
FD-ANUPAM DEPOSIT-STAFF
72
10100
UPL31311
FCNR(A) - ORDINARY
FC
10100
UPL31311
FCNR(A) MBFD
FC
10100
UPL31311
FCNR(B) MBFD
FC
10100
UPL31311
FCNR(B) - ORDINARY
FC
10100
UPL31311
FCNR(B) - SPECIAL
FC
10100
UPL31311
FCNR(A) - SPECIAL
FC
10100
UPL31311
FD-ANUPAM DEPOSIT
71
10100
UPL31311
FIXED DEP. MULTI BENEFIT
31
10100
UPL31311
MULTI BENEFIT - STAFF
32
10100
UPL31311
ORDINARY FIXED DEPOSIT
41
10100
UPL31311
ORDINARY FD STAFF
42
10100
UPL31311
FD -SUGAM DEPOSIT (CUM)
61
10100
UPL31311
FD-SUGAM DEPOSIT-HALF/YLY
63
10100
UPL31311
FD-SUGAM DEPOSIT-MONTHLY
65
10100
UPL31311
FD-SUGAM DEPOSIT-QRTLY
67
10100
UPL31311
FD - VARSHIK AAY YOJANA
55
10100
UPL31311
FD - MULTI BENEFIT- NRE
TD
10100
UPL31311
FD - MULTI BENEFIT- NRNR
TE
10100
UPL31311
FD - MULTI BENEFIT- NRO
TF
10100
UPL31311
FD-MULTIBENEFIT-NRSR
TV
10100
UPL31311
ORDINARY FD - NRE
TH
10100
UPL31311
ORDINARY FD - NRNR
TI
10100
UPL31311
Page 284 of 294

Schm
Code
FNRO
FSNEM
FSNOM
FSNRE
FSNRM
FSNRN
FSNRO
FSNRS
FSNSM
FSPM
FSPMS
FSPQ
FSPQS
FSUGS
FSUHS
FSUMS
FSUQS
FVAYS
RFCMB
FCCER
FCCES
RD
RDFLX
RDFXS
RDNRE
RDNRO
RDSTF
RDNHB
FDCDN
CABNK
CAOB
FDSDF
CAIMP
DLAGR
DLFST
DLGEN
DLPGL
DLPPL
DLSTF
WCFCL
CCAGR
CCOTH
ODAGN
ODAST
ODGEN
TLAAC
TLAAP

Scheme Description

Product Default Upload A/c No.

code
GL
Subhead
ORDINARY FD - NRO
TJ
10100
UPL31311
SPECIAL FD MONTHLY - NRE
TS
10100
UPL31311
SPL FD MONTHLY - NRO
TU
10100
UPL31311
SPECIAL FD QTRLY - NRE
TK
10100
UPL31311
FSPL FD MONTHLY - NRNR
TT
10100
UPL31311
SPECIAL FD QTRLY - NRNR
TL
10100
UPL31311
SPECIAL FD QTRLY - NRO
TM
10100
UPL31311
SPECIAL FD QTRLY - NRSR
TX
10100
UPL31311
SPL FD MONTHLY - NRSR
TY
10100
UPL31311
SPL. FIXED DEP. (MONTHLY)
51
10100
UPL31311
SPECIAL FDR MONTHLY-STAFF
52
10100
UPL31311
SPECIAL FDR. ( QUARTERLY)
53
10100
UPL31311
SPECIAL FDR QTRLY (STAFF)
54
10100
UPL31311
FD-SUGAM DEP-CUMM-STAFF
62
10100
UPL31311
FD-SUGAM -HALF/YLY-STAFF
64
10100
UPL31311
FD-SUGAM-MONTHLY-STAFF
66
10100
UPL31311
FD-SUGAM DEP-QRTLY STAFF
68
10100
UPL31311
FD-VARSHIK AAY YOJANA-STF
56
10100
UPL31311
RFC - MULTI BENEFIT - FD
RF
10100
UPL31311
CASH-CERTIFICATE
33
10200
UPL31312
CASH-CERTIFICATE-STAFF
34
10200
UPL31312
RECURRING DEPOSIT
81
10400
UPL31314
RECURRING DEP.- FLEXI RD
76
10400
UPL31314
REC.DEP.- FLEXI RD-STAFF
10
10400
UPL31314
RECURRING DEPOSIT - NRE
TN
10400
UPL31314
RECURRING DEPOSIT - NRO
TO
10400
UPL31314
RECURRING DEPOSIT - STAFF
82
10400
UPL31314
RECURRING DEPOSIT NHB
10
10500
UPL31315
FD - CALL DEP. ON NOTICE
10
10600
UPL31316
CA-SBI/SBIASS/NATION BANK
27
15100
UPL31411
C/A-OTHER BANKS
27
15200
UPL31412
SECURITY DEPOSIT - STAFF
TR
30300
UPL31712
IMPREST A/C ADMN. OFFICE
22
88303
UPL32112
LOANS SCHEMES IN FINACLE
DL-AGRICULTURE
PA
60100
UPL 52111
DL-FESTIVAL ADVANCE STAFF
PB
60100
UPL 52111
DL-GENERAL
PC
60100
UPL 52111
DL - GOLD LOAN TO PUBLIC
PF
60100
UPL 52111
DL-PENSIONERS' PERS LOAN
PD
60100
UPL 52111
DL-STAFF(OTHER THAN FEST)
PE
60100
UPL 52111
FOREIGN CURRENCY WC LOAN PC
61100
UPL52112
CASH CREDIT - AGRICULTURE
86
61100
UPL52112
CASH CREDIT - OTHERS
87
61100
UPL52112
OD ANUPAM ( GENERAL)
91
62100
UPL52113
OD ANUPAM (STAFF)
92
62100
UPL52113
OVERDRAFT ( GENERAL)
93
62100
UPL52113
TL-ANIMAL DRIVEN CARTS
AA
63100
UPL52114
TL-BEE KEEPING (APICULTR)
AB
63100
UPL52114
Page 285 of 294

Schm
Code

Scheme Description

TLABG
TLACH
TLACP
TLACS
TLADR
TLAFR
TLAFS
TLAFT
TLAGS
TLAHC
TLAKG
TLAMC
TLAMI
TLAOT
TLAPG
TLAPL
TLAPM
TLAPT
TLATR
TLAWL
TLIMT
TLIST
TLPHL
TLREC
TLRED
TLRMP

TL-BIO-GAS PLANT
TL-COMBINE HARVESTOR
TL-CROP LOAN (STL)
TL-COLD STR RECP-PTT/FRT
TL-DAIRY DEVELOPMENT
TL-FORESTRY
TL-FISHERIES DEVELOPMENT
TL-FARMERS TRUCKS & TRAN
TL-GOAT/SHEEP
TL-HORTICULTURE DEV
TL-KITCHEN GARDEN
TL-MUSHROOM (CULT/SPAN)
TL-MINOR IRRIGATION
TL-AGRI MISC
TL-PIGGERY
TL-POULTRY FARMING
TL-AGR PRODUCE MKTG
TL-POWER TILLER
TL-TRACTOR (INCL REPAIR)
TL-WASTE LAND DEVELOPMNT
TL-SSI( FOR > 3 YEARS)
TL-SSI-ST
TL-HOUSING LOAN PUB.
TL-SP.CR-ENGI.CONTRACTORS
TL-EDUCATION-VIDYALAKSHYA
TL-SP.CR-MED.PR- CAR LOAN
TL-SPL.CR-PETROLEUM
PRODU
TL-PROF. & SELF EMPLOY
TL-SP-CR-CYCLE RIKSHA
TL-SP.CR-RETAIL TRADE
TL-SMALL BUSINESS
TL-SP-CR-SOLAR WATER HEAT
TL-SP.CR-SMALL ROAD TRANS
TL-SP.CR WK SC CONSMPTION
TL-HOUSING LOAN TO WEAKER
TL-SP CR WEAKER SEC MISC
TL-FOREIGN CURRENCY
TL-OTHERS (MED & LAR IND)
TL-CONSUM. LOAN TO PUB
TL-PER-DEF/GOV.EM/DR/TEAC
TL - GOLD LOAN TO PUBLIC
TL-AGN.IMMOVABLE
PROPERTY
TL-FUTURE LEASE RENTAL.
TL-NON PRIORITY-TRADERS
TL-VEHICLE LOAN-PUBLIC
TL-STF-CONVEYANCE-COMPD

TLRPP
TLRPS
TLRRK
TLRRT
TLRSB
TLRSH
TLRST
TLRWC
TLRWH
TLRWM
TLFCL
TLIOT
TLPCL
TLPDG
TLPGL
TLPIP
TLPLR
TLPTR
TLPVL
TLSCC

Product Default Upload A/c No.

code
GL
Subhead
AC
63100
UPL52114
AD
63100
UPL52114
AE
63100
UPL52114
AF
63100
UPL52114
AG
63100
UPL52114
AH
63100
UPL52114
AI
63100
UPL52114
AJ
63100
UPL52114
AK
63100
UPL52114
AL
63100
UPL52114
AM
63100
UPL52114
AN
63100
UPL52114
AO
63100
UPL52114
AP
63100
UPL52114
AQ
63100
UPL52114
AR
63100
UPL52114
AS
63100
UPL52114
AT
63100
UPL52114
AU
63100
UPL52114
AV
63100
UPL52114
IB
63101
UPL52114
IA
63101
UPL52114
NC
63102
UPL52114
JA
63102
UPL52114
JB
63102
UPL52114
JC
63102
UPL52114
JD
JE
JF
JG
JH
JI
JK
JL
JM
JN
PC
IC
NA
NB
NH

63102
63102
63102
63102
63102
63102
63102
63102
63102
63102
63103
63103
63103
63103
63103

UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114

ND
NE
NF
NG
LA

63103
63103
63103
63103
63103

UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114
UPL52114

Page 286 of 294

Schm
Code

Scheme Description

Product Default Upload A/c No.

code
GL
Subhead
TLSCN TL-STAFF-CONSUMER LOAN
LB
63103
UPL52114
TLSCP TL-STF-COMPUTER LOAN
LC
63103
UPL52114
TLSCS TL-STF-CONVEYANCE-SIMPLE
LD
63103
UPL52114
TLSHC TL-STAFF-HL-COMPD (PLR)
LE
63103
UPL52114
TLSHS TL-STF-HL-SIMPLE INTT
LF
63103
UPL52114
TLSRF TL-STF-RELIEF-EQ./FLOOD
LG
63103
UPL52114
DUDEF DUE DATE DEFAULTS
DF
64100
UPL52115
PCGEN RUPEE PACKING CREDIT
70
70100
UPL54111
EXDDB OD AGNST DDB/EXP RECVABL
PC
70100
UPL54111
FOBD FX BILL(EBR) DISCOUNTED
72
72100
UPL54113
CAIMP IMPREST A/C ADMN. OFFICE
22
88303
UPL58113

Page 287 of 294

EXERCISE FOR CREATING CUSTOMER MASTER

CUSTOMER CREATION
A. Create a customer master for a customer using the option CUMM.
The requirements are as under :

The account is for a customer operating the account singly.

The customer is not a NRI, Minor or Trade Finance customer.

Note down the customer id.

Do verification.
Modify the address of the customer.
Verify the modification.
EXERCISE FOR OPENING OF ACCOUNT
ACCOUNT OPENING (SB/CA) TRANSACTION MAINTENANCE
Open a single Savings (MOP-Self) A/c and Current account for the above customer ( under
scheme codes SBGEN and CAGEN ) using option OAAC.
Note down the account number generated by the system.
Verify the account using menu option OAACAU.
Modify Mode of Operation in SB A/c to E/S and add a Joint Holder to the Account - ACM Menu 'M'
option
Verify the Modification - ACM 'V' option
EXERCISE FOR TRANSACTIONS MAINTENANCE
1. In the SF account you have already opened Enter, Post and Verify the following
transactions:
1. Cash Receipt -Rs 5,000
2. Cash Receipt -Rs 1,00,000
3. Cash Payment Rs 10,000
4. Cash Payment Rs 2,000
2. In the CA account you have already opened Enter, Post and Verify the following
transactions :
5. Cash Receipt - Rs 50,000
6. Cash Receipt - Rs 1,00,000
7. Cash Payment Rs 20,000
8. Cash Payment Rs 5,000
9. Transfer a sum of Rs 12,000 from SF account to the CA account.
10. Transfer a sum of Rs 22,000 to SF account from the CA account
11. Transfer a sum of Rs 5,000 from SF account to the CA account
12. Transfer a sum of Rs 25,000 to SF account from the CA account
3. Note down any exceptions that are raised for discussion /clarification etc.
After having done the transactions check the balance of all the concerned accounts through
ACCBAL , ACLI
Page 288 of 294

EXERCISE FOR INVENTORY MOVEMENT

1. Inquire on the inventory of SB-20 Chequebooks available in Double-Lock (DL/DL). Note
down the available series. ISIA-I
2. Move 100 cheque leaves from Double Lock (DL/DL) to Employee Location (EM/58845).
IMC-A Note the Inv. Transaction No.
3. Verify the Movement IMC-V
4. Split the 100 Chequeleaves available at Employee Location (EM/58845) into 5
Chequebooks of SB-20. ISIA-S
5. Inquire on inventory available with EM/58845. ISIA-I
6. Add New Inventory Items ( SB-20 10000 leaves) Received in the branch & move it to
Double Lock ( ZZ/EXT to DL/DL ) IMC-A
7. Verify the Movement. IMC-V
EXERCISE FOR CHEQUE BOOK ISSUE / STOP PAYMENTS
1. Issue a SB-20 leaves cheque book to the customer in SB A/c opened by you and verify it.
2. Issue a CA-50 leaves cheque book to the custom in CA A/c opened by you and verify it.
3. Mark stop payment on 2 cheque leaves- reason Instrument Lost
4. Grant an advance of Rs.80,000/- to yourself against LFC TA Bill from Suspense - Others
A/c and reverse it by recovering Rs.5,000/- from SB A/c.
EXERCISE ON REMITTANCES (DD/MT/PO)

Issue Demand Draft for Rs.40,000/- by cash, drawn on BO: Agra, RCC favouring "M/s ABC
& Company" (TM)

Issue a Demand Draft for Rs.15,000/- by transfer, to the debit of SB A/c opened by you,
drawn on BO: Calcutta, CDPC favouring "SB Mukherjee". (TM)

Issue 4 DDs for Rs.10,000/- each, by cash, drawn on BO: Ahmedabad, RCC, favouring
"Reliance Industries" (DDMI).

Cancel the draft issued at Sl. No. 1.

Issue a cash order fvg. "HDFC" for Rs.25,000/- by cash.

Issue a TPO for credit to SB A/c of "KANHAIYA LAL" at BO: NIT Faridabad for Rs.1,000/- to
the debit of SB A/c opened by you.

Pay a Demand Draft by cash for Rs.10,000/- presented on counter.

Page 289 of 294

EXERCISE ON TERM DEPOSITS

OPENING NEW ACCOUNT
1.

Open a Term Deposit Account in Scheme Code FDMB for a period of one year for
Rs.2,00,000/- - for the customer already opened. Deposit Money through TM option.

2.

Open a Term Deposit Account in Scheme Code FSPQ for a period of one year for
Rs.50,000/- - for the customer already opened. Use X option to create the
transactions.

CLOSURE OF FD ACCOUNT
3.

Run INTRUN menu option to calculate up-to-date interest in one of the FD accounts that
you have opened.

4.

Run TDSCALC menu option and see the TDS report.

5.

Close the FD Account using option CAAC.

RENEWAL
6.

Try to locate an existing account with ACDET menu, already matured.

7.

Renew this account.

Page 290 of 294

EXERCISE ON CLEARING OPERATIONS (OUTWARD/INWARD)

OUTWARD CLEARING :
1.

Lodge 10 outward cheques for different amounts/banks using Menu OCTM in the zone
MICR-0. Note down the Set ID nos.

2.

Lodge 3 cheques against 1 voucher in same account. Note down the set ID no.

3.

Lodge 1 cheque of Rs.15,000/- for credit in 3 different accounts (or Rs.5,000/- each).
Note down the Set ID no.

4.

Get the lodged instruments verified using Menu OCTM for all the set IDs lodged at serial
no. 1 & 2.

5.

Identify unverified sets through option IOCLS.

6.

Verify the unverified set through OCTM.

7.

Generate report through Menu PCLSO.

8.

Modify set lodged through O.I. - Did system allow modification?

(Suspension/Release/Regulationsation/Closure) for the zone may be done by one
user from the concerned branch).

INWARD CLEARING :
1.

Lodge inward clearing (10 instruments) in the zone code MICR2 using Menu ICTM.

2.

Lodge two returnings, out of outward clearing cheques lodged using ICTM.

3.

Use MICZ I-Function ('S' - Sub option) to view statistics on cheques lodged against BAR
amount.

(Verification/Suspension/Validation/Posting/Closure for the zone may be done by one user from

the concerned branch).

Page 291 of 294

EXERCISE ON CASH CREDIT/OVERDRAFT ACCOUNTS

1. Open a CC account scheme code CCOTH for limit of Rs. 1,00,000/2. Verify the Account Opening.
3. Create a SRM record of stock for Rs. 2 lacs (for the purpose of DP, Margin-25%)
4. Verify the SRM record.
5. Put through a debit transaction of Rs. 2000 in the account and post/verify it.
6. Post another Debit Transaction of Rs. 1.20 Lacs in the account by granting Instant TOD
from TM-N Option.
7. Open an OD account Scheme code ODGEN for a limit of Rs. 3 lacs.
8. Verify the Account Opening.
9. Create a SRM record for NSC of Rs. 4 lacs (for the purpose of DP, Margin 30%)
10. Verify the SRM record.
11. Put through a debit transaction of Rs. 5000 in the account and post/verify it.
Add another limit with limit level interest for earlier & new limits through ACLHM Menu M option
/ A Sub option
EXERCISE ON TERM LOAN/DEMAND LOAN
1.

Open a Demand Loan Account under Scheme Code DLGEN for Rs. 1 lac sanctioned
against the security of Gold jewellery to be repaid in one instalment, 1 year from today.
Disburse it through 'Account Opening'.

2.

Verify the account.

3.

Create a SRM record for jewellery and verify it.

4.

Credit an amount of Rs.20,000/- in the account on account of recovery made in the

account.

5.

Open a Term Loan Account under Scheme Code TLPVL for Rs. 5 lacs.

6.

Verify the account.

7.

Create a SRM record and verify it.

8.

Disburse the loan through TM and verify it.

9.

Credit an amount of Rs.30,000/- on account of recovery made in the account.

Page 292 of 294

EXERCISE ON STANDING INSTRUCTIONS

1.

Create a Standing Instruction using Option SIM as follows :

Mode of Execution - at Day Begin
Frequency - Daily
Autopost - 'Y'
Delete if posting fails - 'N'
The transaction must be as follows in the SF account opened by you Dr Account 'A' - Rs. 100/Cr Account 'B' - Rs. 100/-

2.

Create a Standing Instruction for issuance of Draft from SB account

every month.

EXERCISE ON BILLS
1.

Lodge two collections bills (ODBC) for Rs.1,00,000/- and Rs.2,00,000/- drawn by M/s
ABC on M/s XYZ Co. using the register ODBC- sub-type D BILL

2.

3.

4.

Please do the following :

Register ODBC
i.
realization - 1st bill
Sub type D BILL
ii.
returning process 2nd bill
Purchase a bill from M/s S & Sons for Rs.2,50,000.
Realise it, close it.
Register ODD
Sub-type BILLS
Purchase a bill from M/s Lotus Co. for Rs.3,00,000/-.
Go through the following functions: register ODD
Sub-type BILLS
i.
dishonour the bill
ii.
recover the bill
iii.
close the bill
Purchase a cheque for Rs.6,500/- for PQR, a cheque for Rs.3,600/- for ABC and realize
using the appropriate registers :
register ODD
sub-type INSCR

INWARD BILLS
1.
Lodge a bill received from M/s Can Ban, Mumbai for Rs.5,50,000/- and realize the bill.
register IDBCP subtype D BILL
Lodge an inward bill received from Kolkata for Rs.6,00,000/- [IDD] and return it. IDD sub-type
Bills

Page 293 of 294

COMPREHENSIVE EXERCISE
1.

Open one Customer Master each for a single, minor and trade finance customer, verify
it. Use Menu CUMM

2.

Open one CA, SB, C/C, T/L and Bill Account each under scheme codes CAGEN,
SBGEN, CCOTH, TLSSI & ODD Scheme code. Verify these.

Use Menu OAAC &

OAACAU.
3.

CA, SB and TL accounts will be opened for general customers whereas CC and OD
accounts will be opened for trade finance customers.

4.

Create an SRM record for your C/C and T/L a/c (MENU SRM)

5.

Make a disbursement each in above T/L and C/C account - using Menu TM.

6.

Go in ACM Menu and make modification and check it after verification.

7.

Move inventory of cheque books (SBI 20) in your location from double lock (MENU
IMC), get it verified (MENU IMC), split inventory and make inquiry using MENU ISIA.

8.

Issue cheque book to one of your accounts - using MENU ICHB. Verify it. Mark stop
payment for one of the cheques and try its posting in TM - use Menu SPP.

9.

Make Transactions using Menu TM in all your above accounts using actual vouchers of
BO: Janpath given to you. Make various inquiries using Menu FTI and ACLI.

10.

Open one FDR for Rs.1,00,000/- in scheme code FDMB for 1 year. Open it in back date
so as it matures today (use Menu OAAC), verify the account OAACAU. Run interest
calculation and TDS calculation (Menu INTRUN & TDSCALC). Renew it for one year use Menu OAAC and then close pre-mature - use Menu CAAC. Make inquiry using
Menu RELACI.

11.

Make an advance of Rs.10,000/- from suspense.

12.

Issue one DD and one MT each. Make payment of the DD.

Page 294 of 294